FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 0 of 7 (CONTENTS)

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

Part 1/7

001. HCOPL 28 JAN 82 r. 27mar82 The New Hubbard Solo Auditor Course
002. HCOB   6 OCT 81 TECH FILMS-AND VERBAL TECH
003. HCOPL  7 FEB 65 reiss 27 AUG 80 KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING
004. HCOPL 17 JUN 70RA rev. 27 Apr 81 TECHNICAL DEGRADES

Part 2/7

005. HCOB  26 MAR 79RB rev. 2Sep79 MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION
006. HCOB   4 SEP 71 ALTERATIONS 
007. HCOB   9 FEB 79 reis. 12 Apr 83 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH
008. HCOB  13 OCT 79 CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING
009. HCOPL 25 SEP 79 SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP
010. HCOPL  7 MAY 69 STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOR
011. HCOB  12 SEP 78 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTS
012. HCOPL 11 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES MATERIALS - SECURITY OF DATA
013. HCOPL  8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE VIOLATIONS
014. HCOPL  8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE REGULATIONS AND SECURITY
015. HCOPL 16 AUG 66 CLEARING COURSE SECURITY
016. HCOPL 28 SEP 67 r. 19 Jul 75 CONFIDENTIAL DATA
017. HCOPL 12 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES
018. HCOPL 29 JUN 68 ENROLLMENT IN SUPPRESSIVE GROUPS
019. HCOB  22 MAY 69 DIANETICS, ITS BACKGROUND
020. HCOPL 14 OCT 68RA r. 19 Jun 80 THE AUDITOR'S CODE
021. HCOPL 27 MAY 65 PROCESSING
022. HCOB   5 DEC 73 THE REASON FOR Q AND A

Part 3/7

023. HCOB   5 APR 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION
024. HCOPL 17 APR 70 AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION"
025. HCOB  14 SEP 71R r. 3 Feb 75 SOLO AUDITORS RIGHTS
026. HCOB   7 MAR 75 EXT AND ENDING SESSION
027. HCOB  10 APR 72 PREOTS DON'T C/S
028. HCOB  11 SEP 70 SOLO ASSISTS
029. HCOB  11 AUG 78 MODEL SESSION
030. HCOB  11 AUG 78 RUDIMENTS, DEFINITIONS AND PATTER
031. HCOB  12 FEB 62 HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS AND MISSED WITHHOLDS
032. HCOB  15 AUG 69 FLYING RUDS
033. HCOB   6 SEP 68 CHECKING FOR FALSE READS
034. HCOB  27 MAY 70R r. 3 Dec 78 UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS
035. HCOB  14 MAR 71R r. 25 Jul 73 F/N EVERYTHING
036. HCOB  11 MAY 69R r. 8 Jul 78 METER TRIM CHECK

Part 4/7

037. HCOPL 21 FEB 79 r. 6 May 79 E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET
038. HCOB   7 FEB 79R r. 15 Feb 79 E-METER DRILL 5RA CAN SQUEEZE
039. HCOB  21 JAN 77RB r. 25 May 80 FALSE TA CHECKLIST
040. HCOB   3 SEP 78 DEFINITION OF A ROCK SLAM
041. BTB   14 JAN 63 r. 25 Jul 74 RINGS CAUSING "ROCK SLAMS"
042. HCOB  21 JUL 78 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE?
043. HCOB  21 SEP 66 ARC BREAK NEEDLE
044. HCOB  10 DEC 76RB r. 25 May 80 SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
045. HCOB   2 DEC 80 FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION MODIFIED
046. HCOB  20 FEB 70 FLOATING NEEDLES AND END PHENOMENA

Part 5/7

047. HCOB  18 APR 68 NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV
048. HCOB  10 DEC 65 E-METER DRILL COACHING
049. HCOB  25 MAY 62 E-METER - INSTANT READS
050. HCOB   8 JUN 61R r. 22 Feb 79 E-METER WATCHING, ... PLAY DIXIE
051. HCOB   5 AUG 78 ASSESSMENT AND HOW TO GET THE ITEM
052. HCOB  29 APR 69 ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST
053. HCOB  22 JUL 78 ASSESSMENT TRs
054. HCOB  14 JUL 70 SOLO CANS
055. HCOB  28 FEB 71 METERING READING ITEMS
056. HCOB  29 APR 80 PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE
057. HCOB   3 JUL 71R r. 22 Feb 79 AUDITING BY LISTS
058. HCOB  20 DEC 71R r. 27 SEP 77 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF
059. HCOB  21 JUN 72 Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
060. HCOB  19 MAR 71 L1C

Part 6/7

061. HCOB  22 APR 80 ASSESSMENT DRILLS
062. BTB   20 AUG 70R r. 19 Aug 74 TWO COMPLETE DIFFERENCES
063. HCOB   1 AUG 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING
064. HCOB  22 AUG 66 FLOATING NEEDLES, LISTING PROCESSES
065. HCOB  14 SEP 71R r. 19 Jul 78 DIANETIC LIST ERRORS
066. HCOB  20 APR 72 PRODUCT PURPOSE AND WHY AND WC ERROR CORRECTION
067. HCOB  19 NOV 78 L & N LISTS - THE ITEM "ME"
068. HCOB  11 APR 77 LIST ERRORS, CORRECTION OF
069. HCOB  17 MAR 74 TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS
070. HCOB  28 MAY 70 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF
071. HCOB  23 SEP 68 VIOLATION OF THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING
072. BTB    7 NOV 72R r. 28 Jul 74 L&N LISTS
073. HCOB  29 SEP 68R r. 31 MAY 80 LIST CORRECTION - THE SHORT L4

Part 7/7

074. HCOB  15 DEC 68RA r. 11 Apr 77 L4BRA
075. HCOB  26 APR 71 TRs AND COGNITION'S
076. HCOB  26 APR 71 SOLO COGNITION'S
077. HCOB  30 APR 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE
078. HCOB   5 DEC 79 ...THE COMM CYCLE ... IN SOLO AUDITING
079. HCOB  22 JUL 71R r. 8 Mar 82 SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN
080. HCOB   9 JUL 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION
081. HCOB   6 DEC 79R r. 22 SEP 80 SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS
082. NEW SOLO AUDITORS COURSE Part B
083. HCOB  30 SEP 81R r. 30 Jan 82 STD. C/S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SOLO...
084. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 0 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 0
085. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 1 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 1
086. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 2 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 2
087. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 3R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 3R
088. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 4 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 4
089. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 5 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 5
090. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 6 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 6
091. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 7 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 7
092. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 8 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 8
093. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 9 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 9
094. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 10 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 10
095. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 11 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 11
096. HCOB  30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 12R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 12R


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists.  It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics.  By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion.  

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight.  Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 1 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

Part 1/7

001. HCOPL 28 JAN 82 r. 27mar82 The New Hubbard Solo Auditor Course
002. HCOB 6 OCT 81 TECH FILMS-AND VERBAL TECH
003. HCOPL 7 FEB 65 reiss 27 AUG 80 KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING
004. HCOPL 17 JUN 70RA rev. 27 Apr 81 TECHNICAL DEGRADES

Part 2/7

005. HCOB 26 MAR 79RB rev. 2Sep79 MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION
006. HCOB 4 SEP 71 ALTERATIONS 
007. HCOB 9 FEB 79 reis. 12 Apr 83 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH
008. HCOB 13 OCT 79 CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING
009. HCOPL 25 SEP 79 SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP
010. HCOPL 7 MAY 69 STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOR
011. HCOB 12 SEP 78 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTS
012. HCOPL 11 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES MATERIALS - SECURITY OF DATA
013. HCOPL 8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE VIOLATIONS
014. HCOPL 8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE REGULATIONS AND SECURITY
015. HCOPL 16 AUG 66 CLEARING COURSE SECURITY
016. HCOPL 28 SEP 67 r. 19 Jul 75 CONFIDENTIAL DATA
017. HCOPL 12 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES
018. HCOPL 29 JUN 68 ENROLLMENT IN SUPPRESSIVE GROUPS
019. HCOB 22 MAY 69 DIANETICS, ITS BACKGROUND
020. HCOPL 14 OCT 68RA r. 19 Jun 80 THE AUDITOR'S CODE
021. HCOPL 27 MAY 65 PROCESSING
022. HCOB 5 DEC 73 THE REASON FOR Q AND A

Part 3/7

023. HCOB 5 APR 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION
024. HCOPL 17 APR 70 AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION"
025. HCOB 14 SEP 71R r. 3 Feb 75 SOLO AUDITORS RIGHTS
026. HCOB 7 MAR 75 EXT AND ENDING SESSION
027. HCOB 10 APR 72 PREOTS DON'T C/S
028. HCOB 11 SEP 70 SOLO ASSISTS
029. HCOB 11 AUG 78 MODEL SESSION
030. HCOB 11 AUG 78 RUDIMENTS, DEFINITIONS AND PATTER
031. HCOB 12 FEB 62 HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS AND MISSED WITHHOLDS
032. HCOB 15 AUG 69 FLYING RUDS
033. HCOB 6 SEP 68 CHECKING FOR FALSE READS
034. HCOB 27 MAY 70R r. 3 Dec 78 UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS
035. HCOB 14 MAR 71R r. 25 Jul 73 F/N EVERYTHING
036. HCOB 11 MAY 69R r. 8 Jul 78 METER TRIM CHECK

Part 4/7

037. HCOPL 21 FEB 79 r. 6 May 79 E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET
038. HCOB 7 FEB 79R r. 15 Feb 79 E-METER DRILL 5RA CAN SQUEEZE
039. HCOB 21 JAN 77RB r. 25 May 80 FALSE TA CHECKLIST
040. HCOB 3 SEP 78 DEFINITION OF A ROCK SLAM
041. BTB 14 JAN 63 r. 25 Jul 74 RINGS CAUSING "ROCK SLAMS"
042. HCOB 21 JUL 78 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE?
043. HCOB 21 SEP 66 ARC BREAK NEEDLE
044. HCOB 10 DEC 76RB r. 25 May 80 SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
045. HCOB 2 DEC 80 FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION MODIFIED
046. HCOB 20 FEB 70 FLOATING NEEDLES AND END PHENOMENA

Part 5/7

047. HCOB 18 APR 68 NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV
048. HCOB 10 DEC 65 E-METER DRILL COACHING
049. HCOB 25 MAY 62 E-METER - INSTANT READS
050. HCOB 8 JUN 61R r. 22 Feb 79 E-METER WATCHING, ... PLAY DIXIE
051. HCOB 5 AUG 78 ASSESSMENT AND HOW TO GET THE ITEM
052. HCOB 29 APR 69 ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST
053. HCOB 22 JUL 78 ASSESSMENT TRs
054. HCOB 14 JUL 70 SOLO CANS
055. HCOB 28 FEB 71 METERING READING ITEMS
056. HCOB 29 APR 80 PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE
057. HCOB 3 JUL 71R r. 22 Feb 79 AUDITING BY LISTS
058. HCOB 20 DEC 71R r. 27 SEP 77 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF
059. HCOB 21 JUN 72 Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
060. HCOB 19 MAR 71 L1C

Part 6/7

061. HCOB 22 APR 80 ASSESSMENT DRILLS
062. BTB 20 AUG 70R r. 19 Aug 74 TWO COMPLETE DIFFERENCES
063. HCOB 1 AUG 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING
064. HCOB 22 AUG 66 FLOATING NEEDLES, LISTING PROCESSES
065. HCOB 14 SEP 71R r. 19 Jul 78 DIANETIC LIST ERRORS
066. HCOB 20 APR 72 PRODUCT PURPOSE AND WHY AND WC ERROR CORRECTION
067. HCOB 19 NOV 78 L & N LISTS - THE ITEM "ME"
068. HCOB 11 APR 77 LIST ERRORS, CORRECTION OF
069. HCOB 17 MAR 74 TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS
070. HCOB 28 MAY 70 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF
071. HCOB 23 SEP 68 VIOLATION OF THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING
072. BTB 7 NOV 72R r. 28 Jul 74 L&N LISTS
073. HCOB 29 SEP 68R r. 31 MAY 80 LIST CORRECTION - THE SHORT L4

Part 7/7

074. HCOB 15 DEC 68RA r. 11 Apr 77 L4BRA
075. HCOB 26 APR 71 TRs AND COGNITION'S
076. HCOB 26 APR 71 SOLO COGNITION'S
077. HCOB 30 APR 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE
078. HCOB 5 DEC 79 ...THE COMM CYCLE ... IN SOLO AUDITING
079. HCOB 22 JUL 71R r. 8 Mar 82 SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN
080. HCOB 9 JUL 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION
081. HCOB 6 DEC 79R r. 22 SEP 80 SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS
082. NEW SOLO AUDITORS COURSE Part B
083. HCOB 30 SEP 81R r. 30 Jan 82 STD. C/S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SOLO...
084. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 0 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 0
085. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 1 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 1
086. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 2 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 2
087. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 3R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 3R
088. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 4 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 4
089. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 5 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 5
090. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 6 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 6
091. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 7 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 7
092. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 8 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 8
093. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 9 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 9
094. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 10 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 10
095. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 11 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 11
096. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 12R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 12R


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

001. HCOPL 28 JAN 82 r. 27mar82 The New Hubbard Solo Auditor Course


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 28 JANUARY 1982R
ISSUE I
REVISED 27 MARCH 1982

Cl IV Orgs 
and above 

CANCELS & REPLACES
HCO PL 6 Dec 79RB
(REVISION IN SCRIPT)


THE NEW HUBBARD SOLO AUDITOR COURSE

(NON-CONFIDENTIAL)


(This checksheet was redesigned by LRH to include basic
books, theory, L & N and more thorough meter trilling. It
is now possible to make a far superior solo auditor than
ever before.)

PART ONE

(The Hubbard Solo Auditor Course has been divided into
two parts to enable Scientologists to get started on the
route to Solo and OT, in Class IV orgs. This enables more
Clears to make faster progress up the Bridge. Part Two of
this course and OT Preparation, are done at SH orgs or
higher orgs. )


NAME:_______________________________DATE STARTED:____________

ORG:_______________________________ DATE COMPLETED: ________


PREREQUISITES:

1. The HQS Course, or Class IV.

2. The Basic Study Manual Course or Student Hat.

3. A TRs Course.

4. ARC SW and Grades 0-IV each run to full EP with Ability
Gained for each Grade with good Success Stories. (All
Expanded Grades processes run, if necessary, to achieve
this.) (The exception being if the person went Clear on NED
prior to completing expanded grades.)

5. Has gone Clear on NED auditing, with DCSI done and the
State of Clear verified.

Has completed the SUNSHINE RUNDOWN.

6. Or, having completed Expanded Grades through Exp. Grade
IV and having completed NED (but without having gone Clear
on NED) the student may start the SOLO AUDITOR COURSE, Part
One in a Class IV org (or Class 0 - IV Academy courses,
prior to the Solo Auditor Course) and then go on to Part
Two in an SH org, in order to be able to solo audit on the
Clearing Course in an AO.

LENGTH OF COURSE: 4 weeks full time.

BOOKSTORE ITEMS: The student is required to own the
following items:

1. DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH.

2. SCIENTOLOGY, THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT.

3. SCIENTOLOGY 0-8,

4. SCIENTOLOGY 8-8008,

5. THE PROBLEMS OF WORK,

6. DIANETICS 55!

7. SELF ANALYSIS,

8. A Mark VI E-Meter.

USE OF SOLO AUDITOR TRAINING FILMS: The training films
included on the Solo Auditor Course, though seen by the
student at specified points on the checksheet, are not
limited to one showing of a film per student. Once a
student has seen any one of the Solo Course films
initially, the should see the film again as many times as
required during the course.

PURPOSE: Part One of the Solo Auditor Course has been made
available at Class IV orgs to enable the student to make
progress toward becoming a Solo Auditor. Part Two is
available at SH (and higher) orgs. The Solo Auditor Course
(Part One and Part Two) is designed to give the data and
drills needed to make a superb Solo Auditor.

CERTIFICATE: The graduate of Part One and Part Two of the
Solo Auditor Course is awarded the certificate of HUBBARD
SOLO AUDITOR.

STUDY TECH: This course is studied per HCO PL 25 Sep 79 I
URGENT IMPORTANT, SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP.

Students who are not Fast Flow, per HCO PL 25 Sep 79 I, are
to starrate and be Method 4 Word Cleared on those items on
the checksheet marked with an asterisk (*).

Full Study Tech is to be applied throughout the course.
Study the data in checksheet order.

It is vital that you do not go past a word you do not fully
understand. Make full use of the Dianetics and Scientology
Technical Dictionary and a regular dictionary for any words
you do not understand.

NOTE: If, in doing the drills on this checksheet, the
student cannot perform an earlier drill that applies, the
supervisor must give the student a "pink sheet" to redo the
earlier drill he has missed. This includes issuing a pink
sheet on any applicable material of the study prerequisites
for the course, should this be required for successful
completion of the course.

NOTE: Your success on the OT Courses is dependent upon your
diligence, full application of study data and honest
application of the materials of this course. It is vital
that you do not pass yourself on any materials, drills or
auditing actions until you are fully certain you have
understood and can competently apply the data and skills.
Your future on the route to OT depends on this. The Solo
Course is complete within itself. However the student must
realize that there are many courses available to make him a
top line auditor. Any student desiring higher auditor
training may also become a Class IV Auditor by doing
Academy Level Courses and a Class VI Auditor on the Saint
Hill Special Briefing Course. The Hubbard New Era Dianetics
Course, while it. is not a prerequisite for the Hubbard
Solo Auditor Course, is also recommended for the student
who desires further knowledge of the mind.


************
SECTION ZERO

INTRODUCTION

1. FILM: TR 12 (Training Instruction Film No. 12): THE SOLO AUDITOR

2. HCO PL 6 Oct 81 URGENT - IMPORTANT TECH FILMS AND VERBAL TECH


************
SECTION ONE

KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING

1. HCO PL 7 Feb 65 KSW Series 1, KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING ________
Reiss. 27.8.80 

2. HCO PL 17 Jun 70RA KSW Series 5 TECHNICAL DEGRADES ________
Re-rev. 27.4.81 

3. HCOB 26 Mar 79RB MISUNDERSTOODS WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION ________
Rev. 2.9.79 Esto Ser 35RB, W/C Ser 60RB, Prod Debug Ser 7R

*4. HCOB 4 Sep 71 II W/Cing Series 19 ALTERATIONS ________

5. HCOB 9 Feb 79 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH ________

*6. HCOB 13 Oct 79 W/Cing Series 66 CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING ________

7. HCO PL 25 Sep 79 I URGENT-IMPORTANT, SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP ________


************
SECTION TWO

ADVANCED COURSES SECURITY AND REGULATIONS

1. HCO PL 7 May 69 II STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOR ________

2. HCOB 12 Sep 78 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTs ________

3. HCO PL 11 Aug 71 V SECURITY OF DATA ________

4. CLAY DEMO: Why confidential materials must be safeguarded.________

5. HCO PL 7 Dec 71 ADVANCE COURSE VIOLATIONS ________

*6. HCO PL 8 Jan 81 ADVANCE COURSE REGULATIONS AND SECURITY ________

7. HCO PL 16 Aug 66 II CLEARING COURSE SECURITY ________

8. B.P.L. 20 Sep 67R CONFIDENTIAL DATA ________
Rev. & Reiss. 19.7.75 as B.P.L. 

9. HCO PL 12 Aug 71 IV OT COURSES ________

10. HCO PL 29 Jun 68 ENROLLMENT IN SUPPRESSIVE GROUPS ________

11. ESSAY: Write an essay on the purpose and intention
of ethics security on Advanced Courses. ________


************
SECTION THREE

DIANETICS: THE MODERN SCIENCE OF MENTAL HEALTH

1. BOOK ONE:

(a) Chapters I to V (includes preamble). ________

(b) ESSAY: Write an essay on what a science of the
mind must be composed of. ________

(c) DEMO: Demonstrate the Four Dynamics.
(Dynamics 1 to 4) ________


2. BOOK TWO:

(a) Chapters I to V. ________

(b) DEMO: What is meant by A=A=A. ________

(c) Chapters VI to X. ________

(d) CLAY DEMO: An example of contagion of aberration. _______


3. BOOK THREE:

(a) Chapters I to IV. ________

(b) ESSAY: Why you need to attack an engram rather
than flee from it or ignore it. ________

(c) DEMO: Demonstrate the difference between the
analytical mind and the reactive mind. ________

(d) Chapters V to X.

(e) DEMO: Demonstrate a Contra-Survival Engram ________

a Pro-Survival Engram ________

a Sympathy Engram. ________


4. TECH DICTIONARY: Define:

(a) A Lock ________

(b) A Secondary ________

(c) An Engram. ________


5. CLAY DEMO: (a) A Lock ________

(b) A Secondary ________

(c) An Engram. ________


6. HCOB 22 May 69 DIANETICS ITS BACKGROUND ________

7. TAPE: 28 Feb 57 THE PARTS OF MAN ________

8. TAPE 14 Apr 59 MECHANISMS OF THE MIND ________

9. CLAY DEMO: Do a clay demo showing the relationship of:

(a) Body ________

(b) Mind ________

(c) Thetan. ________


************
SECTION FOUR

SCIENTOLOGY, THE FUNDAMENTALS OF THOUGHT

1. Read Chapters One and Two. ________

2. DEMO: The Cycle of Action. ________

3. Read Chapter Three. ________

4. DEMO: The Conditions of Existence: Be, Do and Have. ________

5. Read Chapter Four. ________

6. DEMO: a) The First Dynamic ________

b) The Second Dynamic ________

c) The Third Dynamic ________

d) The Fourth Dynamic ________

e) The Fifth Dynamic ________

f) The Sixth Dynamic ________

g) The Seventh Dynamic ________

h) The Eighth Dynamic ________

7. Read Chapter Five. ________

8. DEMO: The A-R-C Triangle. ________

9. Read Chapter Six. ________

10. DEMO: Life as a Game. ________

11. Read Chapter Seven. ________

12. DEMO: The Parts of Man (Thetan, Mind, Body) ________

13. Read Chapter Eight. ________

14. DEMO:

a) Axiom One ________

b) Axiom Two ________

c) Axiom Three ________

d) Axiom Four ________

e) Axiom Five ________

f) Axiom Six ________

g) Axiom Seven ________

h) Axiom Eight ________

i) Axiom Nine ________

j) Axiom Ten ________

15. Read Chapter Nine ________

16. DEMO:

a) Know ________

b) Not-Know ________

c) Remember ________

d) Forget ________

17. Read Chapters Ten and Eleven. ________

18. DEMO: How auditing relates to the Goal of Scientology. ________

19. Read Chapter Twelve ________

20. CLAY DEMO: A person assuming a valence. ________

21. Read "The Aims of Scientology." ________


************
SECTION FIVE

SCIENTOLOGY 0-8

1. Read Chapter One, Section One. ________

[steps 2. and 3., demos of things in section one, are
missing from our copy - the second line of step 3 is below]

you about The Factors. ________

4. Read Chapter One, Section Two. ________

5. Read Chapter One, Section Three. ________

6. DEMO: Considerations take rank over the
mechanics of space, energy and time. ________

7. Read Chapter One, Section Four. ________

8. Read Chapter Two, Section One. ________

9. Read Chapter Two, Section Two. ________

10. Read Chapter Two, Section Three. ________

11. Read Chapter Two, Section Four. ________

12. Read Chapter Two, Section Five. ________

13. Read Chapter Two, Section Six. ________

14. ESSAY:

a) Write up briefly which points of these
Codes you mainly have in. ________

b) Write up briefly which points of these
Codes you would like to improve on. ________

15. Read Chapter Three, Section One. ________

16. DEMO: The purpose of the mind is to solve problems
relating to survival. ________

17. Read Chapter Three, Section Two. ________

18. DEMO: The dynamic principle of existence SURVIVE! ________

19. Read Chapter Three, Section Three. ________

20. DEMO: The use of a Gradient Scale. ________

21. Read Chapter Three, Section Four. ________

22. DEMO: The worth of any organism. ________

23. Read Chapter Four. ________

24. ESSAY: Write up examples of ten of the perceptics. ________

25. Read Chapter Five. ________

26. DRILL: Spot three different tone levels in another person.

27. ESSAY: Write up an example of how the Emotion, Affinity,
Reality, Communication, Behavior and Physiology of
someone you know relates to that person's tone level. ________

28. ESSAY: write an example of someone going down
the CDEI scale. ________

29. CLAY DEMO: How the Two Rules for Happy Living
relate to the Effect Scale. ________

30. Read Chapter Six. ________


************
SECTION SIX

SCIENTOLOGY 8-8008

1. Read the Foreword and The Factors. ________

2. Read "The Beingness of Man." ________

3. Read "Theta-Mest Theory." ________

4. DEMO:

a) Matter ________

b) Energy ________

c) Space ________

d) Time ________

5. Read "Affinity, Communication and Reality."

6. DEMO: How the ARC triangle relates to the Tone Scale. ________

7. DEMO: The difference between Identity and Individuality. ________

8. DEMO: Flows between two terminals. ________

9. CLAY DEMO: A facsimile. ________

10. Read "Differentiation, Association and Identification" ________

11. DEMO: An A = A = A. ________

12. ESSAY: Write a brief essay on how the responsibility
level of the preclear depends upon his willingness or
unwillingness to handle energy. ________

13. DRILL: Spot where three people are on the Chart of
Attitudes. ________ 

14. CLAY DEMO: What happens with a pc's postulates 
during processing. ________

15. Read "Standard Operating Procedure 8" ________

16. DEMO: Positive gain. ________

17. DEMO: The relationship between Waste and Can't Have. ________

18. Read "Certainty Processing" ________

19. DEMO: The anatomy of a maybe. ________

20. Read the Glossary, clearing each term. ________

21. Read "Six Levels of Processing - Issue 5" ________

22. ESSAY: Write an essay on how each point given
under "Rudiments" relates to auditing ________

23 Read "Games Processing" ________

24 DEMO: The goal of Scientology. ________

25. DEMO: A game. ________

26. Read "Havingness" ________

27. CLAY DEMO: Havingness. ________

28. ESSAY: Why it is important for a thetan to be able
both to accept and to reject things. ________


************
SECTION SEVEN

PROBLEMS OF WORK

1. Read Chapter One. ________

2. DEMO: What holding a job depends on. ________

3. Read Chapter Two ________

4. DEMO: The principle of the Confusion and the Stable Datum. ________

5. DEMO: Control. ________

6. Read Chapter Three. ________

7. DEMO: The definition of Work, "activity with purpose" ________

8. ESSAY: Write an essay on the cause of distaste for work. ________

9. Read Chapter Four. ________

10. CLAY DEMO: The parts of control. ________

11. Read Chapter Five. ________

12. DEMO: What a person will do if he lacks problems,
opponents and counter-purposes. ________

13. CLAY DEMO: What a game consists of. ________

14. Read Chapter Six. ________

15. DEMO: Affinity. _______

16. DEMO: Reality. ________

17. DEMO: Communication. ________

18. ESSAY: How you could apply the ARC triangle to 
a life situation. ________

19. Read Chapter Seven.

20. DEMO: What causes exhaustion and how to handle exhaustion. ________

21. DEMO: Introversion and how to remedy it. ________

22. DEMO: How to handle fixed attention. ________

23. ESSAY: Write a brief essay on how you could apply
the material in this chapter to improve the conditions
of others regarding work. ________

24. Read Chapter Eight. ________

25. DEMO: The ingredients of success. ________


************
SECTION EIGHT

DIANETICS 55!

1. Read the Foreword. ________

2. Read Chapter One.

3. DEMO: Why knowledge of the mind makes a
person more capable of remaining free. ________

4. ESSAY: Why suppressives consider that people
should be kept ignorant of the mind ________

5. Read Chapter Two. ________

6. DEMO: The differences between an Awareness
of Awareness unit and mechanics. ________

7. Read Chapter Three. ________

8. ESSAY: Write a brief essay on what things people
commonly mistakenly think they are. ________

9. CLAY DEMO: The State of Clear. ________

10. DEMO: The difference between Clear and the state of Exterior. ________

11. Read Chapter Four. ________

12. ESSAY: Write a brief essay on why people find it
easier to see that they could improve than they can
see their errors or inabilities. How is this datum of use? ________

13. DEMO: The parts of the definition of Comm. ________

14. DEMO: The definition of Reality. ________

15. DEMO: The definition of Affinity. ________

16. DEMO: Why processing is directed toward the increase
of ability. ________

17. Read Chapter Five. ________

[steps 18. to 23., which are demos and reading chapter six,
are missing from our copy]

24 DEMO: The mechanism of entrapment. ________

25. DEMO: How 2 way communication solves entrapment. ________

26. Read Chapter Seven. ________

27. DEMO: Outflowing communication. ________

28. DEMO: Inflowing communication. ________

29. ESSAY: How could you get someone into communication
(a) with a piece of equipment, (b) with his PT environment. ________

30. Read Chapter Eight. ________

31. DEMO: A stuck flow and how it comes about. ________

32. Read Chapter Nine. ________

33. CLAY DEMO: Two Way Communication showing
all parts of the communication formula. ________

34. Read Chapter Ten. ________

35. ESSAY: Why Acknowledgments are important
and what they accomplish. ________

36. DEMO: Why preclear originations are important. ________

37. Read Chapter Eleven. ________

38. CLAY DEMO:

a) Other-determinism ________

b) Self-determinism ________

c) Pan-Determinism ________

39. Read Chapter Twelve. ________

40. DEMO: The principle that an auditor gives
power to everything he validates. ________

41. DEMO: How Straightwire processes work ________

42. DEMO: How Objective processes work. ________

43. ESSAY: How duplication relates to auditing. ________

44. Read Chapter Thirteen. ________

45. DEMO: How each of the Six Basic Processes
are communication processes ________

46. CLAY DEMO: The following parts of a communication cycle:

a) Originated communication ________

b) People to communicate to ________

c) An Answer ________

d) An Acknowledgment ________

e) An Arrival ________

f) A departure ________

47. Read Chapter Fourteen. ________

48. DEMO: How the MEST universe is a game. ________

49. Read Chapter Fifteen. ________

50. DEMO: How Matter, Energy, Space and Time are barriers.

51. CLAY DEMO: The following rules:

a) Process towards truth ________

b) Process towards ability ________

c) Process towards life. ________

52. ESSAY: Write a brief essay on ARC processing. ________

53. Read Chapter Sixteen. ________

54. DEMO: The difference between Exteriorization and
"buttered all over the universe." ________


************
SECTION NINE

SELF ANALYSIS

1. Read the Publisher's Synopsis. ________

2. Read the Author's Introduction. ________

3. Read Chapter One and Chapter Two. ________

4. DEMO: The meaning of the word SURVIVAL ________

5. Read Chapter Three. ________

6. DEMO: The demarcation point between survival and succumb ________

7. DEMO: How a collective state is organized. ________

8. DEMO: The difference between Man and an animal. ________

9. DEMO: The relationship between awareness and survival. ________

10. Read Chapter Four ________

11. DEMO: The difference between Life and the MEST universe. ________

12. CLAY DEMO: The purpose of the mind with regard to survival. ________ 

13. DEMO: Why a mind that seeks to "survive" only for self
is on the way to succumb. ________

14. ESSAY: Write how you could recognize from the results of
their actions, the difference between someone who is operating
toward survival and someone who is operating toward succumb
for themselves and others. ________

15. Read Chapter Five.

16. DEMO: How pain relates to loss ________

17. DEMO: The result of accumulated pain and
unconsciousness. ________

18. DEMO: The result of erasing pain and unconsciousness. ________

19. Read Chapter Six ________

20. Study the Chart of Human Evaluation ________

21. DRILL: Choose three people that you know well and plot
them across the Chart. ________

22. ESSAY: Write a brief essay on the effect of pain on
experience and on how experience is returned to the
individual as he goes up scale. ________

(NOTE: The exercises of Self Analysis are not done on this course.)


************
SECTION TEN

AUDITING

*1. HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA THE AUDITOR'S CODE Rev. 19.6.80 ________

*2. HCO PL 27 May 65 PROCESSING ________

3. CLAY DEMO: Each of the three oldest rules in auditing
and how the Solo Auditor might apply each of them ________

a) ________

b) ________

c) ________


4. HCOB 5 Dec 73 THE REASON FOR Q AND A _______

[5. ??]

6. HCOB 5 APR 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION ______

7. DEMO: Demonstrate three different ways to Q & A. ________

*8. HCO PL 17 Apr 70 II AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION" ________

9. CLAY DEMO: Look up "Solo Auditing" and
"Self auditing" in the Tech Dictionary and do
a clay demo of the difference between the two. ________

10. HCOB 14 Sep 71R V Solo C/S Series 1R
Rev. 3.2.75 SOLO AUDITOR'S RIGHTS ________

11. DEMO: Each of the manifestations of ruds going out
during the session, and how each would be handled. ________

12. HCOB 7 Mar 75 EXT AND ENDING SESSION ________

13. HCOB 10 Apr 72 C/S Series 75 Solo C/S Series 13
PRE-OTs DON'T C/S ________

14. HCOB 11 Sep 70 SOLO ASSISTS ________

15. DEMO: Using HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA THE AUDITOR'S CODE, 
demonstrate how you as a Solo Auditor would apply each 
point of the Auditor's Code. ________


************
SECTION ELEVEN

MODEL SESSION AND RUDIMENTS

*1. HCOB 11 Aug 78 II MODEL SESSION ________

*2. HCOB 11 Aug 78 I RUDIMENTS DEFINITION AND PATTER ________

*3. HCOB 12 Feb 62 HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS AND MISSED WITHHOLDS ________

4. DEMO: The difference between a withhold and a missed withhold. ______

*5. HCOB 15 Aug 69 FLYING RUDS ________

6. DRILL: Flying the Ruds (on a doll) unbullbaited. ________

7. DRILL: Flying the Ruds (on a doll) bullbaited. ________

*8. HCOB 6 Sep 68 CHECKING FOR FALSE READS

*9. HCOB 27 May 70R UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS ________
Rev. 3.12.78 

10. TECH DICTIONARY: Define "Cleaning a clean" ________

11. DRILL: Do a drill using "Suppress" and "Invalidate"
on non-reading items. ________

12. HCOB 14 Mar 71R F/N EVERYTHING Rev. 25.7.73 ________

13. CLAY DEMO: Why every item that reads must F/N. ________


************
SECTION TWELVE

METERING DATA AND DRILLS

NOTE: ALL E-METER DRILLS ARE TO BE DONE FIVE (5) TIMES THROUGH.


************
A. E-METER ORIENTATION:

0. FILM: EM4 E-Meter Instruction Film No. 4):
HOW THE E-METER WORKS ________

1. BOOK: THE BOOK INTRODUCING THE E-METER

Have an E-Meter to hand while you study this book. Do
the actions described in the book on your meter. (Note:
Refer to the Mark VI Owner's Manual to resolve any
differences between the Mark VI and the descriptions
given in THE BOOK INTRODUCING THE E-METER) ________

2. BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS. ________

3. The Mark VI Owner's Manual. ________

*4. BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS, Chapters A and B. ________

5. BOOK: THE BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS, Foreword. ________

6. E-METER DRILL 1. ________

7. E-METER DRILL 2. ________

8. E-METER DRILL 3. ________

9. E-METER DRILL 3A (Refer also to the Mark VI Owner's
Manual section on Calibration.) ________

10. E-METER DRILL 4 (Mark VI owners should do EM 4-1
per the Mark VI Owner's Manual.) ________

11. HCOB 11 May 69R METER TRIM CHECK Rev. 8.7.78 ________

12. DRILL: The coach throws the trim off slightly on a meter
and the student does a trim check per HCOB 11 May 69R
METER TRIM CHECK. ________


************
B. TONE ARM AND SENSITIVITY:

*1. BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS, Chapters C, D & E.

Study the above Chapters in conjunction with the appropriate
sections of: HCO PL 21 Feb 79 Corr. & Reiss. 6.5.79
E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET. ________

2. HCOB 7 Feb 79R E-METER DRILL RA
Rev. 15.2.79 CAN SQUEEZE ________

3. E-METER DRILL 5RA. ________

4. E-METER DRILL 6 ________

5. E-METER DRILL 7. ________

6. E-METER DRILL 8. ________

7. E-METER DRILL 9. ________

8. E-METER DRILL 10. ________

9. E-METER DRILL 11.

10. HCOB 21 Jan 77RB FALSE TA CHECKLIST Re-rev. 25.5.80 ________


************
C. NEEDLE ACTIONS:

0. FILM: EM9A (E-Meter Instruction Film No. 9A):
THE RECOGNITION AND IDENTIFICATION OF E-METER READS. ________

*1. BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS, Chapter F. Study this
Chapter in conjunction with: HCO PL 21 Feb 79 Corr. &
Reiss. 6.5.79 E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET. ________

*2. HCOB 3 Sep 78 DEFINITION OF A ROCK SLAM ________

3. BTB 14 Jan 63 RINGS CAUSING "ROCK SLAMS" ________

*4. HCOB 21 Jul 78 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE? ________

*5. HCOB 21 Sep 66 ARC BREAK NEEDLE ________

6. DEMO: How you recognize an ARC BREAK NEEDLE. ________

7. HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB Re-rev. 25.5.80 
SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION ________
(Study the first section up to but not including "Repair.")

8. HCOB 2 Dec 80 FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION, MODIFIED ________

9. E-METER DRILL 12. ________

10. E-METER DRILL 13. ________

11. E-METER DRILL 14. ________

12. E-METER DRILL 15. ________

13. E-METER DRILL 16. ________

(Note: The step on the production of Rock Slams has been deleted 
per BTB 18 Jan 77 R BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS DELETION.)

14. DRILL: Recognition of a Floating Needle. Have different
people sit down and pick up the cans. Indicate the F/N,
whenever you see one. Drill this until you know with
certainty when the needle is floating or not. ________

15. HCOB 20 Feb 70 FLOATING NEEDLES AND END PHENOMENA ________

16. DEMO: End Phenomena. ________

17. HCOB 18 Apr 68 NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV ________

18. HCOB 10 Dec 65 E-METER DRILL COACHING ________

19. E-METER DRILL 17. ________

20. HCOB 25 May 62 E-METER INSTANT READS ________

21. E-METER DRILL 18. ________

22. HCOB 8 Jun 61R Rev. 22.2.79
E-METER WATCHING ARE YOU WAITING FOR THE METER TO PLAY DIXIE? ________

23. DEMO: When will the needle react after a
question has been asked? ________

24. HCOB 5 Aug 78 R INSTANT READS ________

25. E-METER DRILL 19. ________

26. E-METER DRILL 20. ________

27. E-METER DRILL 21. ________


************
D. ASSESSMENT & OBSERVATION:

*1. HCOB 29 Apr 69 ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST ________

2. HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs ________

3. E-METER DRILL 23. ________

4. E-METER DRILL 24. ________

5. E-METER DRILL 26. ________

6. E-METER DRILL 27. ________


************
E. ADDITIONAL DATA ON METERING:

1. BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS, Chapters I, J, K, L.
(In studying Chapter J, refer to the appropriate section
of HCO PL 21 Feb 79, Corr. & Reiss. 6.5.79,
E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET.) ________

2. HCOB 14 Jul 70 SOLO CANS ________

3. HCOB 28 Feb 71 C/S Series 24
METERING READING ITEMS ________


************
SECTION THIRTEEN

ASSESSMENT AND PREPARED LISTS

1. HCOB 29 Apr 80 PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE ________

2. HCOB 29 Apr 69 ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST ________

*3. HCOB 3 Jul 71R AUDITING BY LISTS Rev. 22.2.79 ________

4. DEMO: How to do an assessment Method 3. ________

5. HCOB 20 Dec 71 C/S Series 72 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF ________
Reiss. 27.9.77 

*6. HCOB 21 Jun 72 I W/C Series 38, METHOD 5 ________

7. DRILL: Using the Rudiments checklist at the back of
THE BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS, drill doing method 5 Word Clearing. ________

8. HCOB 19 Mar 71 LIST 1-C (L1C) ________

9. DRILL: Doing an L1C on a doll. ________

10. HCOB 22 Apr 80 ASSESSMENT DRILLS, TR 4/8 Q-1 ________

11. DRILL: TR 4/8 Q-1. ________


************
SECTION FOURTEEN

LISTING AND NULLING

1. Clear the definitions of the following words in the
Technical Dictionary: 

a) Listing ________

b) Nulling ________

c) Assessment ________

d) Listing and Nulling ________

e) Item ________

f) L & N List ________

g) Correction List ________

2. BTB 20 Aug 70R TWO COMPLETE DIFFERENCES, ASSESSMENT- LISTING
AND NULLING ________

*3. HCOB 1 Aug 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING ________

4. DEMO: Each of the Laws of Listing and Nulling.

5. HCOB 22 Aug 66 FLOATING NEEDLES, LISTING PROCESSES ________

6. HCOB 27 May 70R UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS ________
Rev. 3.12.78 

7. DEMO: "Things that don't read, won't run" ________

8. TAPE: 14 Jun 62 LISTING (SH Spec 157) ________

9. TAPE: 17 Jul 62 E-METER READS AND ARC BREAKS (SH Spec 170) ________

10. HCOB 14 Sep 71R DIANETIC LIST ERRORS (C/S Series 59R) ________
Rev. 19.7.78 

11. HCOB 20 Apr 72 PRODUCT, PURPOSE AND WHY AND WC ERROR CORRECTION
(C/S Series 78) ________

12. HCOB 19 Nov 78 L&N LISTS - THE ITEM "ME" ________

13. DEMO: A right item. ________

14. DEMO: A wrong item. ________

15. DEMO: An incomplete list. ________

16. DEMO: An overlisted list. ________

17. HCOB 11 Apr 77 LIST ERRORS, CORRECTION OF ________

18. HCOB 17 Mar 74 TWC CHECKSHEETS - TWC,
USING WRONG QUESTIONS ________

19. HCOB 28 May 70 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF ________

20. HCOB 23 Sep 68 VIOLATION OF THE LAWS OF
(TechVol XI,p 44) LISTING AND NULLING ________

21. HCOB 29 Sep 68R LIST CORRECTION, THE SHORT L4 ________
Rev. 31.5.80 

22. HCOB 15 Dec 68RA L4BRA ________

23. DRILL: Doing the Short L4 on a doll. ________

24. DRILL: Doing the L4BRA on a doll. ________

25. BTB 7 Nov 72R Auditor Admin Series 18R, L & N LISTS ________

26. HCOB 22 Apr 80 ASSESSMENT DRILLS, TR 4/8 Q-2 ________

27. DRILL: TR 4/8 Q-2 (L&N DRILL). ________


************
SECTION FIFTEEN

SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS

*1. HCOB 26 Apr 71 I TRS AND COGNITION'S ________

2. HCOB 26 APR 71 SOLO COGNITION'S _______

3. HCOB 30 APR 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE _______

4. HCOB 5 DEC 79 THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN 
THE COMM CYCLE IN REGULAR AUDITING AND
CYCLES OF ACTION IN SOLO AUDITING ________

*5. HCOB 22 Jul 71R II SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN Rev. 22.2.81 ________

6. FILM: THE SOLO AUDITOR. ________

7. HCOB 9 Jul 80 Solo Series #1 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP
A SOLO SESSION ________

8. DRILL: Drill the Checklist for Setting Up a Solo Session,
until you can do it rapidly and flublessly. ________

9. HCOB 6 Dec 79R SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS Rev. 22.9.80 ________

SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS: (NOTE: DO ALL DRILLS FIVE TIMES THROUGH )

10. Solo Drill 1. ________

11. Solo Drill 2. ________

12. Solo Drill 3. ________

13. Solo Drill 4. ________

14. Solo Drill 5. ________


************
SECTION SIXTEEN

SOLO E-METER AND TR 8-Q DRILLS

SOLO E-METER DRILLS: (NOTE: DO ALL DRILLS FIVE TIMES THROUGH.)
(Ref. HCOB 6 Dec 79R, Rev. 22.9.80 SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS)

1. Solo EM 8. ________

2. Solo EM 9. ________

3. Solo EM 10. ________

4. Solo EM 11. ________

5. Solo EM 14. ________

6. Solo EM 15. ________

7. Solo EM 19. ________

8. Solo EM 21. ________

9. Solo EM 24. ________

10. Solo EM 26. ________

11. HCOB 14 Oct 81 TR 8-Q DRILLS FOR SOLO AUDITOR TRAINING ________

12. TECH DICTIONARY: Define: TONE 40. ________

13. DRILL: TR 8-Q. ________

_____________

The above completes Part One of The New Hubbard Solo
Auditor Course. The remainder of this course (Part Two) and
OT Preparation are available at SH orgs and higher orgs.

NOTE: If you can't immediately go to an SH org for Part
Two, take a NED course and even Class 0-IV. You after all
should have the best trained auditor in the world
- YOU. Your future depends on it.

_____________

ATTESTS

I attest that I have properly studied and done all the
items on this checksheet, that I know and can apply the
materials and that I am aware that a Solo Auditor is
responsible for his own case and that the better trained a
Solo Auditor is, the better job he will do in Solo
Auditing. I am also aware that when I enroll on Part Two of
the Solo Auditor Course, that should I be found deficient
in any of the materials studied or drills done on Part One
of the Solo Auditor Course, that I will be required to
restudy/redrill those checksheet items.

STUDENT:_______________________ DATE:_______________

I attest that I have trained this student to the best of my
ability, with full use of Study Tech and that this student
is competent on the materials of this checksheet.

SUPERVISOR:____________________ DATE:_______________

The above-named student has attested to having (a) properly
enrolled on the course, (b) paid for the course, (c)
studied and understands all the materials of this
checksheet, (d) done the drills called for on this
checksheet and (e) can produce the results required in the
materials of this checksheet. I have given the student an
attestation that he has completed Part One of the Solo
Auditor Course and have sent a copy of this to the nearest
SH org and routed a copy to his student file.

CERTS & AWARDS:_______________DATE:_______________

***END OF PART ONE***

L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

Assisted by
Senior C/S International

Adopted as
Official Church Policy
by the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
INTERNATIONAL

CSI:LRH:DM:bk
Copyright (c) 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
002. HCOB 6 OCT 81 TECH FILMS-AND VERBAL TECH

TBD

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 6 OCTOBER 1981
(Also issued as an HCO B
of the same date and title.)

All Orgs
Course Supervisors
Film Supervisors
C/Ses
Ds of T 
Cramming officers
Students
Tech
Qual
HCO


URGENT - IMPORTANT

TECH FILMS - AND VERBAL TECH


References:

HCOB/PL 9 Feb 79 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH
HCOB/PL 15 Feb 79 VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES
HCOB 29 Aug 81 Cramming Series 16 CRAMMING AND VERBAL TECH
HCO PL 16 Apr 65 THE "HIDDEN DATA LINE"
HCOB 23 Oct 75 TECHNICAL QUERIES

___________

With the release of the Technical Training Films, the
policies forbidding verbal tech must be extended to apply
to any Technical Training Film as well as to HCO Bulletins,
Policy Letters, books, tapes or other source references.

HCOB/HCO PL 15 Feb 79 VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES defines verbal tech as
follows:

GIVING OUT DATA WHICH IS CONTRARY TO HCO BULLETINS OR
POLICY LETTERS, OR OBSTRUCTING THEIR USE OR APPLICATION,
CORRUPTING THEIR INTENT, ALTERING THEIR CONTENT IN ANY
WAY, INTERPRETING THEM VERBALLY OR OTHERWISE FOR AN-OTHER,
OR PRETENDING TO QUOTE THEM WITHOUT SHOWING THE
ACTUAL ISSUE.

The above definition applies equally to the Technical
Training Films, and to it is added:

GIVING OUT TECHNICAL DATA VERBALLY OR OTHERWISE FROM A
TECHNICAL FILM, OR ANY DISCUSSION, INTERPRETATION OR QUOTING 
OF THE TECHNICAL CONTENT OF A TECHNICAL FILM WITHOUT
HAVING THE FILM VIEWED BY THE PERSON OR PERSONS CONCERNED
SHALL CONSTlTUTE VERBAL TECH.


Violations of this Policy Letter must be dealt with per
HCOB/PL 15 Feb 79 VERBAL TECH: PENALTIES, and HCOB 29 Aug
81 Cramming Series 16 CRAMMING AND VERBAL TECH.

This Policy Letter is not to be used to curb enthusiasm or
prevent word-of-mouth promotion of these vital films.

It is to be fully understood and applied in terms of the
following maxim: THE TECH OF ANY TECHNICAL TRAINING FILM IS
IMPARTED BY THE FILM ITSELF, NOT BY ANY DISCUSSION OF IT.

This issue is to be prominently displayed in all course
rooms for those courses to which Technical Training Films
are assigned, as well as in the film viewing area itself.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

Assisted by
Research & Technical
Compilations Unit

Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA

BDCSC:LRH:RTC:bk
Copyright (c) 1981
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
003. HCOPL 7 FEB 65 reiss 27 AUG 80 KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 FEBRUARY 1965
REISSUED 27 AUGUST 1980
(As the first issue in the Keeping Scientology Working Series)


Remimeo
Sthil Students
Assn/Org Sec Hat 
Case Sup Hat
HCO Sec Hat
Ds of P Hat
Ds of T Hat
Staff Member Hat
Franchise

(Issued May 1965)

Keeping Scientology Working Series 1


Note: Neglect of this Pol Ltr has caused great hardship on
staffs, has cost countless millions and made it necessary
in 1970 to engage in an all out international effort to
restore basic Scientology over the world. Within 5 years
after the issue of this PL with me off the lines, violation
had almost destroyed orgs. "Quickie grades" entered in and
denied gain to tens of thousands of cases. Therefore
actions which neglect or violate this policy letter are
HIGH CRIMES resulting in Comm Evs on ADMINISTRATORS and
EXECU-TIVES.

It is not "entirely a tech matter" as its neglect destroys
orgs and caused a 2-year slump. IT IS THE BUSINESS OF EVERY
STAFF MEMBER to enforce it.

SPECIAL MESSAGE

THE FOLLOWING POLICY LETTER MEANS WHAT IT SAYS.
IT WAS TRUE IN 1965 WHEN I WROTE IT. IT WAS TRUE IN 1970 WHEN I
HAD IT REISSUED. I AM REISSUING IT NOW, IN 1980, TO AVOID AGAIN
SLIPPING BACK INTO A PERIOD OF OMITTED AND QUICKIED FUNDAMEN-TAL
GRADE CHART ACTIONS ON CASES, THEREBY DENYING GAINS AND
THREATENING THE VIABILITY OF SCIENTOLOGY AND OF ORGS.

SCIENTOLOGY WILL KEEP WORKING ONLY AS LONG AS YOU DO YOUR
PART TO KEEP IT WORKING BY APPLYING THIS POLICY LETTER.
WHAT I SAY IN THESE PAGES HAS ALWAYS BEEN TRUE, IT HOLDS
TRUE TODAY, IT WILL STILL HOLD TRUE IN THE YEAR 2000 AND IT WILL
CONTINUE TO HOLD TRUE FROM THERE ON OUT.

NO MATTER WHERE YOU ARE IN SCIENTOLOGY, ON STAFF OR NOT,
THIS POLICY LETTER HAS SOMETHING TO DO WITH YOU.


ALL LEVELS

KEEPING SCIENTOLOGY WORKING


HCO Sec or Communicator Hat Check
on all personnel and all new personnel
as taken on.

We have some time since passed the point of achieving
uniformly workable technology.

The only thing now is getting the technology applied.

If you can't get the technology applied, then you can't
deliver what's promised. It's as simple as that. If you can
get the technology applied, you can deliver what's promised.

The only thing you can be upbraided for by students or pcs
is "no results." Trouble spots occur only where there are
"no results." Attacks from governments or monopolies occur
only where there are "no results" or "bad results."

Therefore the road before Scientology is clear and its
ultimate success is assured if the technology is applied.

So it is the task of the Assn or Org Sec, the HCO Sec, the
Case Supervisor, the D of P, the D of T and all staff
members to get the correct technology applied.

Getting the correct technology applied consists of

One: Having the correct technology.

Two: Knowing the technology.

Three: Knowing it is correct.

Four: Teaching correctly the correct technology.

Five: Applying the technology.

Six: Seeing that the technology is correctly applied.

Seven: Hammering out of existence incorrect technology.

Eight: Knocking out incorrect applications.

Nine: Closing the door on any possibility of incorrect technology.

Ten: Closing the door on incorrect application.

One above has been done.

Two has been achieved by many.

Three is achieved by the individual applying the correct
technology in a proper manner and observing that it works
that way.

Four is being done daily successfully in most parts of the world.

Five is consistently accomplished daily.

Six is achieved by instructors and supervisors consistently.

Seven is done by a few but is a weak point.

Eight is not worked on hard enough.

Nine is impeded by the "reasonable" attitude of the not
quite bright.

Ten is seldom done with enough ferocity.

Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten are the only places Scientology
can bog down in any area.

The reasons for this are not hard to find. (a) A weak
certainty that it works in Three above can lead to weakness
in Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. (b) Further, the
not-too-bright have a bad point on the button
Self-Importance. (c) The lower the IQ, the more the
individual is shut off from the fruits of observation. (d)
The service facs of people make them defend themselves
against anything they confront good or bad and seek to make
it wrong. (e) The bank seeks to knock out the good and
perpetuate the bad.

Thus we as Scientologists and as an organization must be
very alert to Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.

In all the years I have been engaged in research, I have
kept my comm lines wide open for research data. I once had
the idea that a group could evolve truth. A third of a
century has thoroughly disabused me of that idea. Willing
as I was to accept suggestions and data, only a handful of
suggestions (less than twenty) had long-run value and none
were major or basic; and when I did accept major or basic
suggestions and used them, we went astray and I repented
and eventually had to "eat crow."

On the other hand there have been thousands and thousands
of suggestions and writings which, if accepted and acted
upon, would have resulted in the complete destruction of
all our work as well as the sanity of pcs. So 1 know what a
group of people will do and how insane they will go in
accepting unworkable "technology." By actual record the
percentages are about twenty to 100,000 that a group of
human beings will dream up bad technology to destroy good
technology. As we could have gotten along without
suggestions, then, we had better steel ourselves to
continue to do so now that we have made it. This point
will, of course, be attacked as "unpopular," "egotistical"
and "undemocratic." It very well may be. But it is also a
survival point. And I don't see that popular measures,
self-abnegation and democracy have done anything for Man
but push him further into the mud. Currently, popularity
endorses degraded novels, self-abnega-tion has filled the
Southeast Asian jungles with stone idols and corpses, and
democracy has given us inflation and income tax.

Our technology has not been discovered by a group. True, if
the group had not supported me in many ways, I could not
have discovered it either. But it remains that if in its
formative stages it was not discovered by a group, then
group efforts, one can safely assume, will not add to it or
successfully alter it in the future. I can only say this
now that it is done. There remains, of course, group
tabulation or coordination of what has been done, which
will be valuable - only so long as it does not seek to alter
basic principles and successful applications.

The contributions that were worthwhile in this period of
forming the technology were help in the form of friendship,
of defense, of organization, of dissemination, of
application, of advices on results and of finance. These
were great contributions and were, and are, appreciated.
Many thousands contributed in this way and made us what we are.

Discovery contribution was not however part of the broad picture.

We will not speculate here on why this was so or how I came
to rise above the bank.

We are dealing only in facts and the above is a fact - the
group left to its own devices would not have evolved
Scientology but with wild dramatizations of the bank called
"new ideas" would have wiped it out. Supporting this is the
fact that Man has never before evolved workable mental
technology and emphasizing it is the vicious technology he
did evolve - psychiatry, psychology, surgery, shock
treatment, whips, duress, punishment, etc., ad infinitum.

So realize that we have climbed out of the mud by whatever
good luck and good sense, and refuse to sink back into it
again. See that Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten above are
ruthlessly followed and we will never be stopped. Relax
them, get reasonable about it and we will perish.

So far, while keeping myself in complete communication with
all suggestions, I have not failed on Seven, Eight, Nine
and Ten in areas I could supervise closely. But it's not
good enough for just myself and a few others to work at this.

Whenever this control as per Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten has
been relaxed, the whole organizational area has failed.
Witness Elizabeth, N.J.; Wichita; the early organi-zations
and groups. They crashed only because I no longer did
Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. Then, when they were all messed
up, you saw the obvious "reasons" for failure. But ahead of
that they ceased to deliver and that involved them in other
reasons.

The common denominator of a group is the reactive bank.
Thetans without banks have different responses. They only
have their banks in common. They agree then only on bank
principles. Person to person the bank is identical. So
constructive ideas are individual and seldom get broad
agreement in a human group. An individual must rise above
an avid craving for agreement from a humanoid group to get
anything decent done.

The bank-agreement has been what has made Earth a Hell - and
if you were looking for Hell and found Earth, it would
certainly serve. War, famine, agony and disease has been
the lot of Man. Right now the great governments of Earth
have developed the means of frying every man, woman and
child on the planet. That is bank. That is the result of
Collective Thought Agreement.

The decent, pleasant things on this planet come from
individual actions and ideas that have somehow gotten by
the Group Idea. For that matter, look how we ourselves are
attacked by "public opinion" media. Yet there is no more
ethical group on this planet than ourselves.

Thus each one of us can rise above the domination of the
bank and then, as a group of freed beings, achieve freedom
and reason. It is only the aberrated group, the mob, that
is destructive.

When you don't do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten actively, you
are working for the bank-dominated mob. For it will surely,
surely (a) introduce incorrect technology and swear by it,
(b) apply technology as incorrectly as possible, (c) open
the door to any destructive idea, and (d) encourage
incorrect application.

It's the bank that says the group is all and the individual
nothing. It's the bank that says we must fail.

So just don't play that game. Do Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten
and you will knock out of your road all the future thorns.

Here's an actual example in which a senior executive had to
interfere because of a pc spin: A Case Supervisor told
Instructor A to have Auditor B run Process X on Preclear C.
Auditor B afterwards told Instructor A that "It didn't
work." Instructor A was weak on Three above and didn't
really believe in Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten. So Instructor
A told the Case Supervisor, "Process X didn't work on
Preclear C." Now this strikes directly at each of One to
Six above in Preclear C, Auditor B, Instructor A and the
Case Supervisor.

It opens the door to the introduction of "new technology"
and to failure.

What happened here? Instructor A didn't jump down Auditor
B's throat, that's all that happened. This is what he
should have done: Grabbed the Auditor's Report and looked
it over. When a higher executive on this case did so, she
found what the Case Supervisor and the rest missed: That
Process X increased Preclear C's TA to 25 TA divisions for
the session but that near session end Auditor B Q'd and A'd
with a cognition and abandoned Process X while it still
gave high TA and went off running one of Auditor B's own
manufacture, which nearly spun Preclear C. Auditor B's IQ
on examination turned out to be about 75. Instructor A was
found to have huge ideas of how you must never invalidate
anyone, even a lunatic. The Case Supervisor was found to be
"too busy with admin to have any time for actual cases."

All right, there's an all too typical example. The
Instructor should have done Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten.
This would have begun this way. Auditor B: "That process X
didn't work." Instructor A: "What exactly did you do
wrong?" Instant attack. "Where's your Auditor's Report for
the session? Good. Look here, you were getting a lot of TA
when you stopped Process X. What did you do?" Then the pc
wouldn't have come close to a spin and all four of these
would have retained their certainty.

In a year, I had four instances in one small group where
the correct process recommended was reported not to have
worked. But on review found that each one had (a) increased
the TA, (b) had been abandoned, and (c) had been falsely
reported as unworkable. Also, despite this abuse, in each
of these four cases the recommended, correct process
cracked the case. Yet they were reported as not having
worked! Similar examples exist in instruction and these are
all the more deadly as every time instruction in correct
technology is flubbed, then the resulting error,
uncorrected in the auditor, is perpetuated on every pc that
auditor audits thereafter. So Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten
are even more important in a course than in supervision of
cases.

Here's an example: A rave recommendation is given a
graduating student "because he gets more TA on pcs than any
other student on the course!" Figures of 435 TA divisions a
session are reported. "Of course his Model Session is poor
but it's just a knack he has" is also included in the
recommendation. A careful review is undertaken because
nobody at Levels O to IV is going to get that much TA on
pcs. It is found that this student was never taught to read
an E-Meter TA dial! And no instructor observed his handling
of a meter and it was not discovered that he
"overcompensated" nervously, swinging the TA 2 or 3
divisions beyond where it needed to go to place the needle
at "set." So everyone was about to throw away standard
processes and Model Session because this one student "got such
remarkable TA." They only read the reports and listened to
the brags and never looked at this student. The pcs in
actual fact were making slightly less than average gain,
impeded by a rough Model Session and misworded processes.
Thus, what was making the pcs win (actual Scientology) was
hidden under a lot of departures and errors.

I recall one student who was squirreling on an Academy
course and running a lot of offbeat whole track on other
students after course hours. The Academy students were in a
state of electrification on all these new experiences and
weren't quickly brought under control, and the student
himself never was given the works on Seven, Eight, Nine and
Ten so they stuck. Subsequently, this student prevented
another squirrel from being straight-ened out and his wife
died of cancer resulting from physical abuse. A hard, tough
instructor at that moment could have salvaged two squirrels
and saved the life of a girl.

BUT no, students had a right to do whatever they pleased.

Squirreling (going off into weird practices or altering
Scientology) only comes about from noncomprehension.
Usually the noncomprehension is not of Scientology but some
earlier contact with an offbeat humanoid practice which in
its turn was not understood.

When people can't get results from what they think is
standard practice, they can be counted upon to squirrel to
some degree. The most trouble in the past two years came
from orgs where an executive in each could not assimilate
straight Scientology. Under instruction in Scientology,
they were unable to define terms or demonstrate examples of
principles. And the orgs where they were got into plenty of
trouble. And worse, it could not be straightened out easily
because neither one of these people could or would
duplicate instructions. Hence, a debacle resulted in two
places, directly traced to failures of instruction earlier.
So proper instruction is vital. The D of T and his
instructors and all Scientology instructors must be
merciless in getting Four, Seven, Eight, Nine and Ten into
effective action. That one student, dumb and impossible
though he may seem and of no use to anyone, may yet some
day be the cause of untold upset because nobody was
interested enough to make sure Scientology got home to him.

With what we know now, there is no student we enroll who
cannot be properly trained. As an instructor, one should be
very alert to slow progress and should turn the sluggards
inside out personally. No system will do it, only you or me
with our sleeves rolled up can crack the back of bad
studenting and we can only do it on an individual student,
never on a whole class only. He's slow = something is awful
wrong. Take fast action to correct it. Don't wait until
next week. By then he's got other messes stuck to him.

If you can't graduate them with their good sense appealed
to and wisdom shining, graduate them in such a state of
shock they'll have nightmares if they contemplate
squirreling. Then experience will gradually bring about
Three in them and they'll know better than to chase
butterflies when they should be auditing.

When somebody enrolls, consider he or she has joined up for
the duration of the universe - never permit an "open-minded"
approach. If they're going to quit, let them quit fast. If
they enrolled, they're aboard; and if they're aboard,
they're here on the same terms as the rest of us - win or die
in the attempt. Never let them be half-minded about being
Scientologists. The finest organizations in history have
been tough, dedicated organizations. Not one namby-pamby
bunch of panty-waist dilettantes have ever made anything.
It's a tough universe. The social veneer makes it seem
mild. But only the tigers survive - and even they have a hard
time. We'll survive because we are tough and are dedicated.
When we do instruct somebody properly, he becomes more and
more tiger.

When we instruct half-mindedly and are afraid to offend,
scared to enforce, we don't make students into good
Scientologists and that lets everybody down. When Mrs.

Pattycake comes to us to be taught, turn that wandering
doubt in her eye into a fixed, dedicated glare and she'll
win and we'll all win. Humor her and we all die a little.
The proper instruction attitude is, "You're here so you're
a Scientologist. Now we're going to make you into an expert
auditor no matter what happens. We'd rather have you dead
than incapable."

Fit that into the economics of the situation and lack of
adequate time and you see the cross we have to bear.

But we won't have to bear it forever. The bigger we get,
the more economics and time we will have to do our job. And
the only things which can prevent us from getting that big
fast are areas in from One to Ten. Keep those in mind and
we'll be able to grow.

Fast. And as we grow, our shackles will be less and less.
Failing to keep One to Ten will make us grow less.

So the ogre which might eat us up is not the government or
the High Priests. It's our possible failure to retain and
practice our technology.

An Instructor or Supervisor or Executive must challenge
with ferocity instances of "unworkability." They must
uncover what did happen, what was run and what was done or
not done.

If you have One and Two, you can only acquire Three for all
by making sure of all the rest.

We're not playing some minor game in Scientology. It isn't
cute or something to do for lack of something better.

The whole agonized future of this planet, every Man, Woman
and Child on it, and your own destiny for the next endless
trillions of years depend on what you do here and now with
and in Scientology.

This is a deadly serious activity. And if we miss getting
out of the trap now, we may never again have another chance.

Remember, this is our first chance to do so in all the
endless trillions of years of the past. Don't muff it now
because it seems unpleasant or unsocial to do Seven. Eight.
Nine and Ten.

Do them and we'll win.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jw.rr.nt.ka.mes.rd.bk.gm
Copyright (c) 1965, 1970, 1973, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
004. HCOPL 17 JUN 70RA rev. 27 Apr 81 TECHNICAL DEGRADES


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 JUNE 1970RA
REISSUED 30 AUGUST 1980 as part of KSW Series
RE-REVISED 27 APRIL 1981
(Re-revised to update High Crime #3)

Remimeo
Applies to 
all SHs and Academies
HGCs 
Franchises


Keeping Scientology Working Series 5


URGENT AND IMPORTANT

TECHNICAL DEGRADES


(This PL and HCO PL Feb 7, 1965 must be made part of every study
pack as the first items and must be listed on checksheets.)


Any checksheet in use or in stock which carries on it any
degrading statement must be destroyed and issued without
qualifying statements.

Example: Level 0 to IV Checksheets SH carry "A. Background
Material - This section is included as an historical
background, but has much interest and value to the student.
Most of the processes are no longer used, having been
replaced by more modern technology. The student is only
required to read this material and ensure he leaves no
misunderstood." This heading covers such vital things as
TRs, Op Pro by Dup! The statement is a falsehood.

These checksheets were not approved by myself, all the
material of the Academy and SH courses IS in use.

Such actions as this gave us "Quickie Grades," ARC Broke
the field and downgraded the Academy and SH Courses.

A condition of TREASON or cancellation of certificates or
dismissal and a full investiga-tion of the background of
any person found guilty, will be activated in the case of
anyone committing the following HIGH CRIMES.

1. Abbreviating an official Course in Dianetics and
Scientology so as to lose the full theory processes and
effectiveness of the subjects.

2. Adding comments to checksheets or instructions labeling
any material "background" or "not used now" or "old" or any
similar action which will result in the student not
knowing, using and applying the data in which he is being
trained.

3. Employing after 1 Sept 70 any checksheet for any course
not written by myself or authorized by the Authority,
Verification and Correction Unit International and accepted
by the Board of Directors.

Checksheets for Dept 17 Courses have their own approval
lines as issued in HCO PL 2 Jan 80R Rev. 31 Dec 80
DEPARTMENT 17 COURSE CHECKSHEETS APPROVAL LINE.

4. Failing to strike from any checksheet remaining in use
meanwhile any such comments as "historical," "background,"
"not used," "old," etc. or VERBALLY STATING IT TO STUDENTS.

5. Permitting a pc to attest to more than one grade at a
time on the pc's own determinism without hint or evaluation.

6. Running only one process for a lower grade between 0 to
IV, where the grade EP has not been attained.

7. Failing to use all processes for a level where the EP
has not been attained.

8. Boasting as to speed of delivery in a session, such as
"I put in Grade Zero in 3 minutes." Etc.

9. Shortening time of application of auditing for financial
or labor saving considera-tions.

10. Acting in any way calculated to lose the technology of
Dianetics and Scientology to use or impede its use or
shorten its materials or its application.

REASON: The effort to get students through courses and get
pcs processed in orgs was considered best handled by
reducing materials or deleting processes from grades. The
pressure exerted to speed up student completion's and
auditing completion's was mistakenly answered by just not
delivering.

The correct way to speed up a student's progress is by
using 2 way comm and applying the study materials to students.

The best way to really handle pcs is to ensure they make
each level fully before going on to the next and repairing
them when they do not.

The puzzle of the decline of the entire Scientology network
in the late 60s is entirely answered by the actions taken
to shorten time in study and in processing by deleting
materials and actions.

Reinstituting full use and delivery of Dianetics and
Scientology is the answer to any recovery.

The product of an org is well taught students and
thoroughly audited pcs. When the product vanishes, so does
the org. The orgs must survive for the sake of this planet.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

Revised by CS-4/5
Approved by
L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

Accepted by the
BOARD OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCH OF SCIENTOLOGY
of CALIFORNIA

BDCSC:LRH:SK:JE:nt:rd:lf:dr:bk
Copyright (c) 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
_


FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 2 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

[full contents in part 1]

Part 2/7

005. HCOB 26 MAR 79RB rev. 2Sep79 MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION
006. HCOB 4 SEP 71 ALTERATIONS 
007. HCOB 9 FEB 79 reis. 12 Apr 83 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH
008. HCOB 13 OCT 79 CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING
009. HCOPL 25 SEP 79 SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP
010. HCOPL 7 MAY 69 STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOR
011. HCOB 12 SEP 78 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTS
012. HCOPL 11 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES MATERIALS - SECURITY OF DATA
013. HCOPL 8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE VIOLATIONS
014. HCOPL 8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE REGULATIONS AND SECURITY
015. HCOPL 16 AUG 66 CLEARING COURSE SECURITY
016. HCOPL 28 SEP 67 r. 19 Jul 75 CONFIDENTIAL DATA
017. HCOPL 12 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES
018. HCOPL 29 JUN 68 ENROLLMENT IN SUPPRESSIVE GROUPS
019. HCOB 22 MAY 69 DIANETICS, ITS BACKGROUND
020. HCOPL 14 OCT 68RA r. 19 Jun 80 THE AUDITOR'S CODE
021. HCOPL 27 MAY 65 PROCESSING
022. HCOB 5 DEC 73 THE REASON FOR Q AND A


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

005. HCOB 26 MAR 79RB rev. 2Sep79 MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 26 MARCH 1979RB
REVISED 2 SEPTEMBER 1979
(Also issued as an HCO Policy Letter
of same date. same title.)

Remimeo

Esto Series 35RB
Word Clearing Series 60RB
Product Debug Series 7R


MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND CYCLES OF ACTION


MISUNDERSTOOD WORDS AND NO PRODUCT

A misunderstood word can prevent a person from
understanding the remainder of what is heard or written.

I have now discovered that: A MlSUNDERSTOOD on any given
subject CAN PREVENT THE COMPLETION OF A CYCLE OF ACTION
related to that subject.

Therefore those people who don't complete cycles of action
on certain subjects have a misunderstood word on them.

This then results in no-product situations.

Therefore when you are getting no product, look for the
misunderstood word on the subject no matter how long and
arduous it is. It's there. And when it's found the person
can go on and complete a cycle of action and get a product.

CAUTION: Make sure the person actually does have an
inability to complete a cycle of action before you get into
handling him. You don't handle somebody who is completing
cycles of action that result in production.


MISUNDERSTOODS AND PERCEPTION

Misunderstoods can also act as perception shut-offs. They
can actually interrupt a person's perception.

It is quite astonishing that perceptions such as sight.
sound and even touch can be shut off by Mis-U words.

This opens the door to the fact that people apparently do
not see, hear, notice or handle outnesses when they have
Mis-Us on them.

This also may open the door to people who have perceptic
shut-offs, such as poor eyesight, deafness other perception
difficulties.


MISUNDERSTOODS AND COMPLEXITY

Misunderstoods lead to complexity. People who have Mis-Us
in an area are inclined to develop vast complexities. They
can generate confusion's and complexities beyond belief.

People do this because, having misunderstoods, they do not
confront and duplicate in the area and so get into a lot of
think-think and unnecessary significance. Their ability to
get things done in that area dwindles as a result. And at
the bottom of all this is simply misunderstood words.


MISUNDERSTOODS AND TOTAL ORGANIZE

When you see an area that is organizing only, you know that
area is loaded with misunderstoods.

When people have incomplete cycles due to Mis-Us they get
bogged down into organization.

You can tell when people have Mis-Us - they are totally
involved in organize, organize, organize. They don't know
what they are doing.

There is a level below this - they have overts and withholds
which prevent even organizing.

Below that level people are PTS.

Lacking a sense of organization actually lies below this.
It is below the level of Mis-Us, overts and withholds and
PTSness - and you'd have to go north through PTSness and
overts and withholds to even get to the Mis-Us.


MISUNDERSTOODS AND NO ORGANIZE

There can also exist a condition where someone does not
organize any corner of his area or work or organizations or
lines. l his manifests itself by irrational demands to only
produce and to prevent any organization so that production
can occur. At the bottom of this you are very likely to
find misunderstood words, particularly on the purpose of
the production or why one is producing. It is in this
sector that you get overt products most frequently.


HANDLING

The exact procedure for handling these Mis-Us is given in
HCOB 17 Jun 79 CRASHING MlS-Us: THE KEY TO COMPLETED CYCLES
OF ACTION AND PRODUCTS. Crashing Mis-U finding is done as part 
of HCO PL 23 Aug 79 1 DEBUG TECH. 

Additional data on the location of Crashing Mis-Us is
found in HCOB 14 Aug 79 CRASHING MlS-Us, BLOCKS TO FINDING
THEM and HCOB 16 Jul 79 THE "ELUSIVE" MIS-U OR CRASHING MIS-U.

With this knowledge we can now handle all the factors that
prevent the completion of cycles of action and products.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:gal.dr
Copyright (c) 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
006. HCOB 4 SEP 71 ALTERATIONS 


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 4 SEPTEMBER 1971
Issue II

Remimeo

Word Clearing Series 19


ALTERATIONS


There is a basic law in Word Clearing:

AT THE BOTTOM OF ALL ALTERATION OF MEANING
OR ACTION IS A MISUNDERSTOOD WORD.

This law at once explains why communication, ideas or
application become falsified, twisted and corrupted.

This law is of great use in Word Clearing:

A. It indicates who has to be word cleared FAST, at once,
NOW, before duties go off the rails any further.

B. It detects the area just before which there is a
misunderstood word.

A is useful to the administrator. Knowing it and knowing
Word Clearing and being able to do it himself or get it
done, he can avoid wholesale dismissals, frantic transfers,
general inefficiency and organizational strain.

B is very useful to the Word Clearer.

Example of B. A person can do everything on an order except
"File the Folders" which he insists on delivering to a
wrong room. Look over the order and find where in it talks
about filing folders. Just above or beside that will be a
misunderstood word. Locate it, get it identified, defined
and used in sentences. The person can suddenly file folders!

Just BEFORE or WITH the point a person begins to alter will
be found a misunderstood word.

Thus

1. Discover what a person alters.

2. Find what came just before that.

3. Find the misunderstood word.

4. Get it looked up.

5. Get it used in sentences as long as it moves a meter tone arm.

6. End off on F/N VGls.

The ability to do it straight will have been returned.

It is very magical.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:sb.rd 
Copyright (c)1971 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
007. HCOB 9 FEB 79 reis. 12 Apr 83 HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 9 FEBRUARY 1979
REISSUED 12 APRIL 1983
(Reissued as part of the Keeping Scientology Working Series.)
(Also issued as HCO PL 9 Feb 79, Issue II, same title.)

Remimeo

Keeping Scientology Working Series 23


HOW TO DEFEAT VERBAL TECH


1. If it isn't written it isn't true.

2. If it's written, read it.

3. If you can't understand it, clarify it.

4. If you can't clarify it, clear the Mis Us.

5. If the Mis Us won't clear, query it.

6. Get it validated as a written order.

7. Force others to read it.

IF IT CAN'T BE RUN THROUGH AS ABOVE IT'S FALSE!


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:dg:kc:ch:clb:ks
Copyright (c) 1979,
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
008. HCOB 13 OCT 79 CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 13 OCTOBER 1979

Remimeo

Word Clearing Series 66


CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING


People who have no idea of concept get bogged into terms
and mechanics. They can't operate at the level of concept
and are extremely literal.

If anybody did this he couldn't do otherwise than find
himself mixed up in tanglefoot, it does a lot of good to
clean up his tanglefoot and meanings of words but unless
this gets him up to conceptual thinking he'll just continue
to get in more and more tanglefoot.

Understanding is conceptual. You could handle things,
objects and symbols endlessly without achieving
understanding or real communication unless one finally was
able to graduate up to conceptual comprehension.

People who are literal rather than literate simply haven't
achieved conceptual understanding.

L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:gal
Copyright (c) 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
009. HCOPL 25 SEP 79 SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 25 SEPTEMBER 1979
ISSUE II

Remimeo
All Courses
Ds of T
Supervisors
STOs
Cramming Officers

(Cancels and replaces BPL 18 Oct 76RD, Rev. 10.9.78 URGENT IMPORTANT
SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP in order to reinstate Method One Word
Clearing. )


URGENT - IMPORTANT

SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP


(Ref: HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP
LRH ED 2 INT ATTESTATION REINSTATED 20 Jan 64
HCO PL 25 Sep 79 METHOD ONE WORD CLEARING Issue II

BPL 18 Oct 76RD, Rev. l0.9.78 URGENT IMPORTANT, SUCCESSFUL
TRAINING LINEUP is canceled because it dropped Method One
Word Clearing out of training. It sought to solve students
on Academy courses being held up due to incomplete Method
One, by no longer requiring Method One. As a result Method
One Word Clearing dropped out of use and Academy students
and interns are now being delayed in training because they
haven't had Method One. The "problem" of incomplete Method
One isn't even a problem, all one would have to do is
complete the Method One!

Method One Word Clearing is now being reinstated by HCO PL
25 Sep 79 II METHOD ONE WORD CLEARING.

The history of BPL 18 Oct 76 and its revisions is of
interest because there have been some six people involved
in writing and rewriting the various versions of this
issue. Each sought to solve some real or imagined problem
with training, by going unusual and altering or changing
LRH Policy on training. As a result, arbitraries were
entered into training and LRH Tech was dropped out of use.
Each time this happened, training became
less effective and slower. Instead of getting back to LRH
policy on training each new revision entered a new
arbitrary and omitted a vital piece of LRH Tech.

LRH has discovered that the troubles others have been
having with training are due to: (a) the introduction of
arbitraries and (b) omitted use of the Tech.

Nothing in this issue cancels or alters any LRH Policy, nor
does anything in this issue permit anything less than full
use of LRH Tech.

BPL 18 Oct 76RD had become long and difficult to read
during all these revisions.

The valid points from it follow in this issue.


STUDENT HAT COURSE

The Student Hat Course was put back onto the Training Route
in 1976 by LRH when it was discovered that the course had
disappeared from use. (See HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION
ROUND-UP)


FAST FLOW TRAINING

Definition: "A student attests his theory or practical
class when he has fully covered the materials and can apply
them. There is no examination." (LRH ED 2 INT) The fast
flow student passes courses by an attestation at Certs and
Awards that he (a) enrolled properly on the course, (b) has
paid for the course (or signed a no-charge invoice for 2
l/2 or 5 year contracted staff), (c) has studied and
understands all the materials on the checksheet, (d) has
done the drills called for by the checksheet, (e) can
produce the result required in the course materials. Twin
checkouts are suspended.

Examinations are not required .

Following are the rules of Fast Flow Training:

l. The only prerequisite for A student, staff or public to
be able to Fast Flow his courses is Student Hat and Method
One Word Clearing. Where a student has already done the
full Primary Rundown, he is also qualified to Fast Flow his
courses.

2. Method One Word Clearing must be fully done with each
word taken to F/N as well as F/Ning the final assessment.

3. False attestations on Fast Flow Training equals a
condition of Liability for the student and immediate
cancellation of the cert and loss of Fast Flow Training
privileges.


FAST FLOW AND QUAL

On Internships, the do the starrate checkouts required on
each other. High Crime Checkouts and cramming actions
requiring starrates are done starrated and not fast flow.

(Per HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP. )


STAFF HATTING

The only prerequisite for staff hatting is BSM (Basic Study
Manual ) done per the checksheet. PRD ( Primary Rundown is
not a prerequisite, nor is a Student Hat, nor Method One.
Where a staff member has only done the BSM he must not Fast
Flow his training, and must take exams to graduate .

Staff members are urged to do the Student Hat and Method
One as early as possible and must do these before a Major
Course anyway. Staff can get Method One, by co-auditing it,
from student auditing or in staff auditing. (If staff
co-audit Method One, they get the added advantage of
learning how to do word clearing.)


SUPERVISION

It is important that supervisors ensure that students are
applying study tech at all times and pinksheet any outness
they find.

In Fast Flow Training it is important that ethics is put in
for any and every false attest, or the gains which can be
gotten from Scientology training will get lost.


WHAT IS THE SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINEUP?

It consists of following and keeping in the LRH HCO PLs on
Training found in OEC Volume 4, making full use of LRH
Study Tech and not allowing it to be omitted and keeping
arbitraries off the line. Then there would be no trouble in
training really professional Auditors, C/Ss, Supervisors,
Administrative staff and Executives, rapidly and in great
quantity. The Tech works when you use it. Use it and make
competent people.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:DM:gal
Copyright (c) 1979
L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
010. HCOPL 7 MAY 69 STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOR


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 7 MAY 1969
Issue II

Remimeo
Dianetics Course


Tech Division - - Qual Division


STUDENTS GUIDE TO ACCEPTABLE BEHAVIOR

(Edited for the Hubbard Standard Dianetic Course)


GENERAL

1. Get sufficient food and sleep. Always eat breakfast
before class and morning sessions.

2. When being a preclear, be one, not a student or auditor.
When being an auditor, be an auditor, not a student or
preclear. When in class and lectures, be a student not an
auditor or a preclear.

3. If you don't know something or are confused about course
data, ask a Supervisor or send a despatch. DO NOT ASK OTHER
STUDENTS AS THIS CREATES PROGRESSIVELY WORSENING ERRORS IN DATA. 
Also despatches from you to L. Ron Hubbard will be relayed if 
you place all such in the basket marked "Students Out".


AUDITING

4. Do not consume any alcoholic beverage between 6 a.m. on
Sundays and after class on Fridays.

5. Do not consume or have administered to yourself or any
other student any drug, antibiotics, aspirin, barbiturates,
opiates, sedatives, hypnotics or medical stimulants for the
duration of the course without the approval of the D of T.

6. Do not give any processing to anyone under any
circumstances without direct permission of the D of T.
(Emergency assists excepted.)

7. Do not receive any processing from anyone under any
circumstances without the express permission of the D of T.

8. Do not engage in any "self-processing" under any
circumstances during the course at any time.

9. Do not receive any treatment, guidance, or help from anyone 
in the healing arts, i.e. physician, dentist, etc., without 
the consent of the D of T / Ethics Officer. (Emergency treatment 
when the D of T is not available is excepted.)

10. Do not engage in any rite, ceremony, practice,
exercise, meditation, diet, food therapy or any similar
occult, mystical, religious, naturopathic, homeopathic,
chiropractic treatment or any other healing or mental
therapy while on course without the express permission of
the D of T / Ethics Officer.

11. Do not discuss your case, your Auditor, your
Supervisors, your classmates, L. Ron Hubbard, ORG personnel
or the ORG with anyone. Take up any complaints with your
supervisor.

12. Do not engage in any sexual relationships of any nature
or kind or get emotionally involved with any classmate who
is not your legal spouse.

13. Follow the Auditor's Code during all sessions when
being the Auditor.

14. Follow technical procedure as outlined on the course
exactly and precisely.

15. Be honest at all times on your auditing report form.
Stating every process run, Tone Arm changes and times,
sensitivity setting, cognition's of your preclear and any
changes of physical appearance, reactions, communication
level, or otherwise what you observe in your preclear.

16. Place all reports in the folder of your preclear after
each session, turn it into the Examiner for examination.

17. Students must not read their own report folder or that
of another student, unless he is auditing that student.


PREMISES

18. Do not make any undue noise either indoors, or when
leaving class.

19. Use the correct entrances for entering and leaving the
premises.


QUARTERS

20. Do not put cigarettes out in plastic waste baskets or
on the floors.

21. Keep all your bulletins, supplies and personal
possessions in the space allotted to you and keep your
space neat and orderly.

22. Students are allowed to smoke during breaks only and
always outside any study or auditing quarters.

23. The basket marked "Student In" is the basket where all
communications, bulletins or mail to students are placed.
Always check this basket daily to see if you have received
any communications.

24. Report and turn in any damaged property or goods used
on the Course. Protect and keep the premises in good condition.

25. No food may be stored or eaten in the Classrooms at any time.


SCHEDULES

26. Be on time for class and all assignments.

27. Buy any books you need from the bookstore at appointed times.

28. Follow all schedules exactly.

29. Study and work during your class periods and over
weekends. You have a lot to get checked out on in order to
get a course completion. You can't afford to waste time.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:emp.cs.ei.rd 
Copyright (c) 1969 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
011. HCOB 12 SEP 78 DIANETICS FORBIDDEN ON CLEARS AND OTS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 12 SEPTEMBER 1978

Remimeo
BPI


URGENT- IMPORTANT

DIANETICS FORBIDDEN

ON CLEARS AND OTS


New Era Dianetics or any Dianetics is NOT to be run on
Clears or above or on Dianetic Clears.

This applies even when they say they can see some pictures.

Anyone who has purchased NED auditing who is Clear or above
must be routed to an AO or Flag to receive the special NED
Rundown for OTs. They are NOT to be run on regular New Era
Dianetics.

Anyone who is Clear but not III is to get through III
immediately so he can receive this special rundown.

The EP of this rundown is: CAUSE OVER LIFE.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nc
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
012. HCOPL 11 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES MATERIALS - SECURITY OF DATA


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

AOs HCO POLICY LETTER OF 11 AUGUST 1971
Issue V
(Replaces HCO P/L of 10 Nov 66)

SHs 
Tech Hats 
Qual Hats
Ethics 
R6EW, CC &
Course Packs 


ADVANCED COURSES MATERIALS

SECURITY OF DATA


Issued with a small amount of R6 data in 1964, three or
four persons promptly used it on pcs knowing well it was
forbidden. The pcs became ill or misemotional toward us.
And just the day I write this (original writing 4 October
1965) I myself encountered a pc, very ill, who had had some
original R6 data misused on her and did not suspect why her
case and health had worsened.

She was not ready for it at all.

The issue earlier was a trial balloon, in a sense. I found
certain persons (a small minority) were not up to
responsibility for the material of April 1964.

Therefore our firm action will be that the moment we find
the material of the Clearing Course or Course has escaped
or been misused we will quickly trace the person who was
insecure and cut off all further or any future Clearing or
data issue to that person The likelihood of independent
discovery even with clues has proven to be non-existent by
actual review of auditors trying to find pieces of it when
they had over half of the answers already.

You must realize that we suffer, all of us, from the misuse
of knowledge concerning the mind at a very early period. To
place this data near such people as psychiatrists or even
states places them in a position to enslave people or
repeat the original action and cave people in. A very small
minority, receiving incorrect data did promptly use it
harmfully on others after April 1964.

Until we ourselves have climbed well out of the hole, we
must safeguard the materials. Our case gains depend on it.
And others could make our salvage of people impossible.

We do not safeguard these materials from any commercial
consideration. Our futures, those of each of us and those
of all Scientologists, depend on our keeping this material
under lock and safeguarded from abuse until we are well
away as a group and can handle things better as individuals
as well as a group.

The road is wide open to anyone to come up the grades and
obtain them. But it is shut to any who misuse them or
injure their security.

Students of the Advanced Courses, the Advanced Course C/S
and Supervisor, Ethics Officers and all HCO and Org staff
have it in their personal interest to enforce security of
materials to the limit.

These restrictions apply to no data up to Grade V.

From Power Processing on up the data is confidential. Up to
there, you can release Scientology data as you always
have - freely and to everyone. But this last bit is dangerous
in unskilled or uneducated or unscrupulous hands and it is
purely ours. It belongs to the Scientologists who keep the
show on the road and must be available to them when they
are ready.

L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:BW:LR:sb.rd 
Copyright (c) 1971 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
013. HCOPL 8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE VIOLATIONS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 JANUARY 1981

Remimeo
Advance Orgs
AOSHs
SHs


ADVANCE COURSE VIOLATIONS

(Reference HCOB 8 Oct 71 Issue II
C/S Series No. 5 and HCOB 7 Dec 71
C/S Series No. 5 ADDITION)


Hereafter the following will be considered GROSS VIOLATIONS
if they occur in an Advanced Org or an AOSH or SH.

Full Solo Line not under 1 In Charge.

Having no Review Auditor or Auditors in the Solo Ad-Course
line up, but sending pcs to "Review" and jamming them into
HGC backlogs.

Letting a student onto Solo Auditing who can't audit and
hasn't been trained to audit.

Giving a Solo Student his materials while he is still
studying basic auditing.

Letting files or materials get in any confusion.

Letting security go out on the Solo materials line.

Failing to C/S sessions.

Not having a Solo Unit.

Not applying the C/S Series.

Not making students attain the EP of a level before going on.

Using next levels to handle what's wrong with a case.

Not seeing Solo and Advance Course are well attended and
promoted and sold.

Failing to get blows or incompletes back in and handled.

Lose track of a student after sending him for intensives
and not being at all times aware of who is on Solo lines.

Feeding EPs to students.

Failing to be courteous and friendly and helpful to Solo students.

______________

These are the major faults which slow up or stop the
Solo-R6EW-AO flow lines, cost wins and income and keep orgs
who have AO lines from being prosperous.

If you were to take the above as a checklist and go over
the Solo lines, each point found in violation would be a
major WHY as to low income and upsets.

For instance the Solo Supervisor is not just responsible
for the Solo Course. He is responsible for ALL checkouts of
ALL solo and Advance Courses INCLUDING R6EW.

When there is no IN CHARGE for the whole line, Solo, R6EW,
clear to VII on up there is no one to regulate and
coordinate flow so it doesn't flow.

If there is no Solo Review Auditor then a patch up can only
be done by sending the person to the HGC where an
inevitable backlog bars the person off Solo for days, weeks
or forever and kills all further course wins and sales.
Review for a Solo student must be immediate. It is of
course charged for.

The only way a Solo student gets off this one line is by being
sent to Cramming. That should be a one day action at the most.

If Mini Courses have to be taken by Solo students they are
taken under the Solo Super.

This doesn't say that the Solo Course Supervisor cannot
have persons for Admin and other Course Supers under him.

As for Promo, when an AO begins to specialize in
intensives, lower grades and Class IV actions they are
taking business away from Class IV orgs and SHs and not
wearing their own hat.

Thus Solo Courses MUST be promoted.

Nothing in this Policy Letter may be interpreted to mean
that a Solo sign up can't be audited on anything but fast
reviews. It is totally possible that a person signed up for
Solo R6EW may be found to need several intensives and be
given them. As long as 1. The student IS signed up for Solo
and 2. He is not shunted over into HGC backlog but is
actual gotten into auditing with actual intensives being
given in rapid succession like one or two 12 1/2 hour
intensives a week. If these conditions can't be met the
Solo line is justified in expanding its own review.

All manner of irregularities can occur on Solo lines. Like
giving a "10 day Solo Course" at R6 level and then letting
the student who of course could never learn to audit in 10
days, fall flat on his head from there on out.

The line up is given in C/S Series No. 5 and C/S Series No.
5 Addition.

Solo Courses can and do produce the most fantastic wins and
case gains.

It is up to those entrusted with the activity to make it so.


L RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:nt
Copyright (c) 1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
014. HCOPL 8 JAN 81 ADVANCE COURSE REGULATIONS AND SECURITY


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 8 JANUARY 1981
( CANCELS BPL 12 Aug 1971R ADVANCE COURSES REGULATIONS, ADVANCE 
COURSE SECURITY and BPL 23 Jan 1969R ADVANCE COURSES SECURITY,
as these issues have been updated and consolidated into this
HCO Policy Letter. )

Remimeo
AOs and 
AOSHs 
Only 
Ethics 
Qual 
Adv Courses 
Personnel 
Adv Courses
Students


ADVANCE COURSE REGULATIONS AND SECURITY


The Technology of the Advance Courses is a very precise
one. There is no room for any arbitraries to enter in, and
due to the confidential nature of the material a very firm
ethics code is needed in the area. There is no other source
of data than in the materials themselves. The following
regulations have proven successful over many years and are
now very strict policy.

1. No off-line advice may be sought in cases of students on
the Advanced Courses.

2. Any "unusual solution" sought or question asked must be
answered only by referring to relevant Advanced Course
materials and standard word clearing tech by the supervisors.

3. Examination of states of case must be done by Qual
Examiner and the student's complete folder must be
submitted to such an Examiner at the time of examination
for his inspection.

4. Any person examining for attained states of case must
have been checked out on all technical materials of the
Advanced Courses.

5. Any Examiner examining states of case in Qual must be on
III or above.

6. All Advanced Course personnel must be on III or above.

7. No person may be admitted on the Advanced Courses who
has a bad Ethics history or a this lifetime suppressive
order or a criminal record without a special Board of
Investigation convened by the HCO Area Sec.

8. No person with a record of using R6EW or Clearing Course
materials suppressively may be admitted on the Courses.

9. Persons who have been grossly insecure in their handling
of R6EW or Clearing Course materials or anyone making them
available illegally to another may not be admitted on the
Course regardless of the action taken at the time.

10. Students folders are to be C/Sed after each session.
The student goes to the Examiner after each session.

11. After the student has gone to the Examiner, he takes
his folder to Solo Tech Reception.

12. When an Advance Courses student wishes to communicate
to the Case Supervisor about his case or his auditing, he
must do so either in writing via his folder or as an
origination given to the Examiner on the meter.

13. If the student needs to clarify a C/S's instructions or
has any questions or uncertainty about his auditing tech he
should always write it up and send it to the course
supervisor along with his folder and the course supervisor
will go over it with him giving any needed references or
drilling.

14. No alcohol may be consumed within 24 hours before
session and students must not consume or have administered
to them any drugs, antibiotics, aspirin, barbiturates,
opiates, sedatives, hypnotics or stimulants without written
OK from the Course Supervisor and C/ S. The only exception
would be a medical emergency, and the C/S must be informed
without delay.

15. Auditing must be done daily unless the C/S has
instructed a break be taken due to a big win.

AO 1 forms of daily progress must be filled in and handed
in at the place designated in the Solo Tech Reception area.

16. Advance Course students are not to discuss their cases
with ANYONE except, (1) the Case Supervisor (and then only
by written comm put into the auditing folder), (2) the
Examiner by way of a metered origination, (3) a review
auditor in session or (4) the Solo Case Consultant.

17. Students who are in case trouble or who have ceased to
audit on Advance Courses shall be sent to the Solo Case
Consultant or to review.

18. Advance Courses students session admin must be legible.
If it is not it will be considered a No Report.

19. Advance Courses students should not leave town until
given permission to do so in writing by the Case Supervisor.

20. A student who does not qualify as a fast flow student
per HCO PL 25 Sep 79 SUCCESSFUL TRAINING LINE UP, and
therefore takes an examination on the materials of the
course in Qual, may not take his examination paper or
answer sheet out of the Qual area designated for
confidential exams. After marking, the exam is handed back
to the student for reference but it must always be promptly
returned by the student after reviewing it as to any errors
made. It is the Examiners responsibility to see this is done.

21. NO UNAUTHORIZED COPIES OF UPPER LEVEL MATERIALS ARE TO BE MADE.

This means NO notes, NO photocopies, NO "little
simplifications", NO little codes to keep handy. None of
the materials are to be in any way copied, not even
partially or in alter-ised form. They must not be tape
recorded. Any student possessing "notes" or "study aids" on
any Advance Courses issues or films, flash cards, copies of
commands, or any such copies must immediately destroy them
completely.

22. Any written references given the student by the
Cramming Officer while on a cramming cycle must be handed
in to the Cramming Officer at the end of each cramming period.

23. THE ADVANCE COURSES MATERIALS MUST NOT BE WRITTEN ON OR

CHANGED IN ANY WAY AT ALL.

Violation of points 21, 22 and 23 above will bring about a
severe Ethics action, which could include debarment from
future Advance Courses ( though not limited to this ).

L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:kjm 
Copyright (c) 1981 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

========================
015. HCOPL 16 AUG 66 CLEARING COURSE SECURITY


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 16 AUGUST 1966
Issue II

Remimeo
Ethics Hats
Clearing Course Super
Clearing Course Students


CLEARING COURSE SECURITY


If any Ethics Officer receives a report that a Clearing
Course Student is engaging in activities such as to
indicate that he or she is a potential security risk with
regard to Clearing Course materials, the Ethics Officer
must immediately cable the Clearing Course Supervisor at
Saint Hill giving brief details, and airmail full details
immediately.

Any sort of squirrel activity, contact with declared SPs or
Suppressive Groups, entheta about or enturbulation of
Scientology Orgs, or failure to report or communicate
promptly to the local Ethics Officer when so requested,
would be grounds for suspicion.

Unsolicited receipt of mailings from a Suppressive Group
would not, particularly if turned in unread to the Ethics
Officer.

The Clearing Course Supervisor, on receipt of such a
report, immediately cables the Ethics Officer to collect
the student's materials and forward them to Saint Hill. The
Ethics Officer may deputize any person qualified to handle
such materials, but must comply immediately.

Meanwhile a full investigation into the allegations against
the Clearing Course student is done and speedily completed.
The findings are reported by airmail to the Clearing Course
Supervisor.

If the allegations are found to be totally untrue, then the
person making them is subject to severe Ethics action,
since he has wasted a Clearing Course student's auditing
time and slowed him down on the road to Clear.

L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:ec:bh
Copyright (c) 1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
016. HCOPL 28 SEP 67 r. 19 Jul 75 CONFIDENTIAL DATA


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 20 SEPTEMBER 1967R
REVISED 19 JULY 1975

Remimeo
All Tech & Qual Staff
Ethics


CONFIDENTIAL DATA


1. No Ethics Chit written by anyone should contain data
which is classified as confidential.

2. Such material so classified is contained in Power
Processes, R6EW,Clearing Course, Advanced Courses and Solo
C/S Course and above.



Guardian Comm WW - Corrie Ellis
Qual Sec - Helen Pollen
HCO Area Sec - Irene Dunleavy
Exec Council SH - J.J. Delance
- Joan McNocher
- Ken Urquhart
Exec Council WW - Tony Dunleavy
- Eunice Ford
- Ken Delderfield

Mary Sue Hubbard
The Guardian WW

for
L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jp.cden
Copyright (c) 1967
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
017. HCOPL 12 AUG 71 ADVANCED COURSES

HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 12 AUGUST 1971
ISSUE IV

AOs and AOSHs
Ethics
Registrar
Adv Courses Personnel
Adv Courses Students


ADVANCED COURSES


These Courses are by invitation only.

The invitation to the Course or to any succeeding part
depends on several factors: 

1. Security of R6EW, Class VII and Advanced Courses materials 
in the student's hands.

2. Degree of participation the being has engaged in in Scientology.

3. The general character of the being as a Scientologist,
based on his Ethics record.

4. The Scientology technical proficiency of the being.

If an invitation is not received a petition may be
submitted to the Office of LRH, setting forth evidence as
to why one should be invited.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jp.rd
Copyright (c) 1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
018. HCOPL 29 JUN 68 ENROLLMENT IN SUPPRESSIVE GROUPS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 29 JUNE 1968

Remimeo
Ethics Officer 
Div 1 - Dept 3 - Ethics Section Hat
Registrar Hat 
Address Hat 
City Offices


ENROLLMENT IN SUPPRESSIVE GROUPS

(Amends HCO PL 28 Dec 1965 of Same Title)


Any person found to be connected to a Suppressive Group may
not thereafter be enrolled in the Saint Hill Solo Audit
Course or the Clearing Course.

Suppressive Groups are defined as those which seek to
destroy Scientology or which specialize in injuring or
killing persons or damaging their cases or which advocate
suppression of Mankind.

It does not matter whether the person so connected
disconnects or handles, or whether the connection has been
previously severed.

The reason for this policy letter is to make it extremely
difficult for suppressive groups to acquire data they could
then pervert and use to harm others.

If a person was a member and left, it still remains such a
person must have had some basic agreement with the motives
of the suppressive group.

If we do not hold this rule we may find our task made
harder by the abuse of data. We do not want, ever again,
the epidemics of implantation to recur and will do all in
our power to deny data to any who might pervert it to such use.

A person so denied access to upper level data may not
receive it ever unless the group of which he is or has been
a member is completely abolished and dispersed.

Ethics files in all orgs must contain the names of such persons.

Neither may such a person ever become a staff member of a
Scientology organization without special clearance from LRH
Ethics Authority Section, Dept 27, WW. Anyone on staff
found to have been a member of a suppressive group must be
sent to this section for clearance.

NAMES PERSONS ENROLLED IN SP GROUPS OR DECLARED SP MUST BE
CIRCULATED TO ALL FRANCHISE HOLDERS, SCN OFFICES AND ORGS AS AND WHEN
DISCOVERED. THEY ARE NOT COVERED BY ANY AMNESTY AND MAY NOT HAVE
ADVANCED COURSES UNTIL GROUP DISBANDED. SUCH PERSONS MAY NOT BE
EMPLOYED BY ORGS OR OFFICES AND IF FOUND EMPLOYED IN ANY CENTER
THAT FRANCHISE WILL BE CANCELED, PERSONS OF SP GROUP MEMBERSHIP OR
DECLARED SP MAY NOT BE FSMS.

L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH js. cden 
Copyright (c) 1968 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
019. HCOB 22 MAY 69 DIANETICS, ITS BACKGROUND


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 22 MAY 1969

Remimeo
Dian Checksheet


DIANETICS

ITS BACKGROUND


The world before Dianetics had never known a precision
mental science.

Man has used mental knowledge in the past mainly for
control, politics and propaganda .

The word "psychology" in the popular usage is synonymous
with "getting around" somebody.

In the thousands of years before 1950 there were many
philosophers and much knowledge was gathered in the field
of logic, mathematics, electronics and the material sciences.

However, due to ideologies and political conflicts, little
of this prior knowledge was ever applied to the field of
the human mind.

The scientific idea of regarding as a truth only that which
could be demonstrated with a result was never really
applied to the mind.

"Researchers" in this field were not fully trained in
mathematics, the scientific method or logic. They were
interested mainly in their own private ideas and in
political Targets.

As an example, the only "schools" of psychology taught or
followed in the West were Russian and East German.

The primary school was that of Ivan Petrovitch Pavlov
(1849 - 1936) a veterinarian.

Every school child and university student was required to
study Pavlov in one disguise or another. The burden of
Pavlov's work is that man is an animal and only works
through "conditioning". The Western nations overlooked the
fact that this work had already destroyed several countries
including Czarist Russia, that Stalin had made Pavlov write
up his work in the Kremlin in 1928 in order to permit the
control of men. Using the mental studies of an enemy is a
very dangerous thing to do.

The West at that time was run by only the "very best
people" and possibly it pleased them greatly to think that
the masses they controlled were only animals after all.
That this also made them animals did not occur to them.

Billions of dollars were appropriated by parliaments and
congress to subsidize men to "better control" their animals.

These men had no idea of healing anyone or helping anyone.
Riots and civil disorder were the only product they achieved.

Dianetics was released straight into the teeth of these
heavily subsidized Barons of the Mind with their "it takes
12 years to make a psychiatrist" and "authority states" and
"any effort to interrupt this monopoly must be stamped out
at once".

Psychology and psychiatry were state (government) subjects,
pushed by the "very best people".

They could not make their way on their own because they
were contrary to the public morals and customs. The public
actually wanted nothing to do with them.

In mental institutions torture, permanent damage and death
were the order of the day, on the basis that it did not
matter if one killed people as they were just animals any way.

So the public was on the side of Dianetics (and later
Scientology) and the governments were on the side of the
"very best people".

Press, controlled by governments and intelligence services
and the "very best people" lied endlessly about Dianetics
(and Scientology).

Dianetics, a new valid mental science, was pitted against
Russian and Eastern European teachings.

Dianetics is not only the first mental science developed in
the West, it is the first mental science on the planet that
uniformly produces beneficial results.

Man is being subjected to fantastic and violent efforts to
lure or crush him into docility. This is the obvious end
product of Russian and Eastern European technologies now
heavily financed and supported, unwittingly, by Western
governments.

Man's response to this is riots and civil disorder in the
universities, unions and streets. Man does not accurately
trace the source of his oppression. He is violently worried.

The government response has been more millions to
psychologists and psychia-trists to develop new means of
control and oppression. What has not worked in the past is
not likely to work in the present or the future.

Czarist Russia, the entire Balkans, Poland, Germany and
many more Eastern European countries have already perished
trying to use the work of Pavlov, Wundt and others. The
entire West, having "bought" the same governing ideas, is
now in turmoil and is perishing in its turn.

Dianetics refuses to be a revolutionary activity. It does
not have to be. All it has as a mission is to get itself
applied.

The basic building block of a society is the individual.
From individuals groups are built. And this is the society.
No society is better than its basic building blocks.

Men are not animals.

Well men are sane men.

Dianetics, if applied to individuals in the society, brings
hope, well and sane beings.

These well and sane beings, sent on to Scientology, then
become brilliant and very able beings.

We are evolving Man to a higher state.

In this state he can better handle his problems.

We are not trying to overthrow anyone. We are not revolting
against anyone. In truth we call even make the fancied
"very best people" into actual very best people.

Dianetics was first conceived in 1930 and the developments
of 39 years have gone into producing Standard Dianetics.

Dianetics: The Original Thesis was published in 1949 in
manuscript form. It was copied in various ways, hand to
hand across the world. Dianetics: The Evolution of a
Science was published in late 1949. Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health was published May 9, 1950 and has
since sold millions of copies.

In the early '50s new discoveries concerning the spirit
brought us into Scientology.

But Dianetics was never lost sight of and every little
while I would push it further ahead toward a fast, easy,
100% workability.

The present release of Standard Dianetics is a near final product.

If done exactly, it produces good, permanent results in
only a few hours of auditing.

One can train a Dianetic auditor in Standard Dianetics in
from 10 days to a month at the most, with an average of
about 2 weeks.

These are very, very worthwhile advances and Standard
Dianetics is almost as great a breakthrough in 1969 as the
Original Thesis in 1949. Hundreds of thousands of hours of
search and research have gone into it.

Dianetics has progressed from the pre-Dianetic period of no
science of the mind, to the existence of a real science of
the mind, to a fast accurate science simpler than any other
scientific subject and of more value to Man.

All this advance has been very hardly won, without
government billions, in the teeth of avalanches of lies and
opposition.

The subject owes no allegiance to anyone but itself. It has
no commitments to anyone. It has no politics. It belongs to
those who use it.

It is the only game in the universe where everyone wins.

Let's keep it that way.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: an.rd
Copyright (c) 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
020. HCOPL 14 OCT 68RA r. 19 Jun 80 THE AUDITOR'S CODE


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 14 OCTOBER 1968RA
REVISED 19 JUNE 1980
(ALSO HCOB 19 JUNE 1980)

Remimeo 
Class VIII
All Auditors


THE AUDITOR'S CODE


The pledge of practitioners of pastoral counseling.

Required to be signed by the holders of or before the
issuance of certificates for the certificates to be valid.

_____________

I hereby promise as an Auditor to follow the Auditor's Code.

1. I promise not to evaluate for the preclear or tell him
what he should think about his case in session.

2. I promise not to invalidate the preclear's case or gains
in or out of session.

3. I promise to administer only Standard Tech to a preclear
in the standard way.

4. I promise to keep all auditing appointments once made.

5. I promise not to process a preclear who has not had
sufficient rest and who is physically tired.

6. I promise not to process a preclear who is improperly
fed or hungry.

7. I promise not to permit a frequent change of Auditors.

8. I promise not to sympathize with a preclear but to be effective.

9. I promise not to let the preclear end session on his own
determinism but to finish off those cycles I have begun.

10. I promise never to walk off from a preclear in session.

11. I promise never to get angry with a preclear in session.

12. I promise to run every major case action to a floating needle.

13. I promise never to run any one action beyond its
floating needle.

14. I promise to grant beingness to the preclear in session.

15. I promise not to mix the processes of Scientology with
other practices except when the preclear is physically ill
and only medical means will serve.

16. I promise to maintain Communication with the preclear
and not to cut his comm or permit him to overrun in session.

17. I promise not to enter comments, expressions or
enturbulence into a session that distract a preclear from
his case.

18. I promise to continue to give the preclear the process
or auditing command when needed in the session.

19. I promise not to let a preclear run a wrongly
understood command.

20. I promise not to explain, justify or make excuses in
session for any Auditor mistakes whether real or imagined.

21. I promise to estimate the current case state of a
preclear only by Standard Case Supervision data and not to
diverge because of some imagined difference in the case.

22. I promise never to use the secrets of a preclear
divulged in session for punishment or personal gain.

23. I promise to never falsify worksheets of sessions.

24. I promise to see that any fee received for processing
is refunded following the policies of the Claims
Verification Board, if the preclear is dissatisfied and
demands it within three months after the processing, the
only condition being that he may not again be processed or
trained.

25. I promise not to advocate Scientology only to cure
illness or only to treat the insane, knowing well it was
intended for spiritual gain.

26. I promise to cooperate fully with the legal
organizations of Dianetics and Scientology as developed by
L. Ron Hubbard in safeguarding the ethical use and practice
of the subject according to the basics of Standard Tech.

27. I promise to refuse to permit any being to be
physically injured, violently damaged, operated on or
killed in the name of "mental treatment".

28. I promise not to permit sexual liberties or violation
of the mentally unsound.

29. I promise to refuse to admit to the ranks of
practitioners any being who is insane.


Auditor:___________________

Date: _____________________

Witness:_______________________ Place:_____________________


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.bk
Copyright (c) 1968, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
021. HCOPL 27 MAY 65 PROCESSING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 27 MAY 1965

Remimeo
Sthil Cl VII Course 
Students
Sthil Staff 
Ethics Hats
Star-Rated Check

Qual & Tech Divs
ALL HATS

HCO Div
ALL HATS


PROCESSING


Since 1950 we have had an iron bound rule that we didn't
leave pcs in trouble just to end a session

For fifteen years we have always continued a session that
found the pc in trouble and I myself have audited a pc for
nine additional hours, all night long in fact, just to get
the pc through.

Newer auditors, not trained in the stern school of running
engrams, must learn this all over again.

It doesn't matter whether the auditor has had a policy on
this or not - one would think that common decency would be
enough as to leave a pc in the middle of a secondary or an
engram and just coolly end the session is pretty cruel.
Some do it because they are startled or afraid and "Rabbit"
(run away by ending the session).

Auditors who end a process or change it when it has turned
on a heavy somatic are likewise ignorant.

WHAT TURNS IT ON WILL TURN IT OFF.

This is the oldest rule in auditing.

Of course people get into secondaries and engrams, go
through misemotion and heavy somatics. This happens because
things are running out. To end off a process or a session
because of the clock is to ignore the real purpose of auditing.

The oldest rules we have are

(a) GET THE PC THROUGH IT.

(b) WHAT TURNS IT ON WILL TURN IT OFF.

(c) THE WAY OUT IS THE WAY THROUGH.

These now are expressed as POLICY.

A falsified auditor's report is also subject to a Court of Ethics.

Any auditor violating this policy letter is liable to all
immediate Court of Ethics convened within 24 hours of the
offense or as soon as is urgently possible.

Auditing at all levels works well when it is done by the book.

The purpose of Ethics is to open the way for all to get in Tech.

Then we can do our job.

THERE IS NO MODERN PROCESS THAT WILL NOT WORK WHEN EXACTLY
APPLIED.

Therefore in the eyes of Ethics all auditing failures are
Ethics failures-PTS, Suppressive Persons as pcs, or
non-compliance with tech for auditors.

And the first offense an auditor can commit is ceasing to
audit when he is most needed by his pc.

Hence it is the first most important consideration of
Ethics to prevent such occurrences.

Then we'll make happy pcs, Releases and Clears.


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:wmc.pm.cdcn
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
022. HCOB 5 DEC 73 THE REASON FOR Q AND A


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 5 DECEMBER 1973

Remimeo
All Auditors
All Levels
Flag
LRH Comms


THE REASON FOR Q AND A


Q and A means "Question and Answer".

When the term Q and A is used it means one did NOT get an
answer to his question. It also means not getting
compliance with an order but accepting something else.

Example: Auditor: Do birds fly? Pc: I don't like birds.
Auditor: What don't you like about birds? FLUNK. It's a Q
and A. The right reply would be an answer to the question
asked and the right action would be to get the original
question answered TR 4 (handling origins) can apply here.

The moment TR 4 is violated (Ack and return the pc to
original Question) and the original unanswered question is
not again asked the Auditor just drifts along with the pc.
Things get restimulated, nothing gets really handled or run.

In Administration the same thing can happen. The executive
gives an order, the junior says or does something else, the
executive does not simply TR 4 it and get the original
order done, and the result is chaos.

Executive: Phone Mr. Schultz and tell him our printing
order will be there this afternoon.

Junior I don't know his number. Executive: Don't you have a
phone book? Junior: The phone company didn't send one this
year as our bill was overdue. Executive (the fool) goes to
Accounts to see what about the phone bill Mr. Schultz never
gets his call. The printing order arrives but Mr.

Schultz doesn't know it . .

Example: Executive: Do target 21 now Junior: I don't have
any issue files Executive: What happened to them? Junior
Mimeo goofed. Executive: I'll go see Mimeo . . .


DISPERSAL

Q and A is simply Postulate Aberration.

Aberration is non-straight line by definition.

A sick thetan who is all caved in can't direct a postulate
at anything. When he tries, he lets it wobble around and go
elsewhere.

The difference between a Degraded Being and an is simply
that the DB can't put out a postulate or intention in a
direct line or way and make it hold good.

The insane are a great example of this. They are insane
because they have evil intentions.

But they can't even make these stick. They may intend to
burn down the house but they usually wind up watering the
rug or do some other non sequitur thing It's not that they
don't mess things up. The whole point here is that they can't 
even properly destroy what they intend to destroy. Even their 
evil intentions wobble, poor things.

But not all people who Q and A are insane.

When a person is running at effect he Qs and As.

He is confronted by life, he does not confront it.

He is usually a bit blind to things as his ability to look
AT is turned back on him by his lack of beam power. Thus he
gives the appearance of being unaware.

His emotional feeling is overwhelm.

His mental state is confusion.

He starts for B, winds up at - A.

Other not too well intentioned people can play tricks on a
Qer and Aer. When they don't want to answer or comply they
artfully bring about a Q and A.

Example: Bosco does not want to staple the mimeo issue. He
knows his senior Qs and As.

So we get this. Senior: Staple that issue with the big
stapler. Bosco: I hurt my thumb. Q and A Senior: Have you
been to see the Medical Officer? Bosco: He wouldn't look at
it. Q and A Senior: I'll go have a word with him.
(Departs.) Bosco gets back to reading "Jesse James Rides
Again" humming softly to himself. For HIS trouble is, he Qs
and As with the Mest Universe! BODY Q AND A

Some people Q and A with their bodies. The body is, after
all, composed of Mest. It follows the laws of Mest.

One of these laws is Newton's first law of motion: INERTIA.
This is the tendency of a Mest object to remain motionless
until acted upon by an exterior force. Or to continue in a
line of motion until acted upon by an exterior force.

Well, the main force around that is continually acting on a
human body is a thetan, the being himself.

The body will remain at rest (since it is a Mest Object)
until acted upon by the thetan that is supposed to be
running it.

If that being is an aberrated non-straight line being THE
BODY REACTS ON HIM MORE THAN HE REACTS ON THE BODY. Thus he
remains motionless or very slow. When the body is in
unwanted motion, the being does not deter the motion as the
body is acting upon him far more than he is reacting on the
body.

As a result, one of the manifestations is Q and A. He wants
to pick up a piece of paper. The body inertia has to be
overcome to do so. So he does not reach for the paper, he
just leaves the hand where it is. This would be no action
at all. If he then weakly forces the motion, he finds
himself picking up something else like a paper clip,
decides he wants that anyway and settles for it. Now he has
to invent why he has a paper clip in his hand. His original
intention never gets executed.

Some people on medical lines are just there not because of
actual illness but because they are just Qing and Aing with
their body.

People also Q and A with themselves. They want to stop
drinking and can't. They want to stop or change something
about themselves or their body and then disperse off onto
something else.

Freud read all sorts of dire and awful things into simple Q
and A. He invented intentions the person must have that
made him "sublimate". All Freud succeeded in doing was
making the person introspective looking for wrong whys.

The right why was simple - the person could not go in a
straight line to an objective and/ or could not cease to do
something he was compulsively doing.

The very word ABERRATION contains the idea of this - no
straight line but a bent one.

THE CURE FOR THIS SORT OF THING (Q and A with a body) IS 
OBJECTIVE PROCESSES.

And a very willing and bright thetan CAN simply recognize
it for what it is-not enough push!

And instead of going to the MO for a slight ache, he just
pushes on through.

As the ache is a recoil of body Q and A in a lot of cases,
the ache itself goes away as soon as one simply pushes through.

Painters and artists buy the idea they are benefited by
aberration. "Be glad you are neurotic" was a trick being
played by the late and unlamented psychiatrists on artists.

One paints because he can push into execution what he
visualizes. The best painters were the least aberrated.

Greenwich Village or Left Bank artists, when they don't
paint, never suspect it's because they just can't overcome
hand inertia to push a paint brush!

People live Q and A lives. They never become what they
desire to be because they Q and A with life about it.

Schopenhauer, the German philosopher of doom, even had a
dirty crack about being able to do things: "Stubbornness is
the will taking the place of the intellect." By this, one
is "intellectual" if he Qs and As.


SUMMARY

People who can't get things done are simply Qing and Aing
with people and life.

People who CAN get things done just don't Q and A.

All great truths are simple.

This is a major one.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.jh
Copyright (c) 1973
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
_


FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 3 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

[full contents in part 1]

Part 3/7

023. HCOB 5 APR 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION
024. HCOPL 17 APR 70 AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION"
025. HCOB 14 SEP 71R r. 3 Feb 75 SOLO AUDITORS RIGHTS
026. HCOB 7 MAR 75 EXT AND ENDING SESSION
027. HCOB 10 APR 72 PREOTS DON'T C/S
028. HCOB 11 SEP 70 SOLO ASSISTS
029. HCOB 11 AUG 78 MODEL SESSION
030. HCOB 11 AUG 78 RUDIMENTS, DEFINITIONS AND PATTER
031. HCOB 12 FEB 62 HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS AND MISSED WITHHOLDS
032. HCOB 15 AUG 69 FLYING RUDS
033. HCOB 6 SEP 68 CHECKING FOR FALSE READS
034. HCOB 27 MAY 70R r. 3 Dec 78 UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS
035. HCOB 14 MAR 71R r. 25 Jul 73 F/N EVERYTHING
036. HCOB 11 MAY 69R r. 8 Jul 78 METER TRIM CHECK


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

023. HCOB 5 APR 80 Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 5 APRIL 1980

TR Courses


Q & A, THE REAL DEFINITION


There are several definitions for the term "Q & A".

In Scientologese it is often used to mean "indecisive", not
making up one's mind.

Q stands for "Question". A stands for "Answer". In "perfect
duplication" the answer to a Question would be the Question.

The real definition as it applies to TRs is "The Question
proceeding from the last Answer." Example:

Question: How are you?

Answer: I'm fine.

Question: How fine?

Answer: My stomach hurts.

Question: When did your stomach begin hurting?

Answer: About four.

Question: Where were you at four?

etc., etc.

The above example is a grievous auditing fault. As each
question is based on the last answer, it is called "Q and
A". It could also be called "Q based on last A".

It never completes any cycle. It tangles pcs up. It
violates TR 3. Don't do it.

I trust the above handles any confusion on this subject.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY

BDCS:LRH:dr
Copyright (c) 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
024. HCOPL 17 APR 70 AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION"


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 17 APRIL 1970
Issue II

Remimeo
All Auditors
All Students
Level 0 Checksheet


AN AUDITOR AND "THE MIND'S PROTECTION"


No Auditor should audit with the fear that he will do some
irreparable damage if he makes an error.

"Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health" provides
the answer to the question, "What happens if I make a mistake?"

The following extracts are from "Dianetics: The Modern
Science of Mental Health", Book 3, Chapter I, "The Mind's
Protection":

"The mind is a self protecting mechanism. Short of the use
of drugs as in narco-synthesis, shock, hypnotism or
surgery, no mistake can be made by an Auditor which
cannot be remedied either by himself or by another Auditor."

"Any case, no matter how serious, no matter how unskilled
the auditor, is better opened than left closed."


L RON HUBBARD

LRH:nt.ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
025. HCOB 14 SEP 71R r. 3 Feb 75 SOLO AUDITORS RIGHTS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1971R
ISSUE V
REVISED 3 FEBRUARY 1975

Adv. Course
C/S
Solo Auditors
Solo Course
Check Sheet


Solo C/S Series No. 1R

SOLO AUDITORS RIGHTS

(Revised extracts from HCOB 23 August 1971 C/S Series No. 1,
"Auditors Rights" and revision in signature. Cancels earlier issue
of HCOB 14 Sept 71 Issue V, same title.)


AUDITOR RESPONSIBILITY FOR C/Ses

The responsibility of a Solo Auditor who receives a Case
Supervisor direction (C/ S) of what to audit is NOT
discharged of his responsibility as an Auditor.

THE SOLO AUDITOR HAS A SERIES OF RESPONSIBILITIES THAT ARE
PART OF EVERY C/S HE GETS TO AUDIT.


ACCEPTING A C/S

When the Solo Auditor gets a C/S to do and he thinks it is
not the correct thing to do, he has the right to return it
to the C/S with the reason why and require another one he
can agree to.

The Auditor does not have the right to start doing a C/S
and change it during the session except as noted below


STALE DATED C/S

A C/S that is a week or two old can be dynamite.

This is called a "Stale Dated C/S" meaning it is too old to
be valid.

It should have been done sooner. The pc of last week when
the C/S was written may have been well and happily employed
but a week later may have headaches and reprimand from the
body.

The Solo Auditor who sees his C/S is old and sees the pc
has Bad Indicators is justified in demanding a fresh C/S
giving his reasons why.

Use fresh C/Ses.


ENDING THE SESSION

When the C/S he has is proving unworkable during the
session, the Solo Auditor has a right to end the session
and send the folder to the C/S.

Ending the session is totally up to the Auditor.

If the Auditor just doesn't complete an action that was
producing TA and could be completes it is of course a
flunk. Such a case is just not running a basic incident the
one more time through that would bring the TA down and give
a proper end phenomena. This and similar actions would be
an Auditor error.

The judgment here is whether or not the Auditor's action is
justified in ending the session.

Even though he may have made an error, the Auditor cannot
be blamed for the ending off of the session as that is
totally up to him. He can be given a flunk for the error.


AUDITING OVER OUT RUDS

Auditing a pc or pre- on something else whose ruds are out
is a MAJOR AUDITING ERROR.

Even if the C/S omits "Fly a Rud" or "Fly Ruds" this does
not justify the Auditor from auditing the pc over out ruds.

The Solo Auditor can do one of two things: He can fly all
ruds or he can return the folder and request ruds be flown.


INABILITY TO FLY RUDS

If an Auditor cannot get a rud to F/N, cannot get any rud
to F/N, he is to end the session and send the folder to the
C/S.

This is an expected action.

It is understood the Auditor would use Suppress and False
in trying to fly ruds.


SESSIONS FAR APART

When a pc has not had a session for some time, or when a pc
gets sessions days apart RUDS MUST BE FLOWN. Otherwise the
pc will get audited over out-ruds. This can develop mental
mass.

Optimum session scheduling is a whole Advanced Course done
in a block of sessions close together. This prevents the
world from throwing the pc's ruds out between sessions.

Giving sessions far apart barely keeps up with life. The
auditing time is absorbed in patching life up.

Rapid gain gets above life's annoyances and keeps the pc there.


UNREADING ITEMS

When an item the Solo Auditor has been told to run doesn't
read on the meter, even when the Auditor puts in Suppress
and Invalidate on it, the Auditor MUST NOT do anything with
the item no matter what the C/S said.

It is expected he will see if it reads and use Suppress and
Invalidate on it. And if it still doesn't read he will be
expected NOT to run it.


HIGH TA

When the Auditor sees the TA is high on 2 cans (out of
normal range) at session start yet the C/S says to "Fly a
Rud" the AUDITOR MUST NOT TRY TO FLY A RUD.

Trying to bring a TA down with ARC brks or ruds is very
hard on a pc as ARC Breaks aren't the reason TAs go up.

Seeing a high TA at start the Solo Auditor does not start
the session but sends the folder back to the C/S.


THINGS DONE TWICE

By carelessness the same process can be called for twice
and done twice or even more.

A Folder Summary inside the front cover must exist and must
be kept up.

Never neglect entering a session and what was run on the
Folder Summary (FS).


COPYS

Don't copy worksheets from notes.

Keep all admin neat and in the original form.

Copying makes errors possible.


RUDS GOING OUT

When the ruds go out during the session the Solo Auditor
recognizes the following; Pc Critical = W/H from Auditor

Pc Antagonistic = BPC in Session

No TA = Problem

Tired = Failed Purpose or No Sleep

Sad = ARC Break

Soaring TA = Overrun or Protest

Dope Off = By-Passed F/N or Not Enough Sleep

No Interest = Out ruds or No Interest in the First Place

A Solo Auditor who isn't sure what it is but runs into
trouble with the pc is smart to end off the session
quickly, writs down the full observation and get it to the C/S.

The Solo Auditor who is an old hand and knows what he is
looking at as per above scale (and the C/S the C/S would
give) handles it promptly.

Pc Critical = W/H = pull the W/H.

Pc antagonistic = BPC = assess proper list (such as L1C)
and handle.

No TA (or case gain) = Problem = locate the problem.

Tired = no sleep or failed purpose = check which it is and handle.

Sad = ARC Brk = locate and handle, Itsa earlier Itsa.

Soaring TA = O/R or Protest = find which and handle. Such
an O/R is usually by rehab.

Dope off = Lack of sleep or BP F/N = check on sleep, or Rehab F/N.

No Interest = no interest in first place or out ruds =
check for interest or put in ruds.

Ruds won't fly = some other error = send to C/S.

The Solo Auditor has no business trying to do the C/S given
when it collides with and isn't designed to handle any of
the above.


FALSE REPORTS

The vilest trick that can be played on his pc is for a Solo
Auditor to falsify an auditing report.

It may be thought to be "good Public Relations" (good PR)
for the auditor with the C/S.

Actually it buries an error and puts the pc at risk.

INTEGRITY is a hallmark of Dianetics and Scientology.

Just because psychiatrists were dishonest is no reason for
Auditors to be.

The results are there to be gotten.

False reports like false attests recoil and badly on both
the Auditor and pc.


"WHAT HE DID WRONG"

A Solo Auditor has a right to know what he did wrong in the
session that went wrong.

Most often a sour session occurs only when the rules and
data in this HCOB have been violated.

But an Auditor's TRs can go out or his handling of the
process is in error.

Not only does an Auditor have the right to be told what was
wrong but he must be given the exact HCOB, date and title,
that he violated.

Never take a verbal or written correction that is not in an
HCOB or tape.

Don't be party to a "hidden data line" that doesn't exist .

"You ruined the pc!" is not a valid statement. "You
violated HCOB______page ..." is the charge.

No Auditor may be disciplined for asking "May I please have
the tape or HCOB that was violated so I can read it or go
to Cramming."

If it isn't on a tape, a book or an HCOB IT IS NOT TRUE and
no Auditor has to accept any criticism that is not based on
the actual source data.

"If it isn't written it isn't true" is the best defense and
the best way to improve your tech.

These are the rights of the Solo Auditor with relation to a
C/S. They are all technical rights based on sound principles.

A Solo Auditor should know them and use them.

If a Solo Auditor stands on these rights and gets beaten
down he should put all the facts before his nearest OTL or
SO ship as something would be very wrong somewhere.

Solo Auditing is a happy business - when it is done right.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:nt
Copyright (c) 1971, 1975
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
026. HCOB 7 MAR 75 EXT AND ENDING SESSION


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 7 MARCH 1975

Remimeo


EXT AND ENDING SESSION


When a pc exteriorizes on a good win in session or if the
pc has a big win, usually followed by a persistent F/N, the
usual action is to end session.

When ending session in these circumstances the Auditor must
not do any other action, but smoothly end session.

This includes asking Say or Ask, running Havingness or
anything other than smoothly ending session.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.rd
Copyright (c) 1975
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
027. HCOB 10 APR 72 PREOTS DON'T C/S


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 10 APRIL 1972

A/Courses

(Cancels HCO B 31 July 71 Issue II
Corrected "Solo C/Sing")


URGENT

C/S Series 75
Solo C/S Series 13


PREOTS DON'T C/S


HCO 13 31 July 71 Issue Il Corrected required PreOTs to C/S
their folders for the next session.

I did not write this HCO B.

Research has proven that a Solo PreOT who is required by
any C/S to write a C/S for his next session can be put into
that next session action.

This C/Sing for himself his own next session violates the
"continued session rule" wherein an auditor does not
"finish" a session by telling the pc "the process will be
continued in the next session".

This puts the pc into continued sessions and in Solo can
put the PreOT from Solo auditing to self auditing. There is
a vast difference between the two. Solo auditing occurs in
session with a meter. Self auditing is out of session
wondering and chewing on bank.

A Solo PreOT must NOT self audit.

He ends the session he has done when he ends session on his
worksheet.

He then goes to Examiner and gets his exam. The Examiner
sends the completed Exam form to Solo Admin who puts it in
the folder.

The Solo C/S, then, from his study of the folder, does the
next C/S for the PreOT in proper C/S form. This is a
diagonal 2 green stripes on the left-hand corner of the
sheet, the PreOTs name and date in black. The C/S itself is
in black pen.

The PreOT takes this C/S and does it in his next session.

In rare instances when the PreOT is going really well, the
C/S permits him to do several sessions. The C/S can tell
from Exam forms that all is well. This MUST carry a notice
'Come in at once to the D of P if you cease to audit or run
into trouble. Do this C/ S in the next several sessions.
Come in for a new C/S the moment you feel this C/S is
complete and are ready for a new C/S."

When no Exam forms come in the Solo D of P chases the pc up.

If a Solo Exam form is bad the Examiner must mark it
"Urgent Attn Solo C/S." IN RED.

Solo Admin must alert the D of P who chases up the pc.

Tab is kept on ALL Solo pcs on lines by the D of P and if
one falls off lines the fact must be visible to the Solo D
of P who keeps a board on sessions with all PreOTs' names
on it!

The above is the correct C/Sing line.

The worst features of a PreOT doing his own C/Sing are

1. He is not a trained C/S.

2. Sudden ideas pop up he wants to handle instead of going
on and he gets into another action when he should keep going.

3. A PreOT can "rabbit" (run away from the bank) by
proposing a C/S that does not make him confront it.

4. And last but far from least, a "C/S" by a PreOT is an
invitation to the Solo Case Supervisor to Q and A with it.
(Q and A means to just repeat whatever another says as a
lazy way out.)

_____________

Pc + Auditor is greater than bank.

In Solo Auditing

C/S + PreOT is greater than bank.

_____________

PreOTs do NOT C/S their own folders !

_____________

THE PREOT DOES KEEP UP HIS SESSION SUMMARY EACH SESSION.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: mes.rd
Copyright (c)1972
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
028. HCOB 11 SEP 70 SOLO ASSISTS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 11 SEPTEMBER 1970

SHs
AOs Only
Solo C/S Hat
Adv Cses Super


SOLO ASSISTS


It is absolutely forbidden to assign 2-way comm actions as "Solo."

Example: An out-point lists an assessment list, listing for
items, 2WC on case etc.

PROGRESS AND ADVANCE ACTIONS may not be assigned by a Solo C/S to
be done Solo.

A Solo auditor may not do these actions.

Dianetics R3R may not be attempted in Solo auditing.

The reasons for this are too obvious to be given stress.

I have never seen a Solo auditor do anything but louse
himself up on these actions.

Here and there somebody might have gotten away with it. But
I have seen too many cases loused up this way to condone it
as anything but squirrel Solo.

A Solo auditor can fly ruds and engage in a BPC L1 or L7
WHILE AUDITING PROPER SOLO ACTIONS, and he can of course do 
the standard Solo actions for the grade.

But doing L7, L1B etc. as general REPAIR actions is for the
dickey birds.

There ARE NO SOLO REPAIR OR PROGRESS OR RETURN OR ADVANCE
PROGRAMS.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: rr
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
029. HCOB 11 AUG 78 MODEL SESSION


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 11 AUGUST 1978
Issue II

Remimeo
All Auditors

(Cancels BTB 18 Nov 68R, MODEL SESSION)


MODEL SESSION


(Note: If a Dianetic or Level 0, I, II auditor is not
trained in flying rudiments he would have to get a Level III 
(or above) auditor to fly the pc's ruds before starting the 
major action of the session.)


1. Setting Up for the Session

Prior to the session the auditor is to make sure the room
and session are set up, to ensure a smooth session with no
interruptions or distractions.

Use HCOB 4 December 1977, "Checklist for Setting Up
Sessions and An E-Meter," getting in every point of the
checklist.

The pc is seated in the chair furthest from the door. From
the time he is asked to pick up the cans he remains on the
meter until the end of the session.

When it is established there is no reason not to begin the
session the auditor starts the session.


2. Start of Session

The auditor says: "This is the session." (Tone 40)

If the needle is floating and the pc has VGIs, the auditor
goes directly into the major action of the session. If not,
the auditor must fly a rud.


3. Rudiments

Rudiments are handled per HCOB 11 August 1978, Issue I,
"Rudiments, Defini-tions and Patter."

(If the TA is high or low at session start, or if the
auditor cannot get a rud to fly, he ends off and sends the
pc folder to the C/S. A Class IV auditor (or above) may do
a Green Form or another type of correction list.)

When the pc has F/N, VGIs the auditor goes into the major
action of the session.


4. Major Action of the Session

a) R-Factor to the pc. The auditor informs the pc what is
going to be done in the session with:

"Now we are going to handle ."

b) Clearing commands. The commands of the process are
cleared per HCOB 9 August 1978 Issue Il, "Clearing Commands."

c) The process. The auditor runs the process or completes
the C/S instructions for the session to end phenomena.

In Dianetics, the end phenomena would be: F/N, erasure of
the chain, cognition, postulate (if not voiced in the
cognition) and VGIs.

In Scientology processes, the end phenomena is: F/N,
cognition, VGIs. The Power Processes have their own EP.


5. Havingness

When Havingness is indicated or included in the C/S
instructions, the auditor runs approximately 10 to 12
commands of the pc's Havingness Process to where the pc is
bright, F/Ning and in PT. (Note: Havingness is never run to
obscure or hide the fact of failure to F/N the main process
or an auditing or Confessional question.) (Ref: HCOB 7
August 78, "Havingness, Finding & Running The Pc's
Havingness Process.")


6. End of Session

a) When the auditor is ready to end the session he gives
the R-Factor that he will be ending the session.

b) Then he asks:

"Is there anything you would care to say or ask before I
end this session?" Pc answers.

Auditor acknowledges and notes down the answer.

c) If the pc asks a question, answer it if you can or
acknowledge and say, "I will note that down for the C/S."

d) Auditor ends the session with: "End of session." (Tone 40.)

(Note: The phrase "That's it" is incorrect for the purpose
of ending a session and is not used. The correct phrase is
"End of Session.")

_____________

Immediately after the end of session the auditor or a Page
takes the pc to the pc Examiner.

L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nc
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
030. HCOB 11 AUG 78 RUDIMENTS, DEFINITIONS AND PATTER


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 11 AUGUST 1978
Issue I

Remimeo
All Auditors


RUDIMENTS

DEFINITIONS AND PATTER


(Ref: HCOB 15 Aug 69, FLYING RUDS)

(NOTE: This Bulletin in no way summarizes all the data
there is to be known about ARC breaks, PTPs and missed
withholds, or handling rudiments.

There is a wealth of technology and data on these subjects
contained throughout the Technical Volumes and in Scientology 
books which the student auditor will need as he progresses up 
the levels.)


A rudiment is that which is used to get the pc in shape to
be audited in that session.

For auditing to take place at all the pc must be in session
which means: 

1. Willing to talk to the auditor

2. Interested in own case.

That is all you want to accomplish with rudiments. You want
to set up the case to run by getting the rudiments in, not
use the rudiments to run the case.

ARC breaks, present time problems and withholds all keep a
session from occur-ring.

It is elementary auditing knowledge that auditing over the
top of an ARC break can reduce a graph, hang the pc up in
sessions or worsen his case, and that in the presence of
PTPs, overts and missed withholds (a restimulated
undisclosed overt) no gains can occur.

Thus these are the rudiments we are most concerned with
getting in at the beginning of a session so that auditing
with gains can occur.


GETTING THE F/N

If you know bank structure you know it is necessary to find
an earlier item if something does not release.

If a rud doesn't F/N then there is an earlier (or an
earlier or an earlier) lock which is preventing it from F/Ning.

Thus we have the procedure and the rule:

IF A RUD READS YOU ALWAYS TAKE IT EARLIER SIMILAR UNTIL IT F/Ns.

The question used is:

"Is there an earlier similar (ARC break) or (problem) or
(missed withhold)?" If at the beginning of a session the
rudiments are in (the needle is floating and the pc is
VGls), the auditor goes directly into the major actions of
the session. If not, the auditor must fly a rud or ruds, as
ordered by the C/S.


ARC BREAKS

ARC: A word from the initial letters of Affinity, Reality
and Communication which together equate to Understanding.

ARC BREAK: A sudden drop or cutting of one's affinity,
reality or communication with someone or something. Upsets
with people or things come about because of a lessening or 
sundering of affinity, reality, communication or understanding.

While the earlier similar rule fully applies to ARC breaks,
there is an additional action taken in handling ARC breaks
that enables the pc to spot precisely what happened that
resulted in the upset.

An ARC break is called that - an "A-R-C break" - instead of an
upset because, if one discovers which of the three points
of understanding have been cut, one can bring about a rapid
recovery in the person's state of mind.

You never audit over the top of an ARC break. and you never
audit an ARC break itself; they cannot be audited. But they
can be assessed to locate which of the basic elements of
ARC the charge is on.

Thus to handle an ARC break you assess affinity, reality,
communication and understanding to find which of these
points the break occurred on.

Having determined that, you assess the item found (A or R
or C or U) against the Expanded CDEI Scale (curious.
desired, enforced, inhibited, no and refused). Ref: HCOB 13
Oct 59. DEI EXPANDED SCALE, Scientology 0-8. The Book of
Basics. and HCOB 18 Sep 67, corrected 4.4.74, SCALES.

With this assessment the actual bypassed charge can be
located and indicated even more accurately, thus enabling
the pc to blow it.

The assessment is done on every ARC break as you go earlier
similar until the rudiment is in with F/N and VGls.

The first rudiment question is:

1. "Do you have an ARC break ?"

2. If there is an ARC break, get the data on it briefly.

3. Find out by assessment which point the ARC break occurred on:

"Was that a break in Affinity ?

Reality ?

Communication ?

Understanding ?"

You assess it once and get the read (or the largest read)
on, say, communication.

4. Check it with the pc: "Was that a break in (communication)? 
If he says no, rehandle. If yes, let him tell you about it if 
he wishes. Then give it to him by indicating it, i.e. "I'd like 
to indicate that was a break in communication." 

PROVIDED THE RIGHT ITEM HAS BEEN GOTTEN, the pc will brighten
up, even if ever so slightly, on the very first assessment.

NOTE: On Step 4 the pc may originate: "Yes, I guess it was
communication but to me it's really more like a break in
reality," for example. The wise auditor then acknowledges
and indicates it was a break in "reality.''

5. Taking the item found in Step 4 above, assess it against
the CDEI Scale: "Was it:

Curious about (communication) ?
Desired " ?
Enforced " ?
Inhibited " ?
No " ?
Refused " ?"


6. As in Steps 3 and 4 above, assess it once. get the item
and check it with the pc: "Was it (desired) communication?"

If no, rehandle. If yes, indicate it.

7. If no F/N at this point you follow it earlier with the question:

"Is there an earlier similar ARC break?"

8. Get the earlier similar ARC break, get in ARCU, CDEINR,
indicate. If no F/ N, repeat Step 7, continuing to go
earlier, always using ARCU, CDEINR until you get an F/N.

When you get the F/N and VGls you have it.


PRESENT TIME PROBLEM

PROBLEM: A conflict arising from two opposing intentions.
It's one thing versus another thing; an
intention-counter-intention that worries the preclear.

PRESENT TIME PROBLEM: ... A special problem that exists in the 
physical universe now, on which the pc has his attention fixed.
.. Any set of circumstances that so engages the attention of 
the preclear that he feels he should be doing something about 
it instead of being audited.

A violation of "in session-ness" occurs when the pc's
attention is fixed on some concern that is "right now" in
the physical universe. The pc's attention is "over there"
not on his case. If the auditor overlooks and doesn't
handle the PTP then the pc is never in session, grows
agitated, ARC breaks. And no gains are made because he is
not in session.

The second rudiment question is:

1. "Do you have a present time problem?"

2. If there is a PTP, have the pc tell you about it.

3. If no F/N take it earlier with the question:

"Is there an earlier similar problem?"

4. Get the earlier problem and if no F/N, follow it earlier
similar, earlier similar, earlier similar to F/N.


MISSED WITHHOLDS

OVERT ACT: An intentionally committed harmful act committed
in an effort to solve a problem. ... an act of omission or 
commission which does the least good for the least number 
of dynamics or the most harm to the greatest number of dynamics.

That thing which you do which you aren't willing to have
happen to you.

WITHHOLD: An undisclosed harmful (contra-survival) act.
Something the pc did that he isn't talking about.

MISSED WITHHOLD: An undisclosed contra-survival act which
has been restimulated by another but not disclosed. This is
a withhold which another person nearly found out about, leaving 
the person with the withhold in a state of wondering whether 
his hidden deed is known or not.

The pc with a missed withhold will not be honestly "willing
to talk to the auditor" and, therefore, not in session
until the missed withhold is pulled.

Missing a withhold or not getting all of it is the sole
source of an ARC break. A missed withhold is observable by
any of the following: pc not making progress, pc critical
of, nattery or angry at the auditor, refusing to talk to
the auditor, not desirous of being audited, boiling off,
exhausted, foggy at session end, dropped havingness,
telling others the auditor is no good, demanding redress of
wrongs, critical of Scientology or organi-zations or people
of Scientology, lack of auditing results, dissemination
failures. (Ref: HCOB 3 May 62, ARC BREAKS, MISSED WITHHOLDS.) 
The auditor must not overlook any manifestations of a missed 
withhold.

Thus, if the pc has a missed withhold you get it, get all
of it using the system described below, and use the same
system on each earlier similar missed withhold until you
get the F/N.

The third rudiment question is:

1. "Has a withhold been missed?"

2. If you get a missed withhold, find out:

(a) What was it?

(b) When was it?

(c) Is that all of the withhold?

(d) WHO missed it?

(e) What did (he/she) do to make you wonder whether or not (he/she)
knew?

(f) Who else missed it? (Repeat (e) above).

Get another and another who missed it, using the Suppress
button as neces-sary, and repeating (e) above.

3. Clean it to F/N, or if no F/N take it earlier similar
with the question: "Is there an earlier similar missed
withhold?"

4. Handle each earlier similar missed withhold you get per
Step 2 above, until you get an F/N.


SUPPRESS

If a rudiment doesn't read and is not F/Ning, put in the
Suppress button, using: "On the question 'Do you have an
ARC break?' has anything been suppressed?" If it reads,
take it and ask ARCU, CDEINR, earlier similar, etc.

Use Suppress in the same way for non-reading PTP and missed
withhold rudiments.


FALSE

If the pc protests, comments. or seems bewildered put in
the False button. The question used is:

"Has anyone said you had a_____when you didn't have one?"
Get who, what, when and take it earlier, if necessary, to F/N.


END PHENOMENA

In ruds when you've got your F/N and that charge has moved
off, indicate it. Don't push the pc on for some other "EP."

When the pc F/Ns with VGls, you've got it.


HIGH OR LOW TA

Never try to fly ruds on a high or low TA.

Seeing a high or low TA at session start, the Dianetic or
Scientology auditor up to Class II does not start the
session but sends the folder back to the C/S for a higher
classed auditor to handle. The C/S will order the required
correction list to be done by an auditor Class III or above.


REFERENCES:

HCOB 15 Aug 69 FLYING RUDS
HCOB 13 Oct 59 DEI EXPANDED SCALE
HCOB 18 Sep 67 SCALES
HCOB 7 Sep 64II ALL LEVELS, PTPS, OVERTS AND ARC BREAKS
HCOB 12 Feb 62 HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS & MISSED WITHHOLDS
HCOB 31 Mar 60 THE PRESENT TIME PROBLEM
HCOB 14 Mar 71R F/N EVERYTHING
HCOB 23 Aug 71 C/S Series I AUDITOR'S RIGHTS
HCOB 21 Mar 74 END PHENOMENA
HCOB 22 Feb 62 WITHHOLDS, MISSED & PARTIAL
HCOB 3 May 62 ARC BREAKS, MISSED WITHHOLDS

The above issues give further data on rudiments, ARC
breaks, PTPs and missed withholds. Note, however, that this
is not a complete list of references on the subject.

There is much additional data to be found in the Technical Volumes.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:dr
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
031. HCOB 12 FEB 62 HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS AND MISSED WITHHOLDS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 12 FEBRUARY 1962

Sthil
CenOCon
Franchise


HOW TO CLEAR WITHHOLDS AND MISSED WITHHOLDS


I have finally reduced clearing withholds to a rote formula
which contains all the basic elements necessary to obtain a
high case gain without missing any withholds.

These steps now become THE way to clear a withhold or
missed withhold.


AUDITOR OBJECTIVE

The Auditor's object is to get the pc to look so that the
pc can tell the auditor.

The auditor's objective is not to get the pc to tell the
auditor. If the pc is in session the pc will talk to the
auditor. If the pc is not in session, the pc won't tell the
auditor a withhold. I never have any trouble getting the pc
to tell me a withhold. I sometimes have trouble getting the
pc to find out about a withhold so the pc can tell it to
me. If the pc will not tell the auditor a withhold (and the
pc knows it) the remedy is rudiments. I always assume, and
correctly, that if the pc knows about it the pc will tell
me. My job is to get the pc to find out so the pc has
something to tell me. The chief auditor blunder in pulling
withholds stems from the auditor assuming the pc already
knows when the pc does not.

If used exactly, this system will let the pc find out and
let the pc get all the charge off of a withhold as well as
tell the auditor all about it.

Missing a withhold or not getting all of it is the sole
source of ARC break.

Get a reality on this now. All trouble you have or have
ever had or will ever have with ARC breaky pcs stems only
and wholly from having restimulated a withhold and yet
having failed to pull it. The pc never forgives this. This
system steers you around the rock of missed withholds and
their bombastic consequences.


WITHHOLD SYSTEM

This system has five parts:

0. The Difficulty being handled.

1. What the withhold is.

2. When the withhold occurred.

3. All of the withhold.

4. Who should have known about it.

Numbers (2) (3) and (4) are repeated over and over, each
time testing (1) until (1) no longer reacts.

(2) (3) and (4) clear (1). (1) straightens out in part (0).
(0) is cleaned up by finding many (1)'s and (1) is
straightened up by running (2) (3) and (4) many times.

These steps are called (0) Difficulty, (1) What (2) When
(3) All (4) Who. The auditor must memorize these as What,
When, All and Who. The order is never varied. The questions
are asked one after the other. None of them are repetitive
questions.


USE A MARK IV

The whole operation is done on a Mark IV. Use no other
meter as other meters may read right electronically without
reading mental reactions well enough.

Do this whole system and all questions at sensitivity 16.


THE QUESTIONS

0. The suitable question concerning the Difficulty the pc
is having. Meter reads.

1. What. "What are you withholding about ...............?"
(the Difficulty) (or as given in future issues).

Meter reads. Pc answers with a w/h, large or small.

2. When. "When did that occur?" or "When did that happen?"
or "What was the time of that?"

Meter reads. Auditor can date in a generality or precisely
on meter. A

generality is best at first, a precise dating on the meter
is used later in this sequence on the same w/h.

3. All. "Is that all of that?" Meter reads. Pc answers.

4. Who. "Who should have known about that?" or "Who didn't
find out about that?" Meter reads. Pc answers.

Now test (1) with the same question that got a read the
first time. (The question for (1) is never varied on the
same w/h.)

If needle still reads ask (2) again, then (3), then (4),
getting as much data as possible on each. Then test (1) 
again. (1) is only tested, never worked over except by 
using (2), (3) and (4).

Continue this rotation until (I) clears on needle and thus
no longer reacts on a test.

Treat every withhold you find (or have found) in this
fashion always.


SUMMARY

You are looking at a preview of PREPARATORY TO CLEARING.
"Prepclearing" for short. Abandon all further reference to 
security checking or sec checking. The task of the auditor 
in Prepclearing is to prepare a pc's rudiments so that they
can't go out during 3D Criss Cross.

The value of Prepclearing in case gain, is greater than any
previous Class I or Class II auditing.

We have just risen well above Security Checking in ease of
auditing and in case gains.

You will shortly have the ten Prepclearing lists which give
you the (0) and (1) questions. Meanwhile, treat every
withhold you find in the above fashion for the sake of the
preclear, for your sake as an auditor and for the sake of
the good name of Scientology.

(Note: To practice with this system, take a withhold a pc
has given several times to you or you and other auditors.
Treat the question that originally got it as (I) and clean
it as above in this system. You will be amazed.)

L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:sf.cden
Copyright (c)1962
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
032. HCOB 15 AUG 69 FLYING RUDS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 15 AUGUST 1969

Remimeo
Class VIII Chksht
Cse Supervisors
Class VIIIs


FLYING RUDS


To clarify how to fly ruds:

If a rud reads, you get the data and then ask for earlier
until you get an F/N.

If a rud doesn't read, put in Suppress and recheck. If it
gets any comment, natter or protest or bewilderment, put in
False and clean it.

To fly all ruds you ask for an ARC Brk, if no read, put in
Suppress If it reads take it, do ARCU CDEI Earlier ARCU
CDEI Earlier until you get an F/N. Then do the same with
PTP. Then with MW/Hs.

If in starting a rud does not read or F/N even if Suppress
is put in go to the next rud until you get one that does
read. Follow it earlier to F/N.

Then F/N the 2 that didn't read.


INCORRECT

To get a rud reading with or without Suppress and then fail
to follow it earlier and to continue to call it and take
only reads is incorrect.


CORRECT

If a rud reads you always follow it earlier until it F/Ns.

You do NOT continue to test it with a meter and do NOT
leave it just because it fails to read again.

If a rud reads you clean it with earlier, earlier, earlier to F/N.

If a rud reads and the read is false you clean false.

_____________

There are TWO actions possible in flying ruds.

1. The rud is not out. If it didn't read you check
suppress. If it read but is in any way protested you clean
false.

2. The rud is out. You get the data, you follow it earlier
earlier until it F/Ns. You do not continue to check it for
reads.


GREEN FORM

This applies also to handling ruds on the Green Form.


ARC BREAK

If there is an ARC Break you get it, use ARCU and CDEI,
indicate, then if no F/N you follow it earlier, get ARCU
CDEI, indicate, if no F/N you get an earlier one on and on,
always with ARCU CDEI until you get an F/N.


PTP

If you get a PTP you follow it earlier earlier earlier
until you get an F/N.


MISSED WITHHOLD

If you get a withhold you find out WHO missed it, then
another and another using Suppress. If protest you put in
false. You will find these W/Hs also go earlier like any
other chain but they don't have to.


MIXING METHODS

If you get a rud read and the pc gives you one you don't
then check the read again.

You get more until you get an F/N.

To get a rud answered and then check suppress and its read
is mixing l and 2 above.


FALSE

"Has anyone said you had awhen you didn't have one?" is the
answer to pro-tested ruds.

_____________

Any VIII should be able to fly any rud at will. The above
clarifies HCOB and Tape data on this subject.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: Idm.ei.rd
Copyright (c) 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
033. HCOB 6 SEP 68 CHECKING FOR FALSE READS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 6 SEPTEMBER 1968

Class VIII

CHECKING FOR FALSE READS


When you check for earlier auditor false reads on a GF or 
rudiment type read:

When follow-up of the read seems to bog down, get nowhere and
when pc has no answers.

When the pc protests, seems ARC Broken by the read or seems
resigned.

When the pc starts to explain how the thing has been run before.

When there is protest or inval.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jp.ts
Copyright $c 1968
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
034. HCOB 27 MAY 70R r. 3 Dec 78 UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 27 MAY 1970R
REVISED 3 DECEMBER 1978

Remimeo

(Revisions in this type style)


UNREADING QUESTIONS AND ITEMS


Reference: HCOB 3 Dec 78 UNREADING FLOWS

Never list a listing question that doesn't read.

Never prepcheck an item that doesn't read.

These rules hold good for all lists, all items, all flows,
including Dianetics.

A "tick" or a "stop" is not a read. Reads are small falls
or falls or long falls or long fall blowdown (of TA).

A preclear's case can be gotten into serious trouble by
listing a list that doesn't read or prepchecking an item
that doesn't read or running an item or flow that doesn't read.

On a list, this is the sort of thing that happens:

The list is "Who or what would fly kites?" The C/S has said
to "List this to a BD F/ N item." So the auditor does list
it without checking the read at all. The list can go on 99
pages with the pc protesting, getting upset. This is called
a "Dead horse list" because it gave no item. The reason it
didn't was that the list question itself didn't read. One
does an L4BRA on the pc to correct the situation and gets
"unnecessary action." On a list that is getting no item you
don't extend. You correctly use L4BRA or any subsequent
issue of it. If you extend a "dead horse list" you just
make things worse. Use an L4BRA and it will set it right.

This weird thing can also happen. C/S says to list "Who or
what would kill buffaloes?" The auditor does, gets a BD F/N
item "A hunter." The C/S also says to list as a second
action "Who or what would feel tough?" The auditor fails to
test the question for read and lists it. Had he tested it,
the list would not have read. But the list comes up with an
item, "A mean hunter." It has stirred up charge from the
first question and the item "A mean hunter" is a wrong item
as it is a misworded variation of the first list's item!
Now we have an unnecessary action and a wrong item. We do
an L4BRA and the pc is still upset as maybe only one or the
other of the two errors read.

In a Dianetic "list" one is not doing a listing action. One
is only trying to find a somatic or sensation, etc. that
will run. The item must read well. Or it won't produce a
chain to run. In actual fact the Dn list Q does usually
read but one doesn't bother to test it.

But an item or flow that doesn't read will produce no
chain, no basic and the pc will jump around the track
trying but just jamming up his bank.

_____________

The moral of this story is:

ALWAYS TEST A LISTING QUESTION BEFORE LETTING THE PC LIST.

ALWAYS MARK THE READ IT GAVE (SF, F, LF, LFBD) ON THE
WORKSHEET .

ALWAYS TEST AN ITEM FOR READ BEFORE PREPCHECKING AND
ALWAYS CHECK AN ITEM AND FLOW BEFORE RUNNING RECALLS OR
ENGRAMS .

ALWAYS MARK THE READ AN ITEM GAVE (SF, F, LF, LFBD) ON THE
WORKSHEET.


CHARGE

The whole subject of "charge" is based on this. "Charge" is
the electrical impulse on the case that activates the meter.

"Charge" shows not only that an area has something in it.
It also shows that the pc has possible reality on it.

A pc can have a broken leg, yet it might not read on a
meter. It would be charged but below the pc's reality. So
it won't read.


THINGS THAT DON'T READ WON'T RUN.

The Case Supervisor always counts on the AUDITOR to test
questions and items and flows for read before running them.

The auditor, when a question or item or flow doesn't read,
can and should always put in "Suppress" and "Invalidate."
"On this (question) (item) (flow), has anything been
suppressed?" "On this (question) (item) (flow), has
anything been invalidated?" If either one read, the
question or item or flow will also read. The Case
Supervisor also counts on the AUDITOR to use Suppress and
Invalidate on a question or item or flow. If after this
there is still no read on the question or item or flow,
that's it. Don't use it, don't list it. Go to the next
action on the C/S or end off.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:dz.ka.rd.jk 
Copyright (c) 1970, 1978 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
035. HCOB 14 MAR 71R r. 25 Jul 73 F/N EVERYTHING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 14 MARCH 1971 R
CORRECTED & REISSUED 25 JULY 1973

(Only change being word "by" in para 4 changed to "but".)

Remimeo
All Levels


F/N EVERYTHING


Whenever an auditor gets a read on an item from Ruds or a
prepared list (L1B, L3A, L4B, etc., etc.) IT MUST BE
CARRIED TO AN F/N.

To fail to do so is to leave the pc with by-passed charge.

When a pc has had several reads on various lists which were
none of them carried to F/N, it can occur that he will
become upset or depressed without any other apparent
reason. As one has DONE the lists without F/Ning each item,
one now has the mystery of what is wrong?

The error is reading items from Ruds or prepared lists
cleaned to no read but not carried to F/N.

This action (amongst many such refinements) is what makes
Flag auditing so smooth and indeed makes it Flag Auditing.

When an auditor first tries this he may well think it is
impossible.

Yet it is simplicity itself. If you know bank structure you
know it is necessary to find an earlier item if something
does not release. What has been found as a read on a
prepared list would F/N if it were the basic lock. So if it
doesn't F/N, then there is an earlier (or an earlier or an
earlier) lock which is preventing it from F/Ning.

So the RULE:

NEVER WALK OFF FROM A READING ITEM ON A RUDIMENT OR A
PREPARED REPAIR LIST BEFORE YOU CARRY IT DOWN (EARLIER SIMILAR)
TO AN F/N.

Example: ARC Brk reads. Pc says what it is, Auditor does
ARCU CDEI. If no F/ N, Auditor asks for an earlier similar
ARC Brk, gets it, ARCU CDEI, etc. until he gets an F/N.

Example: PTP reads. Carry it E/S (earlier similar) until a
PTP F/Ns.

Example: L4B: Has an item been denied you? Reads. Answered.
No F/N. Is there an earlier similar denied item? Answered.
F/N. Go on to next reading item on the list.

Example: GF assessed once through for reads. The next C/S
must take every item on it that read, by 2wc or other process, 
to an F/N.

So there is a much more general rule:

EVERY ITEM THAT READS MUST F/N.

In Dianetics you get the F/N when you run E/S secondaries
or engrams to an erasure, F/N, Cog, VGIs.

In Rudiments, every out rud you get a read on is run E/S to F/N.

On a prepared list you take each read to an F/N or E/S to F/N.

On an LX list you run each flow chain to an F/N.

On GF you get by whatever process an F/N.

On Listing by the Laws of Listing and Nulling, your
eventual item listed must F/N.

So another rule:

EVERY MAJOR AND MINOR ACTION MUST BE CARRIED TO AN F/N.

There are NO exceptions.

Any exception leaves by-passed charge on the pc.

Also, every F/N is indicated at the conclusion of the
action when cog is obtained.

You take too soon an F/N (first twitch) you cut the
cognition and leave by-passed charge (a withheld cognition).

_____________

I could take any folder and simply write out the ruds and
prepared list reading items and then audit the pc and carry
each one to F/N and correct every list so disclosed and
wind up with a very shining, cool calm pc.

So "Have reading items been left charged?" would be a key
question on a case.

_____________

Using lists or ruds on high or low TAs that are not meant
for high or low TAs will get you reading items that won't F/N.

So, another rule:

NEVER TRY TO FLY RUDS OR DO L1B ON A HIGH OR LOW TA.

One can talk the TA down (see HCO B on Talking the TA Down).

Or one can assess L4B.

About the only prepared lists one can assess are the new
Hi-Lo TA HCO B 13 Mar 71 and possibly a GF+40 once through
for biggest read. The biggest read will have a blowdown on
it and can possibly be brought to F/N. If this occurs then
one also handles all other items that read.

_____________

The most frequent errors in all this are:

Not taking a read earlier similar but just checking it and
leaving it as "clean".

Not using suppress and false on items.

And of course leaving a pc thinking things are still
charged by failing to indicate the F/N.

Indicating an F/N before Cog.

Not going back through the folder to handle ruds and items
that read but were called "clean" or were simply abandoned.

A pc audited under tension of poor TRs has a hard time and
does not F/N sometimes, inviting overrun.

The rules then to happy pcs are:

GOOD TRs.

F/N EVERYTHING FOUND ON RUDS AND LISTS.

AUDIT WITH TA IN NORMAL RANGE OR REPAIR IT SO IT IS IN NORMAL
RANGE.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:mes.nt.rd
Copyright (c) 1971, 1973
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
036. HCOB 11 MAY 69R r. 8 Jul 78 METER TRIM CHECK


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor. East. Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 11 MAY 1969R
REVISED 8 JULY 1978
(Revisions in this type style)
(Replaces HCOB of 27 July 1966 same name )

Remimeo 
All Orgs
Exec Secs
Qual Sec 
All Tech Hats 
All Qual Hats
Dianetic Course 

(Tech Div) (Qual Div)


METER TRIM CHECK


E-Meters can go out of trim during a session because of
temperature changes.

Thus even if the meter is properly calibrated and reads at
2.0 with a 5,000 ohm resistor across the leads and 3.0 with
12 500 ohms by the end of the session a pc can be
apparently reading below 2.0 because the meter is off trim.

The following meter procedure is therefore to be followed
AT THE END OF EACH SESSION (AFTER GIVING "END OF SESSION."):

1. DON'T MOVE THE TRIM KNOB

2. PULL OUT THE JACK PLUG

3. MOVE THE TA UNTIL THE NEEDLE IS ON 'SET' AT THE SENSITIVITY
YOU WERE USING IN THE SESSION

4. RECORD THE TA POSITION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE AUDITOR'S
REPORT FORM AS:

"Trim check - TA = ...."

5. IF YOUR METER IS KNOWN TO BE OUT OF CALIBRATION (as in para
2 above) RECORD ALSO: "Calibration error ..... on meter =
2.0 actual" at the bottom of the form.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:lb-r.cs.an.ei.cden.nc
Copyright (c) 1969 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED



========================
_


FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 4 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

[full contents in part 1]

Part 4/7

037. HCOPL 21 FEB 79 r. 6 May 79 E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET
038. HCOB 7 FEB 79R r. 15 Feb 79 E-METER DRILL 5RA CAN SQUEEZE
039. HCOB 21 JAN 77RB r. 25 May 80 FALSE TA CHECKLIST
040. HCOB 3 SEP 78 DEFINITION OF A ROCK SLAM
041. BTB 14 JAN 63 r. 25 Jul 74 RINGS CAUSING "ROCK SLAMS"
042. HCOB 21 JUL 78 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE?
043. HCOB 21 SEP 66 ARC BREAK NEEDLE
044. HCOB 10 DEC 76RB r. 25 May 80 SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
045. HCOB 2 DEC 80 FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION MODIFIED
046. HCOB 20 FEB 70 FLOATING NEEDLES AND END PHENOMENA


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

037. HCOPL 21 FEB 79 r. 6 May 79 E-METER ESSENTIALS ERRATA SHEET


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East. Sussex

HCO POLICY LETTER OF 21 FEBRUARY 1979
CORRECTED & REISSUED 26 APRIL 1979
CORRECTED & REISSUED 6 MAY 1979

Tech
Qual
All Auditors
E-Meter Checksheets


E-METER ESSENTIALS

ERRATA SHEET


The following corrections are to be made in E-METER ESSENTIALS:

RE: THE TONE ARM:

Page 9, Section 10:

Delete: "no matter what the preclear says."

Add: "until the EP of that process is reached."

The whole section now reads: "If the Tone Arm shows motion,
continue the process, until the EP of that process is reached."

Page 10, Section 12:

Delete: "is a breach of the Auditor's Code Clause 13. Also
to continue a process that is producing no Tone Arm motion
is a breach of the same Clause." Add: "will leave the pc
with By-Passed Charge. The process should be continued to the 
EP of that process."

The whole section now reads: "To change a process while the
Tone Arm shows good motion will leave the pc with By-Passed Charge.
The process should be continued to the EP of that process."


RE: THE SENSITIVITY KNOB:

Page 13, Section 5:

Delete: "Have the preclear hold the electrodes comfortably
in his hands. Have him tighten his hands and then relax
them, still holding the cans. The needle should drop
exactly one-third of a dial. Adjust the sensitivity knob by
asking the preclear to squeeze the cans again and observing
the needle fall."

The whole section is substituted with the following: "The
exact setting of the sensitivity knob is done as follows:
Have the preclear hold the electrodes (cans) in his hands
with the cans in contact with the cups of his palms and all
his fingers and both thumbs in a comfortable grip. Set the
sensitivity at 5 and adjust the position of the needle to
set. Have the preclear squeeze the cans with an even
gradual pressure, not a sudden hard squeeze. Watch the
distance the needle drops. If the distance the needle fell
is less than one-third of a dial drop, raise the
sensitivity some and get another can squeeze, continuing this
procedure till you've got the sensitivity setting that
gives you one third dial drop on the can squeeze. If the
can squeeze gave you more than one-third dial drop at Sens.
5, lower the sensitivity setting a bit, test another can
squeeze, continuing this procedure till you get one-third
of a dial drop.

In other words, keep adjusting your sensitivity lower or
higher according to whether the drop is more or less than
one-third of a dial drop, until you get the correct
sensitivity setting."

Page 13, Section 7:

Delete. "Adjust the knob to a still needle that will yet
move on needed responses."

Add: "Adjust the sensitivity knob to get a third of a dial
drop on the can squeeze, or as close to that as you can."

The whole section now reads: "In short, adjust the
sensitivity knob to get a third of a dial drop on the can
squeeze, or as close to that as you can." 


RE: THE NEEDLE:

Page 14. Section 4:

Delete: "A fall always happens with rapidity, within a
second or two."

Add: "A fall always happens at the exact end of the
question asked."

The whole section now reads: "A falling needle (3) makes a
dip to the right as you face the meter. A fall may consist
of half a division (about one-eighth of an inch) or may
consist of fifteen dials (the whole meter face dropped
fifteen times). It is still a fall. A fall always happens
at the exact end of the question asked. It is also called a
drop, a dip and a register. It denotes that a disagreement
with life on which the preclear has greater or lesser
reality has met the question asked."

Page 15. Section 9:

Delete: "upon the question being asked. A fall can be in
two stages or more providing they take place within a
second or two after the question."

Add. "at the end of the last word of the question asked."

The whole section now reads: "A fall follows at once at the
end of the last word of the question asked."


RE: CHANGE OF CHARACTERISTIC:

Page 15 Section 17:

Delete: "we must assume that that is it and we use it."

Add: "it can be further explored with the suppress and
invalidate buttons to see if it develops into a sF, F, LF
or BD, which then can be used."

The whole section now reads: "Change of characteristic
occurs when we hit on something in the preclear's bank. It
occurs only when and each time that we ask that exact
question. As the question or item alone changes the needle
pattern, it can be further explored with the suppress and
invalidate buttons to see if it develops into a sF, F, LF
or BD, which then can be used."

Page 15, Section 18:

Delete. "usually".

Add: "may".

The whole section now reads: "A question that stops a
rising needle is a change of characteristic question and
like a fall means we have struck something.

Further exploration may develop it into a fall."

Page 16, Section 21:

Delete: "within one tenth to one half of a second after you
have asked a question of the preclear."

Add: "An instant read is defined as that reaction of the
needle which occurs at the precise end of any major thought
voiced by the auditor."

The whole section )70W reads: "It is not much used but must
be known as it may have to be used sooner or later when we
can't get falls.

"The only needle reactions in which you should be
interested are those which occur INSTANTLY. An instant read
is defined as that reaction of the needle which occurs at
the precise end of any major thought voiced by the auditor."


RE: ROCK SLAMS:

Page 17, Section 35. ROCK SLAM (7):

Delete: "This originally meant (and still does) that you
are on the rock chain."

Add: "A Rock Slam means a hidden Evil Intention on the
subject or question under discussion or auditing."

The whole section now reads: "In assessing or running you
occasionally get a Rock Slam. A Rock Slam means a hidden
Evil Intention on the subject or question under discussion
or auditing."

Page 17, Section 36:

Delete: "A Rock Slam is a crazy, irregular, unequal, jerky
motion of the needle, narrow as one inch or as wide as
three inches happening several times a second. The needle
'goes crazy', slamming back and forth, narrowly,
widely, over on the left, over on the right, in a mad war
dance or as if it were frantically trying to escape. It
means hot terminal or hot anything in an assessment and
takes precedence over a fall."

The entire section is replaced with: "A Rock Slam is a
crazy, irregular, left right slashing motion of the needle.
It repeats left and right slashes unevenly and savagely,
faster than the eye easily follows. The needle is frantic.
The width of a Rock Slam (R/S) depends largely on
sensitivity setting. It goes from one-fourth inch to whole
dial. But it slams back and forth. It means hot item in an
assessment and takes precedence over a fall or it means
that you have left rings on the pc's hands or have a loose
connection in the leads or meter. If the latter two items
verify as not present you are looking at a Rock Slam in the
pc." 


RE: FREE NEEDLES:

Page 17, Section 41:

Delete: "It means an idle, uninfluenced motion, no matter
what you say about the goal or terminal. It isn't just
null, it's uninfluenced by anything (except body reactions)."

The entire section is replaced by: "It means the same as a
Floating Needle, which is a rhythmic sweep of the dial at a
slow, even pace of the needle, back and forth, back and
forth, without change in the width of the swing except
perhaps to widen as the pc gets off the last small bits of
charge. Note that it can get so wide that you have to shift
the Tone Arm back and forth, back and forth, to keep the
needle on the dial in which case you have a floating tone
arm." 

Page 18, Section 44:

Delete: "It doesn't happen until a person is well above
release, so don't worry about it until you see it."

The whole section is replaced with: "It can occur after a
cognition, blowdown of the Tone Arm, at a release point, or
on the erasure of a Dianetic chain." 

Page 18, Section 46:

Delete: "A Free Needle means, when it's used as a term,
'The preclear is getting awful close to clear."

The whole section is replaced with: "A Free Needle or
Floating Needle is one of the parts of the End Phenomena
for any process or action."


RE: SECURITY CHECKING:

Page 21, Section 3:

Delete: "(b) it's in a past life and he doesn't consciously
know about it (since the meter precedes preclear
consciousness)."

The entire line is replaced with: "(b) there's an earlier
similar overt or withhold. "

Page 22, Section 5:

Delete: "In the case of a past life possibility you add,
'In this lifetime' to your security question. As you repeat
that, if the misdeed was in a past life. the fall will vanish."

The whole section is replaced with: "In the case of (b)
when there's an earlier similar overt or withhold, you must
ask for it and get it."

Page 22, Section 7:

Delete. "always (as in all Rudiments) ask the question
again as this might not be all of it."

Add: "you get all the data and handle it earlier similar
withhold as necessary to an F/N."

The whole section now reads: "If the preclear tells you a
withhold, you get all the data and handle it earlier
similar withhold as necessary to an F/N." Page 22, Section 9:

Delete: "On a security check sheet, follow up every change
of characteristic before you go on."

Add: "On a security check, follow up every change of
characteristic, if it is instant, before you go on."

The whole section now reads: "On a security check, follow
up every change of characteristic, if it is instant, before
you go on. Change of characteristic, if it amounts to
anything, will develop into a fall."

Page 22, Section 10.

Delete. "(or it's a past life)".

Add: "or there's an earlier similar overt or withhold"

The whole section now reads: "If the preclear hasn't told
all or there's an earlier similar overt or withhold, the
meter won't clear."

Page 22, Section 14:

No deletions.

Add: "except when it's a false read which can be checked for."

The whole section now reads: "Grim experience of a decade
has taught me that it's (a) or (b) and never 'I moved the
needle myself' or 'I feel nervous just generally'. The
E-Meter is right even when it seems to make the preclear
wrong, except when it's a false read which can be checked for."


RE: METER FRAILTIES:

Page 25. Section 7:

Delete: "if that doesn't stop it, squirt some lighter fluid
into the Tone Arm 'bearing' from the meter face side."

Add: "including the Mark V until February 1979".

The entire section now reads: "One exception: The British
and American Hubbard Electrometer early models including the 
Mark V until February 1979 had a 'carbon pot' which is to say 
the Tone Arm was in 'pure carbon bearings', if you could call 
it that. A speck of dust can get in the 'pot' and cause the 
needle to rock slam whether connected to the preclear or not. 
Pull the lead wire jack (disconnecting cans) and if the slam
continues, it's the 'pot' that's wrong. Work the Tone Arm
vigorously for a short while. If that doesn't stop it, turn
it in to be repaired. Later models of the British and
American Hubbard Electrometer have 'wire wound pots' and
this doesn't happen."


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: jk
Copyright (c) 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
038. HCOB 7 FEB 79R r. 15 Feb 79 E-METER DRILL 5RA CAN SQUEEZE


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 7 FEBRUARY 1979R
CORRECTED & REISSUED 12 FEBRUARY 1979
REVISED 15 FEBRUARY 1979

Remimeo
OK to opperate E-Meter Checksheet
All Auditors
Tech
Qual
C/Ses
Cramming Officers


E-METER DRILL 5RA

CAN SQUEEZE


The following E-Meter Drill immediately revises and
replaces E-Meter Drill 5, as it appears in The Book of
E-Meter Drills and modifies any data to the contrary in
E-Meter Essentials.


NUMBER: EM-5RA

NAME: CAN SQUEEZE

PURPOSE:

I. To demonstrate to the student how an incorrect can
squeeze gives an inaccurate, unreliable needle reaction.

II. To train a student auditor how to get a pc to do an
accurate can squeeze.

III. To train a student auditor how to determine the
sensitivity setting to get 1/3 of a dial drop of the needle
on the can squeeze, for use in setting the correct
sensitivity for each preclear in an auditing session.

IV. To convince a student auditor that he has to use a
correct sensitivity setting for 1/3 of a dial drop of the
can squeeze to have a workable and readable E-Meter.

POSITION: The coach and the student auditor sit facing each
other across a table with an E-Meter facing the student
auditor. The E-Meter is already set up.

TRAINING STRESS:

SECTION 1: To give the student auditor a reality on how a
can squeeze can be done incorrectly. so he will know all
the points he may have to correct to ensure he gets an
accurate can squeeze.

1. Coach picks up the cans and holds his hands on the table
so the student can clearly see them.

2. Coach has student set sensitivity booster knob to lowest
position and the sensitivity at 1 on the sensitivity knob.

3. Coach has student adjust the needle to the set line on
the needle dial.

The coach will have the student readjust the needle to set
as necessary as the beginning of each demonstration of the
can squeeze.

4. The coach gives the cans a squeeze with an even
pressure. If there is no read or a very small one, less
than an inch, at sensitivity 1, the student auditor moves
the sensitivity knob to 5, and gets another can squeeze. If
still no read or it's smaller than an inch, student moves
sensitivity to 16 and gets another squeeze. For purposes of
the following demonstration, you want to set the
sensitivity so that you can obviously see a movement of the
needle on the can squeeze of about an inch. So the
sensitivity could be set lower than 5 or higher than 5, so
long as you get a fall of about an inch on the squeeze.

5. With the sensitivity setting determined in 4 above, the
coach will then squeeze the cans incorrectly, each time in
a different way. The coach shows the student what
particular thing he's doing with his hands, and then has
the student observe what happens on the meter and the
distance the needle falls on the dial when he does each
version of an incorrect can squeeze as follows:

A. Coach holds the cans with cups of palms and all fingers
and both thumbs in complete contact with the cans. As he
squeezes the cans, he lifts one finger off and then puts
the finger back on after relaxing the squeeze. This is an
incorrect can squeeze.

B. Coach holds the cans as in A. This time he gives the
cans a very fast light squeeze.

This is an incorrect can squeeze.

C. Coach holds the cans as in A, squeezes them with a
gradual pressure and then when he releases the squeeze he
relaxes his grip on the cans so it is much looser than
before the can squeeze. This is an incorrect can squeeze.

D. Coach holds the cans as in A, and this time gives a hard
fast squeeze. This is an incorrect can squeeze.

E. Coach holds the cans as in A, squeezes them firmly and
only partially releases the squeeze. This is an incorrect
can squeeze.

F. Coach holds the cans as in A, but gives a squeeze in 2
stages, first a little squeeze, then suddenly a harder one.
This is an incorrect can squeeze.

G. Coach holds the cans as in A, gives a hard fast squeeze,
and holds the grip. The student should notice that the
needle swings way over to the right due to the sudden
motion, and that it returns only part of the way with the
coach still maintaining the squeeze, thus giving an
incorrect measurement of the can squeeze. Student should
see that the distance between the first needle position at
set and the final needle position with the coach still
maintaining the squeeze is the actual measurement of the
can squeeze fall. It is not the distance between the first
needle position of set and the needle position at the far
swing to the right. A hard, fast can squeeze is an
incorrect can squeeze.

H. Coach holds the cans so they are not in contact with the
cups of his palms and squeezes them. This is an incorrect
can squeeze.

I. Coach holds the cans with the thumbs going up the sides
and sticking out over the top edge of the cans and squeezes
them. This is an incorrect can squeeze.

J. Coach holds the cans in a fairly tight grip and squeezes
the cans. This is an incorrect can squeeze.

K. Coach holds the cans with the forefingers lifted
slightly off and puts the forefingers on the cans during
the squeeze. This is an incorrect can squeeze.

The drill is continued until the student auditor gets the
idea that an incorrect can squeeze gives inaccurate,
unreliable needle reactions.

SECTION II: To give the student auditor a proper idea as to
what a correct can squeeze is, and to train him how to get
a correct can squeeze.

1. The following drill should be done first by the coach to
demonstrate to the student auditor what a correct can
squeeze is:

A. The coach has the student auditor shake his hands until
the fingers are loose and floppy.

B. Then the coach has the student auditor put his hands on
the table, palms up, exerting no control on his fingers.
The student auditor's fingers will curl in toward the palm.

C. Now the coach simply places the cans in the student
auditor's hands at an angle across the palms. The natural
curl of the fingers is sufficient to hold the cans in
place, and the placement of the cans at an angle ensures
that the maximum skin area is touching the cans. The cups
of the student auditor's palms and all the fingers and both
thumbs must be touching the cans. Ensure the thumbs go
around the cans and not up the sides.

D. Now the coach has the student auditor gradually increase
the pressure of his grip on the cans until a light squeeze
is achieved, and then relax it. This is a correct can squeeze.

E. NOTE: Ensure when the student auditor relaxes his grip
that he does not take a finger or thumb or his palms off
the cans. He should have about the same contact he had at
the start as in C above.

2. Having done the above, the coach now has the student
auditor do the drill as follows: A. Have the coach pick up
the cans and keep his hands on the table so the student can
see them throughout the can squeeze.

B. Check the coach's grip on the cans to ensure it is
correct as in B and C above. The student may have to try
out different sizes of cans, small, medium or large,
depending on the size of the coach's hands, to obtain the
correct size can which he can hold comfortably without
strain and that fits into the cup of his palm, with
maximum skin contact.

C. Adjust the sensitivity booster knob to the lowest position.

D. (a) Set the sensitivity knob at I on the sensitivity dial.

(b) Adjust the needle to the set line on the needle dial.

(c) Give the proper commands for getting a can squeeze as follows:

"Squeeze the cans, please."

"Thank you."

The student must ensure the coach gradually increases the
pressure of his grip on the cans and relaxes it.

(d) Note the distance the needle fell when the coach
squeezed the cans.

E. Now increase the sensitivity setting to 2 and repeat
steps D (b), (c) and (d) above, again noting the distance
the needle fell when the coach squeezed the cans.

F. Repeat steps D (b), (c) and (d) for sensitivity setting
at 3, then sensitivity setting 4, then 5, then 6, and on up
until you have the needle hitting the pin on the can
squeeze. With the needle hitting the pin on the can
squeeze, you wouldn't be able to note the length of the
needle fall.

Flunks are given for not having the coach remove all rings
or finger jewelry, as they can cause the needle to give
unusual reads; for not checking that there is maximum skin
contact on the cans; for failing to see that the thumbs go
around the can and not up the sides; for failing to set the
meter and needle up properly; for failing to notice and
handle a sudden or hard or jerky or convulsive can squeeze
instead of an even increase of pressure on the cans or
sudden letting go of the cans; for not making sure the
coach doesn't take a finger or thumb or palm off the cans
when he releases the contact; for failing to note
accurately the distance the needle fell on the can squeeze;
and for giving the wrong commands. Lack of skill in earlier
drills is corrected by pink sheet.

SECTION III: To give the student auditor a reality on
setting the sensitivity for a 1/3 of a dial drop of the
needle on the can squeeze.

The student auditor should know that setting the
sensitivity for 1/3 of a dial drop on the can squeeze is an
integral part of setting up each and every session he does.
It is the sensitivity he will be using during the session.
It is vitally important he gets the correct sensitivity
setting for each preclear at each session, so that he will
not miss reads or F/Ns.

A sensitivity setting which is too low or too high for that
particular preclear in the particular session will obscure
reads and F/Ns, thus upsetting the preclear's case.

Therefore, the student auditor must be proficient on this drill.

1. A. Have the coach pick up the cans and keep his hands on
the table so the student can see them throughout the can
squeeze.

B. Check the coach's grip to ensure it is correct, also
ensuring you have the correct can size.

C. Adjust the sensitivity booster knob to the lowest position.

D. (a) Set the sensitivity knob at 5 on the sensitivity dial.

(b) Adjust the needle to set line on the dial.

(c) Get the coach to squeeze the cans ensuring he does it properly.

(d) Note the distance the needle fell when the coach
squeezed the cans.

E. On Step D (d) the needle will have fallen a distance of either

(a) LESS than 1/3 of a dial drop,

or

(b) MORE than 1/3 of a dial drop.

If it's (a) raise the sensitivity a bit and repeat steps D
(b), (c) and (d) and continue to do this until you have 1/3
dial drop. If it's (b) lower the sensitivity a bit and
repeat steps D (b), (c) and (d) and continue to do this
until you have 1/3 dial drop.

In other words, keep adjusting your sensitivity lower or
higher according to whether the drop is more or less than
1/3 of a dial drop, until you get the correct sensitivity
setting.

Each time a new can squeeze is asked for, the student
auditor is to make sure the coach is holding the cans
properly and is giving a correct can squeeze.

F. The student then notes the exact sensitivity setting at
which he got the 1/3 dial drop.

Flunks are given for errors as in Section II above and for
failing to recognize when a 1/3 dial drop of the needle on
the can squeeze has been obtained; for failing to recognize
if the coach is giving a considerably harder or lighter can
squeeze than he was giving at sensitivity 5, and for
failing to establish the correct sensitivity setting for
1/3 of a dial drop on the coach.

2. Now the coach has the student auditor do the drill on a
number of other students, with the coach watching, until he
is satisfied that the student can easily and accurately
establish the correct sensitivity setting for a 1/3 dial
drop can squeeze.

SECTION IV: To give the student auditor a reality on how a
correct sensitivity setting for 1/3 of a dial drop on the
can squeeze gives a readable and workable meter and how an
incorrect sensitivity setting gives an unreadable and
unworkable meter, so the student will understand why he has
to use a sensitivity setting that gives 1/3 of a dial drop.

1. Coach has the student auditor set the sensitivity
accurately on a correct can squeeze for 1/3 dial drop as in
Section III.

2. The student auditor does a "pinch test" as follows:
student pinches the coach's arm, hard enough to hurt a
little bit.

3. Now, while watching the meter, the student says to the coach:

"Recall that pinch I just gave you."

"Thank you."

4. Student notes the reaction of the needle to his command
and the distance the needle fell.

5. Coach has the student do steps 2, 3, and 4 several
times, each time noting what the needle does in response to
"Recall that pinch."

6. Coach now has the student set the sensitivity at 1.
Student has coach squeeze the cans and notes whether
there's a read, or not. If there is a read, note size of
read and leave the sensitivity at 1. If there's no read on
the squeeze, the student still leaves the sensitivity at 1.

7. The student auditor does a new "pinch test" as in 2, 3,
4 and 5 above, noting the difference in needle response to
the command "Recall that pinch" as compared to what it was
in Step 5 at the correct sensitivity setting. There may be
no read at all and the student should notice that.

8. Coach now has student set the sensitivity at 32, and
coach squeezes the cans.

9. Student does the pinch test again and notes the reaction
of the needle to his command "Recall that pinch."

10. Coach has the student then set the sensitivity
correctly for 1/3 of a dial drop on a correct can squeeze
and does the pinch test again.

11. The student should observe from these pinch tests that
an accurate sensitivity setting determined from a correct
can squeeze gives a readable and workable meter and that an
incorrect sensitivity setting gives an unreadable and
unworkable meter. If he does not see this clearly, then the
coach would have the student redo steps 7 through 10 until
the student sees why the sensitivity must be set for 1/3 of
a dial drop determined by a correct can squeeze.

Flunks are given for failing to note what the needle did
and size of read in response to student telling coach to
recall the pinch and for errors in setting sensitivity
accurately and getting a correct can squeeze when called
for in the drill.

HISTORY: Developed as a training drill by L. Ron Hubbard at
Saint Hill in December, 1963 and revised by L. Ron Hubbard
in February, 1979.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:clb/dr. jk
Copyright (c) 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
039. HCOB 21 JAN 77RB r. 25 May 80 FALSE TA CHECKLIST


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JANUARY 1977RB
RE-REVISED 25 MAY 1980
(Re-revisions in this type style)

Remimeo
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors 
All Tech Checksheets

(This HCOB has been revised to include additional data on False
TA and the full list of references on False TA. The layout
of the list of handlings has been arranged to follow the line 
for checking, and reference to any specific brand of hand cream 
has been taken out.)


FALSE TA CHECKLIST


References.

HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING
HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R, GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER
HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA
HCOB 12 Nov71RB FALSE TA ADDITION
HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3
HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED
HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S 53RL SHORT FORM
HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM
HCOB 19 Apr 75R OUT BASICS AND HOW TO GET THEM IN
HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR LISTS
HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB, SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP
HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA
HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER
HCOB 7 Feb 79R E-METER DRILL 5RA
BTB 24 Jan 73R II EXAMINER AND FALSE TA
BOOK: E-METER ESSENTIALS
BOOK: INTRODUCTION TO THE E-METER
OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK Vl, "HOW TO SET UP 
YOUR MARK VI E-METER"


"This bulletin cancels HCOB 29 February 1972RA Revised 23
April 1975 as it is misleading and has caused some auditors
to assess the pc on the meter to find the cause of false TA
instead of checking directly with the pc."

This bulletin reinstates the False TA Checklist with
specific handlings that are directly from the issues that I
wrote on false TA.

"The following are the items to be checked by an auditor on
any pc. It need only be done once unless the check itself
is suspected false, or if conditions of the pc's hands,
etc., change.

"The checklist is kept in the pc folder and is entered on
the Folder Summary as an action done.

"The value of operating with correct can size should not be
underestimated, the reference HCOBs state why."

The auditor signs and answers the following points on the
checklist. The auditor must obtain information by checking
the pc's hands himself or herself to see if the hands are
dry or wet. The cause of false TA is in the physical
universe and that is where the check is done. It is not
done by asking the pc or checking the questions on the pc
for meter reads.

So the auditor would feel the hands of the pc to establish
if they are dry or wet, would feel the pc's hands with
cream on them to see if the cream has dried up, would see
if the pc's hands cup so as to form an area that does not
touch the cans and so forth. False TA is not think or
mental mass. It is in the physical universe and that is
where it has to be handled for it to be remedied. The
handling follows each line as you check it. This is for
simplicity, as that is the way this checklist is done, each
line being handled as you go.

R-FACTOR TO PC: "I AM GOING TO CHECK THE CANS, YOUR HANDS AND
VARIOUS OTHER THINGS TO ADJUST EVERYTHING FOR BEST ACCURACY"
FALSE TA CHECKLIST AND HANDLING SHEET


1. IS THE METER FULLY CHARGED? ________

Handling:

"Keep a meter charged at least one hour for every 10 of
auditing for 240 AC volt charging current, or 2 hrs. for
every 10 of auditing on a 110 AC volt charging current.
(Mark VI will get about 6 hrs. for every 1 hr. charged.)

"Before each session snap the knob over to TEST. The needle
should hit hard on the right side of the face. It can even
bounce. If the needle doesn't snap to the right hard or if
it doesn't quite get there on TEST, then that meter will go
flat in mid-session and give false TA and no reads or TA on
hot subjects." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA, False TA) NOTE: To
ensure an accurate check, the meter should be turned on a
minute or two before turning to test.


2. IS THE METER TRIMMED CORRECTLY? ________

Handling:

"A meter can be improperly trimmed (not set at 2.0 with the
trim knob) and can give a false TA position. When a meter
is not left on a minute or two before trimming, it can
drift in the session and give a slightly false TA.

"The trim can quietly be checked in mid-session by snapping
out the jack where the cord goes into the box and putting
the TA on 2, seeing if the needle is now on SET. If not,
the trim knob can be moved to adjust it. The jack is
quietly slipped back in. All without distracting the pc."
LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA, False TA)


3. ARE THE LEADS CONNECTED TO THE METER AND CANS? ________

Handling:

"A properly set up meter with cans (electrodes) fitted to a
pc who is holding them properly IS ALWAYS CORRECT." LRH
(HCOB 24 Oct 1971A) Reference for setting up a meter is
covered in E-Meter Drills book, EM 4, and the Mark VI
owner's manual if one is using a Mark VI.


4. ARE THE CANS RUSTY? ________

Handling:

"Corroded cans can falsify TA. Get new ones now and then."
LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71A) 


5. ARE PC'S HANDS EXCESSIVELY DRY REQUIRING HAND CREAM? ________

Handling:

"A quick test is have the pc put the cans under his armpits
and you'll see if it's his callused or chemically dried out
hands. The excessively dry hand is seen as shiny or
polished looking. It feels very dry. The correct treatment
is to use a hand cream, but not a greasy hand cream or
vanishing cream. A good hand cream rubs all the way into
the hand and leaves no excess grease. Hand cream is usually
smeared on, rubbed in and can then be thoroughly wiped off.
The hands will usually produce, then, a normal TA and meter
response." LRH (HCOB 23 Nov 73RB Re-revised 25 May 1980,
Dry and Wet Hands Make False TA)


6. ARE THE PC'S HANDS EXCESSIVELY WET REQUIRING POWDER? ________

Handling:

"If the TA is low, check if the pc's hands are wet. If so
have him wipe them and get a new read. It is usually found
that the 1.6 was really 2.0.... Have the pc wipe hands."
LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)

"Antiperspirants can be applied to too wet hands. There are
many brands of these, often a powder or spray. It can be
wiped off after application and should work for two to three
hours." LRH (HCOB 23 Nov 73RB)


7. THE PC IS NOT BEING TOLD CONTINUALLY TO WIPE HIS HANDS? ________

Handling:

Above per wet hands.


8. THE PC'S GRIP ON THE CANS IS NOT BEING CONTINUALLY CHECKED 
BY THE AUDITOR IN A WAY THAT INTERRUPTS THE PC? ________

Handling:

"Keep the pc's hands in sight. Check the pc's grip. Get
smaller cans." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)


8A. IS THE PC USING THE WRONG TYPE OF CANS? ________

a) corrugated ________

b) cellophane bonded to metal ________

c) wrong metal ________

The right metal is tin-plated steel, not cellophane bonded
or painted.

Handling:

Replace with the correct cans. "Cans of course should be
STEEL with a thin tin plating." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)


8B. ARE THE CANS TOO SHORT FOR THE PC'S HANDS TO COVER? ________

Handling:

Replace with cans of correct length so that the whole hand
has contact with the can. (Ref. HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)


9. TA POSITION FOR LARGE CANS? ________

Size approx 41/2 inches by 3 inches

or

11 cm by 8 cm

Handling:

"For a normal or large handed pc the can size is about 4"
inches by 2 5/8 inches or 12% cm by 7 cm. This can be
altered as big as 4 1/2 inches by 3 inches diameter or 11
cm by 8 cm. This is standard." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71 A)


10. TA POSITION ON MEDIUM CANS? ________

Size approx 47/8 inches by 25/8 inches

or

12l/2 cm by 7 cm

Handling: Covered above.

11. TA POSITION ON SMALL CANS? ________

Size approx 33/4 inches by 21/8 inches

or

9cm by 5cm

Handling:

"This can should be 3 3/4 inches by 2 1/8 inches or 9 cm by
5 cm diameter or thereabouts.

A small child would be lost even with that can. So a small
35 mm film can could be used.

This is 2 inches long by 1 3/16 diameter or 5 cm by 3 cm.
This works but watch it as these cans are aluminum. They do
work but test for true read with a slightly larger can and
then trim to adjust for the aluminum if any different.

"Cans of course should be STEEL with a thin tin plating.
Regular soup cans. Can size to match the pc avoids slack
can grip or tiring the hands into going slack, giving the
auditor 3.2 F/Ns and trouble." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)


11A. CAN SIZE FOR A CHILD IS INCORRECT? ________

Handling:

Size can go down to photographic aluminum 35 mm film cans
for a child. Size approx 2 inches by 13/l6 inches or 5 cm
by 3 cm. Note down TA position.


11B. IF THE ABOVE MENTIONED CAN SIZES AREN'T CORRECT
FOR THE PC'S HANDS OTHER SIZES CAN BE TRIED. ________

Handling:

1 1/4" tubing or 1 3/4" tubing as well as other can size
checked to see which fits the pc's hand. Note TA position.


12. ARE THE CANS TOO LARGE FOR THE PC? ________

Handling:

"Can size to match the pc avoids slack can grip or tiring
the hands into going slack." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71A)

Check the pc's grip and see if the hand is touching all of
the can and if the size is comfortable. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan
77RB, Handling a False TA)


13. ARE THE CANS TOO SMALL FOR THE PC? ________

Handling:

Per above. Check how the pc is holding the cans and if the
entire hand is on the cans and if they are comfortable and
adjust accordingly per above.


14. ARE THE CANS JUST RIGHT FOR THE PC? ________

Handling:

Check the grip and see if the can size is correct for the
pc. Do the cans comfortably fit the pc's hands with the
hand touching the cans so it gets an accurate reading on
the meter? If the can size is correct then you must ensure
that the grip is also correct on the cans.


15. ARE THE CANS COLD? ________

Handling:

"Regardless of can size, cold E-Meter electrodes tend to
give a much higher tone arm reading particularly on some pcs.

"Until the cans warm up, the reading is generally false and
is false in the direction of high.

Some pcs are 'cool blooded' and the shock of ice-cold cans
can drive the TA up and it takes a while to drift down.

"A practice which gets around this is for the auditor or
Examiner to hold the cans briefly until they are warm and
then give them to the pc. A variation is for the auditor or
Examiner to put the cans under his armpits while setting
up. This warms them. There are probably many other ways to
warm up cans to body temperature." LRH (HCOB 12 Nov 71RB)


15A. DID THE PC WASH HIS HANDS JUST BEFORE SESSION? ________

Handling:

Use a bit of hand cream to bring hands back to normal
amount of moisture.


16. ARE THE PC'S HANDS DRY OR CALLUSED?

Handling:

Covered above under pc's hands excessively dry requiring
hand cream.

There are ways to apply the hand cream so that it is
correct for that individual pc and does handle the false
TA. You can spread it on extensively then wipe it off and
then rub a bit more in ensuring the thumbs are included is
one way. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB) The point is to feel the
hands with the cream on them to see if it has handled the
excessively dry hand that is seen as shiny or polished looking.

And it now should no longer feel dry. (HCOB 23 Nov 73RB
Re-revised 25 May 80) The correct treatment is to use a
hand cream but not greasy hand cream or vanishing cream.

A good hand cream rubs all the way into the skin and leaves
no excess grease. This restores normal electrical contact.
Such a hand cream would only have to be applied once per
session - at session start - as it lasts for a long while.

If a cream leaves smears on a can, it is too heavily
applied or too little absorbed. (HCOB 23 Apr 75A Re-revised
25 May 80)


17. DOES THE PC HAVE ARTHRITIC HANDS? ________

Handling:

"A rare pc is so crippled with arthritis that he doesn't
make contact fully with the cans.

This gives high TA. Use wide wrist straps and you'll get a
right read." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA Re-revised 25 May 80)


18. DOES THE PC LOOSEN HIS GRIP ON THE CANS? ________

Handling:

Check the grip. Does the angle of the cans go across the
palms of the pc? Is the natural curl of the fingers
sufficient to hold the cans in place, and is the placement
of the cans at an angle ensuring that the maximum skin area
is touching the cans? (Ref. BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS) See if
the palm is touching the can and not elevated off. (Ref.
HCOB 13 Jan 77RB)


19. CHECK THE PC'S GRIP, DOES HE HOLD THE CANS CORRECTLY? ________

Handling:

Covered in above section. Also check to see if the pc is
holding the cans so tight that it is causing the hands to
sweat and read falsely low. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB and HCOB
7 Feb 79R, E-Meter Drill 5RA)


20. IS THE PC HOT? ________

Handling:

Get a fan in the room or handle the room so that it is
cooler and the pc comfortable.


21. HAS THE PC SLEPT WELL? ________

Handling:

Don't audit a pc who has not had sufficient rest or is
physically tired. (Ref. HCO PL 14 Oct 68RA, The Auditor's Code)


22. IS THE PC COLD? ________

Handling:

"A pc who is too cold sometimes has a falsely high TA. Wrap
him in a blanket or get a warmer auditing room. The
auditing environment is the responsibility of the auditor."
LRH (HCOB 24 Oct 71RA)


23. IS THE PC HUNGRY? ________

Handling:

Get the pc something to eat and don't audit a pc who has
not had enough to eat or is hungry.

(Ref. HCO PL 14 Oct 68A, The Auditor's Code)


24. IS IT TOO LATE AT NIGHT? ________

Handling:

"Between 2 and 3 A. M. or late at night a pc's TA may be
very high. The time depends on when he sleeps usually. This
TA will be found normal in regular hours." LRH (HCOB 24 Oct
71RA)


25. IS THE AUDITING BEING DONE NOT IN THE-PC'S

NORMAL REGULAR AWAKE HOURS? ________

Handling:

Covered above.


26. ARE THERE RINGS ON THE PC'S HANDS? ________

Handling:

"Rings on the pc's hands must always be removed. They don't
influence TA but they give a false rock slam." LRH (HCOB 24
Oct 71)

If the rings can't come off use a small strip of paper
around them to shield the rings touching the can.


27. IS THE PC WEARING TIGHT SHOES? ________

Handling:

Remove them. (Ref. HCOB 24 Oct 71RA, HCOB 13 Jan 77RB)


28. IS THE PC WEARING TIGHT CLOTHES?

Handling:

If it turns out that tight clothing is affecting the TA
ensure that the pc doesn't wear tight clothes in future
sessions. If possible have the pc remove the tight clothing
and see what the effect was that it had on the TA and make
sure no more tight clothes are worn in future sessions.


29. IS THE PC USING THE WRONG HAND CREAM? ________

Handling:

Using the reference materials find the right hand cream and
test it on the pc. Note TA position.


30. IS THE APPLICATION OF THE HAND CREAM CORRECT
AND DOES IT COVER THE ENTIRE HAND? ________

Handling:

Watch how the pc puts on hand cream and see if it covers
the entire hand, thumb included.

If not then have the pc put on hand cream covering the
entire hand and pick up the cans and note TA position. Some
pcs may have to put cream on and wipe it off and then
reapply it. (Ref. HCOB 13 Jan 77RB)


31. IS THE CHAIR THE PC IS SITTING IN COMFORTABLE? ________

Handling:

Get a new chair that is comfortable for the pc.


32. IS IT ACTUALLY A CHRONIC HIGH OR LOW TA CASE CONDITION? ________

Handling:

C/S Series 53 Assessment or Hi-Lo TA Assessment. Done to
F/Ning assessment.

So standard tech handles the high and low TA. The C/S
Series gives more data on the subject.


33. HAS THE PC GONE INTO DESPAIR OVER HIS TA? ________

Handling:

Handle the false TA with using this list as a guideline so
that the cause of false TA is found and fully handled with
the pc by the various handlings covered above. When false
TA is handled check TA worries, TA hassles and L1C best read.

________

This handling sheet is used in conjunction with the items
that are checked. This gives you the way to handle them.

Refer to reference material in reference section above for
further data on handling a false TA.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:bk.sl.dd
Copyright (c) 1977, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
040. HCOB 3 SEP 78 DEFINITION OF A ROCK SLAM


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 3 SEPTEMBER 1978
(Cancels HCOB 5 Dec AD12. "2-12, 3GAXX, 3-21 and Routine 2-10
Modern Assessment.") 
(Cancels HCOB 13 Aug AD12)
(Cancels HCOB 1 Aug AD12)

Remimeo
HCOs
Tech Staff 
Confessional 
Courses 
All Auditors, 
C/Ses Supervisors


URGENT - URGENT - URGENT

DEFINITION OF A ROCK SLAM


The following is the only valid definition of an R/S:

ROCK SLAM: THE CRAZY, IRREGULAR, LEFT-RIGHT SLASHING MOTION
OF THE NEEDLE ON THE E-METER DIAL. R/SES REPEAT LEFT AND RIGHT 
SLASHES UNEVENLY AND SAVAGELY, FASTER THAN THE EYE EASILY FOLLOWS.

THE NEEDLE IS FRANTIC. THE WIDTH OF AN R/S DEPENDS LARGELY 
ON SENSITIVITY SETTING. IT GOES FROM ONE-FOURTH INCH TO WHOLE 
DIAL. BUT IT SLAMS BACK AND FORTH.

A ROCK SLAM (R/S) MEANS A HIDDEN EVIL INTENTION ON THE SUBJECT 
OR QUESTION UNDER AUDITING OR DISCUSSION.

VALID R/SES ARE NOT ALWAYS INSTANT READS. AN R/S CAN READ 
PRIOR OR LATENTLY.

HCOB 5 December AD12, "2-12, 3GAXX, 3-21 and Routine 2-10 Modern
Assessment" is an HCOB composited by others incorrectly and
is CANCELED as it misdefines an R/S as a single slash left
or right. It contains the statements: "One or two slashes
make an R/S.... If it slashed up or down once call it an
R/S." The data is utterly false. By this wrong definition a
rocket read could be mistaken for an R/S, or any sudden
rise could be mistaken for an R/S. ONE SLASH DOESN'T BEGIN
TO BE AN R/S. NOR TWO OR THREE FOR THAT MATTER. THE CORRECT
DEFINITION OF AN R/S INCLUDES THAT IT SLASHES SAVAGELY LEFT 
AND RIGHT.

______________


DEFINITION OF A DIRTY NEEDLE

The following is the only valid definition of a dirty needle:

DIRTY NEEDLE: AN ERRATIC AGITATION OF THE NEEDLE WHICH IS

RAGGED, JERKY, TICKING, NOT SWEEPING, AND TENDS

TO BE PERSISTENT. IT IS NOT LIMITED IN SIZE.

A DIRTY NEEDLE IS CAUSED BY ONE OF THREE THINGS:

1. THE AUDITOR'S TRs ARE BAD.

2. THE AUDITOR IS BREAKING THE AUDITOR'S CODE.

3. THE PC HAS WITHHOLDS HE DOES NOT WISH KNOWN.

The definitions of a dirty needle as "a small rock slam"
and "a smaller edition of the rock slam" in HCOB 13 August
AD12, "Rock Slams and Dirty Needles," are CANCELED.

The definition of a dirty needle as "a minute rock slam" in
HCOB 1 August AD12, "Routine 3GA, Goals, Nulling by Mid
Ruds," is CANCELED.

All definitions which limit the size of a dirty needle to
"one quarter of an inch" or "less than one quarter of an
inch" are CANCELED.

A dirty needle is NOT TO BE CONFUSED with an R/S. They are
distinctly

different reads. You never mistake an R/S if you have ever
seen one. A dirty needle is far less frantic.

THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A ROCK SLAM AND A DIRTY NEEDLE IS IN
THE CHARACTER OF THE READ NOT THE SIZE.

Persistent use of "fish and fumble" can sometimes turn a
dirty needle into a rock slam. However until it does it is
simply a dirty needle.

AUDITORS, C/SES, SUPERVISORS MUST MUST MUST KNOW THE DIF-FERENCE
BETWEEN THESE TWO TYPES OF READS COLD.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nc
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
041. BTB 14 JAN 63 r. 25 Jul 74 RINGS CAUSING "ROCK SLAMS"


BOARD TECHNICAL BULLETIN

14 JANUARY 1963
REISSUED 25 JULY 1974 AS BTB

Remimeo
All Auditors

CANCELS HCO BULLETIN OF 14 JANUARY 1963 SAME TITLE


RINGS CAUSING "ROCK SLAMS"


NOTE: This datum was already known to me about rings but
this is the most severe case I've heard of.

L. RON HUBBARD

The following dispatch, sent in by Terry Milner and Joe
Fortner, staff members of Los Angeles, describes a
phenomenon which can be caused by a PC wearing rings: "A
dispatch on a matter which I consider quite urgent. Since
being audited quite a few rock slams have been observed on
me. In the rudiments, on lists, between comm lags, button
checks, in fact any method of auditing which required the
use of an E-Meter. With the advent of R2-12, I had many
lists, all chock full of items that had rock slammed at one
time or another. The supposedly phantom rock slam served to
hang up many sessions and auditing became quite a drag even
though one true package was found in spite of the rock
slams that went on forever.

Recently I was sent to get HGC auditing and the rock slams
were ever present until my Auditor, Joe Fortner, got a
little suspicious and had me take off the two rings I wore,
one on either hand.

They disappeared. Hundreds of things that had rock slammed
no longer rock slammed. Hundreds of almost, not quite
reliable items are dead now and in all truth, most of them
have no meaning to me anyway.

Perhaps you know of this condition set up by the PC wearing
rings........the thing is most Auditors do not, nor do most
PCs.


Issued by Peter Hemery

Reissued as BTB
by Flag Mission 1234
I/C: CPO Andrea Lewis
2nd: Molly Harlow

Authorized by A W
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY

BDCS:SW:AL:TN:PH:mh 
Copyright (c) 1963, 1974 
by L. Ron Hubbard 
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 


========================
042. HCOB 21 JUL 78 WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE?


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JULY 1978

Remimeo
All Auditors
All C/Ses
All W/Cers
All Tech Checksheets


WHAT IS A FLOATING NEEDLE?


A floating needle is a rhythmic sweep of the dial at a
slow, even pace of the needle.

That's what an F/N is. No other definition is correct.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY

BDCS:LRH:pb.lfg
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
043. HCOB 21 SEP 66 ARC BREAK NEEDLE


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 21 SEPTEMBER 1966

Remimeo


ARC BREAK NEEDLE


The needle of a preclear with an ARC Break may be dirty,
stuck or sticky, but may also give the appearance of
FLOATING. This is not a Release point however, as the pc
will be upset and out of comm at the same time. The auditor
must observe the preclear and determine which it is.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:lbr.cden
Copyright (c) 1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
044. HCOB 10 DEC 76RB r. 25 May 80 SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 10 DECEMBER 1976RB
RE-REVISED 25 MAY 1980
(This issue is re-revised to update reference HCOBs for False TA.)

Remimeo
All Auditors
All Intern 
Supervisors 
All C/Ses 


URGENT - IMPORTANT

C/S Series 99RB

SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION


Through verbal tech just located, it has been found that
some auditors have been ordered to disregard all F/Ns that
were above 3.0 or below 2.0 on the meter.

Auditors have also called F/Ns which were ARC break
needles, thus falsely indicating to the pc.

These two actions - disregarding actual F/Ns because the TA
was not between 2.0 and 3.0 and calling "F/Ns" that were
actually ARC break needles - have upset many preclears.

The outnesses here are (a) not considering pc indicators as
senior and (b) not noting pc indicators when calling an F/N
and (c) ignoring and giving junior importance to the
technology covered in false TAs. (See list of references at
end of this HCOB or the Subject Index of the HCOB Volumes.)

Auditors have even been led to falsify worksheets (giving
TA as in range when it actually was not when calling an
F/N) because they might "get in trouble" for calling an F/N
in the wrong range, such as 1.8 or 3.2.

The CORRECT procedure for out of range F/Ns is

1. Look at the pc's indicators.

2. Call the F/N regardless of its range.

3. Mark down the ACTUAL TA position.

4. Handle the false TA at the earliest opportunity when it
will not intrude into the current cycle on which the pc is
being audited. (You don't interrupt a Quad R3RA, for
instance, to handle false TA; you complete it and then, when
directed by the C/S, you handle the false TA.)

5. On any pc you suspect has had his F/Ns disregarded
because of false TA, you C/S for and get run a repair and
rehab of this error.

E-Meter cans can monitor or change TA position when the
palms are too dry or too wet or when the cans are too big
or too small or when the wrong hand cream is used. The
E-Meter does not read on hand moisture alone as was long
believed by people in electronics. But TA depends upon
resistance to electrical current in the palms, leads and
meter, as well as its main resistance which happens to be
mental masses or lack of them.

To simply tell some intern "Always disregard an F/N not in
correct range" is to set him up for loses and set the pc up
for crashes. The correct information is that an F/N which
isn't in range is accompanied by pc indicators that
indicate whether it is an F/N or not.

AND indicates you better get the false TA handled fast as
soon as it won't interrupt the current cycle. AND you
always note where it F/Ned so the C/S can C/S for false TA
handling.

Where an ARC break needle (which looks like an F/N) is
observed, whether it is in range or out of range (2.0 to
3.0 or below 2.0 or above 3.0) you LOOK at the pc and
establish the pc's indicators before falsely calling an
F/N. A pc who is about to cry is NOT an F/Ning pc and if
you indicate an F/N to that pc you will further the ARC
break and suppress the emotional charge that is about to
come off.


REPAIR

Where the above matters have not been fully understood and
errors have occurred on pcs, it must be assumed that

1. Auditors have falsified their worksheets as to TA
position and thus built up withholds and made themselves blowy.

2. That every pc who has ever had high or low TA trouble
has had F/Ns

disregarded and ARC break F/Ns falsely indicated.

3. That a briefing and drilling of all interns and auditors
must occur on this HCOB.

4. That a brief program of cleanup of disregarded F/Ns and
falsely called ARC break F/Ns be done on every pc.

5. That every such pc be considered as having false TA
troubles and these must be C/Sed for and corrected.

6. That all auditors and interns be drilled on all HCOBs
relating to pc indicators.


SAMPLE CLEANUP C/S

Disregard TA position, use only F/Ns and pc indicators in
doing this C/S.

1. It has been found that some of your F/Ns (release
points) may have been disregarded by past or present auditors.

2. Have you ever felt an F/N (release point or end of an
action) had been bypassed on your case?

3. Find and rehab the overrun of the release point to F/N.
Check for any other bypassed F/Ns and rehab them.

4. Have you ever felt an F/N should not have been indicated
by the auditor when it was?

5. Find the point and get in Suppress on it and complete
the action. Check "Are there any other F/Ns which should
not have been indicated by the auditor when they were?" and
handle as above.

6. Find and run the ARC breaks bypassed, with ARC break handling.

7. Find and handle the false TA in totality.


DIANETIC F/Ns

An F/N seen by the auditor in running R3RA is not called
until the full Dianetic EP is reached.

An auditor running R3RA is NOT looking for F/Ns. He is
looking for the postulate which is sitting at the bottom of
the chain he is running.

The EP of a Dianetic chain is always always always the
postulate coming off. The postulate is what holds the chain
in its place. Release the postulate and the chain blows.

That's it.

The auditor must recognize the postulate when the pc gives
it, note the VGIs, call the F/N and end off auditing that
chain.

An F/N seen as the incident is erasing is not called.

The pc does not have to state that the incident has erased.
Once he has given up the postulate, the erasure has
occurred. The auditor will see an F/N and VGls. NOW the F/N
is called. F/Ns are not indicated until the EP of postulate
off, F/N and VGls is reached.

It's the postulate - not the F/N - that we are going for in New
Era Dianetics.


POWER F/Ns

F/Ns are disregarded in Power.

Each Power Process has its own end phenomena and is ended
only when that is obtained.


REFERENCE HCOBs FOR FALSE TA

HCOB 8 Jun 70 LOW TA HANDLING
HCOB 16 Aug 70R C/S Series 15R, GETTING THE F/N TO THE EXAMINER
HCOB 24 Oct 71RA FALSE TA
HCOB 12 Nov 71RB FALSE TA ADDITION
HCOB 15 Feb 72R FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 18 Feb 72RA FALSE TA ADDITION 3
HCOB 16 Feb 72 C/S Series 74, TALKING THE TA DOWN MODIFIED
HCOB 23 Nov 73RB DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Nov 73RD C/S 53RL SHORT FORM
HCOB 24 Nov 73RE C/S 53RL LONG FORM
HCOB 19 Apr 75R OUT BASICS AND HOW TO GET THEM IN
HCOB 23 Apr 75RA VANISHING CREAM AND FALSE TA
HCOB 24 Oct 76RA C/S Series 96RA, DELIVERY REPAIR


LISTS

HCOB 10 Dec 76RB C/S Series 99RB, SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA POSITION
HCOB 21 Jan 77RB FALSE TA CHECKLIST
HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP
HCOB 26 Jan 77R FOOTPLATES USE FORBIDDEN
HCOB 30 Jan 77R FALSE TA DATA
HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER
HCOB 13 Jan 77RB HANDLING A FALSE TA
OWNER'S MANUAL, HUBBARD PROFESSIONAL MARK Vl, "HOW TO SET UP 
YOUR MARK VI E-METER"


PC INDICATORS HCOBs

References:
HCOB 29 Jul 64 GOOD INDICATORS AT LOWER LEVELS
HCOB 28 Dec 63 INDICATORS PART ONE, GOOD INDICATORS
HCOB 23 May 71RVIII Rev. 4.12.74 RECOGNITION OF RIGHTNESS OF THE BEING
HCOB 22 Sep 71 THE THREE GOLDEN RULES OF THE C/S HANDLING AUDITORS
HCOB 21 Oct 68R FLOATING NEEDLE


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

Revision assisted by
LRH Technical
Compilations Unit

LRH:RTCU:djm.dd
Copyright (c) 1976, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
045. HCOB 2 DEC 80 FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION MODIFIED


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 2 DECEMBER 1980

Remimeo
Tech & Qual
All Levels
All Auditors
All Supervisors
All Internships
All C/Ses
Examiners
Ethics Officers


FLOATING NEEDLE AND TA POSITION

MODIFIED


This bulletin carries further the data given in HCOB 10 December 
1976RB URGENT - IMPORTANT C/S Series 99RB SCIENTOLOGY F/N AND TA 
POSITION and modifies but does not cancel all HCOBs that mention
having to have the TA between 2.0 and 3.0 before the F/N can be 
considered valid, including:

HCOB 21 October 1968R Revised 9 July 1977 FLOATING NEEDLE
HCOB 7 May 1969R, Issue V Revised 15 July 1977 FLOATING NEEDLE
HCOB 21 April 1971RC Revised 25 July 1978 C/S Series 36RC DIANETICS
HCOB 24 October 1971RA Re-revised 25 May 1980 FALSE TA
HCOB 15 February 1972R Revised 26 January 1977 FALSE TA ADDITION 2
HCOB 23 November 1973RB Re-rev 25 May 1980 DRY AND WET HANDS MAKE FALSE TA
HCOB 8 June 1970 LOW TA HANDLING 
HCOB 13 June 1970 Issue II HUBBARD CONSULTANT STUDY STRESS ANALYSIS

Some recent tests I conducted have shown that a floating
needle is a floating needle regardless of tone arm position.

This changes an earlier belief that, in order to be valid,
the tone arm had to be between 2.0 and 3.0 for it to be
called a floating needle.

Carefully examining dozens of F/Ns which occurred with the
TA well above 3.0 and looking for any troubles with the
case following calling the F/N an F/N, I found that there
were no adverse consequences.

Therefore, it can be safely assumed that a floating needle
is a floating needle regardless of where the tone arm
position may be. It should be called, indicated and written
as an F/N, with the TA noted.

Palm moisture, pc grip and other factors alter the TA
position but not the F/N. The auditor must also be prepared
to handle and handle false TA and nothing in this finding
changes handling.

Tone arm positions register the relative mass of the case
and nothing in this finding changes that. There are low TA
cases and high TA cases and the state of the TA remains
important and all data regarding TA positions are valid.

An ARC break needle (an F/N accompanied by bad indicators)
remains an ARC break needle and nothing in this finding
changes that. It must be handled. (One ordinarily checks
for an ARC break in this case.)

This finding about TA position and F/Ns has been corrected
earlier. This present issue carries it further based on
very thorough recent testing. There are apparently no
liabilities of any kind in calling high and low TA F/Ns, F/Ns.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nc.gm
Copyright (c) 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
046. HCOB 20 FEB 70 FLOATING NEEDLES AND END PHENOMENA


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 20 FEBRUARY 1970

Remimeo
Dn Checksheet
Class VIII
Checksheet


FLOATING NEEDLES AND END PHENOMENA


Now and then you will get a protest from preclears about
"floating needles".

The preclear feels there is more to be done yet the auditor
says "Your needle is floating. "

This is sometimes so bad that in Scientology Reviews one
has to Prepcheck the subject of "Floating Needles".

A lot of by-passed charge can be stirred up which ARC
Breaks (upsets) the preclear.

The reason this subject of floating needles gets into
trouble is that the auditor has not understood a subject
called END PHENOMENA.

END PHENOMENA is defined as "those indicators in the pc and
meter which show that a chain or process is ended". It
shows in Dianetics that basic on that chain and flow has
been erased and in Scientology that the pc has been
released on that process being run.

A new flow or a new process can be embarked upon, of
course, when the END PHENOMENA of the previous process is
attained.


DIANETICS

Floating needles are only ONE FOURTH OF THE END PHENOMENA in all

Dianetic auditing.

Any Dianetic auditing below Power has FOUR DEFINITE
REACTIONS IN THE

PC WHICH SHOW THE PROCESS IS ENDED.

l. Floating needle.

2. Cognition.

3. Very good indicators (pc happy).

4. Erasure of the final picture audited.

Auditors get panicky about overrun. If you go past the End
Phenomena the F/N will pack up (cease) and the TA will rise.

BUT that's if you go past all four parts of the end
phenomena, not past a floating needle.

If you watch a needle with care and say nothing but your
R3R commands, as it begins to float you will find:

1. It starts to float narrowly.

2. The pc cognites (What do you know - so that's . . .) and
the float widens.

3. Very good indicators come in. And the float gets almost
full dial, and 4. The picture, if you inquired, has erased
and the needle goes full dial.

That is the full End Phenomena of Dianetics.

If the auditor sees a float start, as in I and says, "I
would like to indicate to you your needle is floating," he
can upset the pc's bank.

There is still charge. The pc has not been permitted to
cognite. VGIs surely won't appear and a piece of the
picture is left.

By being impetuous and fearful of overrun, or just being in
a hurry, the auditor's premature (too soon) indication to
the pc suppresses three quarters of the pc's end phenomena.


SCIENTOLOGY

All this also applies to Scientology auditing.

And all Scientology processes below Power have the same end
phenomena.

The 0 to IV Scientology end phenomena are:

A. Floating needle. B. Cognition. C. Very good indicators.
D. Release.

The pc goes through these four steps without fail IF
PERMITTED TO DO SO.

As Scientology auditing is more delicate than Dianetic
auditing, an overrun (F/N vanished and TA rising, requiring
"rehab") can occur more rapidly. Thus the auditor has to be
more alert. But this is no excuse to chop off three of the
steps of end phenomena.

The same cycle of F/N will occur if the pc is given a
chance. On A you get a beginning F/N, on B slightly wider,
on C wider still and on D the needle really is floating and
widely.

"I would like to indicate to you your needle is floating"
can be a chop. Also it's a false report if it isn't widely
floating and will keep floating.

Pcs who leave session F/N and arrive at Examiner without
F/N, or who eventually do not come to session with an F/N
have been misaudited. The least visible way is the F/ N
chop, as described in this session. The most obvious way is
to overrun the process.

(Running a pc after he has exteriorized will also give a
high TA at examiner.) In Dianetics, one more pass through
is often required to get 1, 2, 3, 4 End Phenomena above.

I know it said in the Auditor's Code not to by-pass an F/N.
Perhaps it should be changed to read "A real wide F/N". Here 
it's a question of how wide is an F/N? However, the problem 
is NOT difficult.

I follow this rule - l never jolt or interrupt a pc who is
still looking inward. In other words, I don't ever yank his
attention over to the auditor. After all, it's his case we
are handling, not my actions as an auditor.

When I see an F/N begin I listen for the pc's cognition. If
it isn't there, I give the next command due. If it still
isn't there, I give the 2nd command, etc. Then I get the
cognition and shut up. The needle floats more widely, VGls
come in, the F/N goes dial wide. The real skill is involved
in knowing when to say nothing more.

Then with the pc, all bright, all end phenomena in sight
(F/N, cog, VGls, erasure or Release, depending on whether
it's Dn or Scn) I say, as though agreeing with the pc,
"Your needle is floating."


DIANETIC ODDITY

Did you know that you could go through a picture half a
dozen times, the F/N getting wider and wider without the pc
cogniting? This is rare but it can happen once in a hundred.

The picture hasn't been erased yet. Bits of it seem to keep
popping in. Then it erases fully and wow, 2, 3 and 4 occur.
This isn't grinding. It's waiting for the F/N to broaden to
cognition.

The pc who complains about F/Ns is really stating the wrong
problem. The actual problem was the auditor distracting the
pc from cognition by calling attention to himself and the
meter a moment too soon.

The pc who is still looking inward gets upset when his
attention is jerked outward.

Charge is then left in the area. A pc who has been denied
his full end phenomena too often will begin to refuse auditing.

Despite all this, one still must not overrun and get the TA
up. But in Dianetics an erasure leaves nothing to get the
TA up with!

The Scientology auditor has a harder problem with this, as
he can overrun more easily. There is a chance of pulling
the bank back in. So the problem is more applicable to
Scientology as a problem than to Dianetics.

But ALL auditors must realize that the END PHENOMENA of
successful auditing is not just an F/N but has 3 more
requisites. And an auditor can chop these off.

The mark of the real VIRTUOSO (master) in auditing is his
skilled handling of the floating needle.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jz.ei.rd
Copyright (c)1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
_


FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 5 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

[full contents in part 1]

Part 5/7

047. HCOB 18 APR 68 NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV
048. HCOB 10 DEC 65 E-METER DRILL COACHING
049. HCOB 25 MAY 62 E-METER - INSTANT READS
050. HCOB 8 JUN 61R r. 22 Feb 79 E-METER WATCHING, ... PLAY DIXIE
051. HCOB 5 AUG 78 ASSESSMENT AND HOW TO GET THE ITEM
052. HCOB 29 APR 69 ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST
053. HCOB 22 JUL 78 ASSESSMENT TRs
054. HCOB 14 JUL 70 SOLO CANS
055. HCOB 28 FEB 71 METERING READING ITEMS
056. HCOB 29 APR 80 PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE
057. HCOB 3 JUL 71R r. 22 Feb 79 AUDITING BY LISTS
058. HCOB 20 DEC 71R r. 27 SEP 77 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF
059. HCOB 21 JUN 72 Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5
060. HCOB 19 MAR 71 L1C


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

047. HCOB 18 APR 68 NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 18 APRIL 1968

Remimeo

Qual Divs 
Rev
AOs
Study Materials


NEEDLE REACTIONS ABOVE GRADE IV


In doing Green Forms or Analysis Lists on any Clears (but
not in nulling) or doing them on most cases above 5 and
some cases below it, there are 2 different E-Meter needle
phenomena which have to be given attention:

l. As a Clear's postulates read as a surge, usually fairly
long (over 1"), "No" can read if the pc says it to himself
as an answer to a question asked.

A read, therefore, does not mean invariably "yes" or that
the question is charged. All it means is that the Meter has
read.

The Auditor must now find out what the read was before
determining he should do something about that portion of
the Green Form or List. One doesn't just assume the read
was "yes".

One asks about the read as a general rule, not assuming at
once the thing asked was charged.

Example - 

Auditor: "Do you have a missed withhold?" Meter surges.

Auditor: "What was that?"

Pre: "I thought No I don't."

Auditor: "Ok. Do you have a missed withhold?"

Pre: "No."-Meter didn't read.

Auditor: "Anything suppressed-asserted-protested-invalidated. 
Ok that's clean.

Ticks (1/8 inch) often mean something is there. A Pre OT's
postulates have greater length when they surge.

It is not important how you handle this phenomena of
postulate or to oneself-comment by a high level case. It is
important that the Auditor does not hang the case with a
wrong adjudication of what's wrong by thinking every surge
means "yes" or that the question is charged because it
surges. A question is charged only if it won't clean up
with buttons until the action itself is taken.

A Pre, unlike pcs below Grades I or II, usually recognizes
what is wrong as soon as it is mentioned. He or she is more
aware.

2. A response like a brief dirty needle on a Pre means "No" always.

So there is a certain and trustworthy negative to be had on a Pre.

A real dirty needle is constant and continues. The same
small jerky needle action on a person Grade 5 or above
means "No!" or that the question is negative.

On pcs below 5 it means a withhold or an ARC break or
almost anything and is of course continuous.

L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jc.rd 
Copyright (c) 1968 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
048. HCOB 10 DEC 65 E-METER DRILL COACHING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 10 DECEMBER 1965

Remimeo
Academy Tech Division
Students


E-METER DRILL COACHING


The following was submitted by Malcolm Cheminais,
Supervisor on the Saint Hill Special Briefing Course.

Here are some observations I have made on the coaching of
E-Meter drills, which I feel could be of use:-1.

The coach's needle is dirty. The student's out comm cycle
has cut his comm in some way, but PRIOR to that the coach
failed to flunk the part of the comm cycle that went out.
Correct flunking by coaches equals students with no dirty
needles.

2. If a coach's TA starts climbing on a drill and the
needle gets sticky, it means that the student's comm cycle
has dispersed him and pushed him out of PT. The coach is
either ( I ) not flunking at all (2) flunking the incorrect
thing.

3. The correct flunking by the coach of an out comm cycle,
which has dispersed him and pushed his TA up, will always
result in a TA blow down. If there is no blow down, the
coach has flunked the wrong thing.

4. Needle not responding well and sensitively on assessment
drills, although the needle clean. Coach has failed to
flunk TR 1 (or TR0) for lack of impingement and reach.

5. Coach reaching forward and leaning on the table, means
TR I is out with the student.

6. Student asking coach for considerations to get TA down,
but TA climbing on the considerations - the coach is cleaning
a clean, instead of flunking the out comm cycle, which
occurred earlier and pushed his TA up.

7. Student getting coach's considerations off to clean the
needle, but needle remaining dirty-student is cutting the
coach's comm while getting the considerations off and the
coach is not picking this up.

8. Student's shouting or talking very loudly on assessment
drills to try and get the Meter to read by overwhelm. The
reason for this is invariably-"but I'm assessing the bank!"
They haven't realized that banks don't read, only thetans
impinged upon by the bank - therefore the TR 1 must be
addressed to the thetan. The meter responds proportionately
to the amount of ARC in the Session.


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:emp.rd
Copyright (c) 1965
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
049. HCOB 25 MAY 62 E-METER - INSTANT READS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 25 MAY 1962

Central Orgs
Franchise


E-METER

INSTANT READS


An instant read is defined as that reaction of the needle
which occurs at the precise end of any major thought voiced
by the auditor.

The reaction of the needle may be any reaction except
"nul". An instant read may be any change of characteristic
providing it occurs instantly. The absence of a read at the
end of the major thought shows it to be nul.

All prior reads and latent reads are ignored. These are the
result of minor thoughts which may or may not be
restimulated by the question.

Only the instant read is used by the auditor. Only the
instant read is cleared on rudiments, what questions, etc.

The instant read may consist of any needle reaction, rise,
fall, speeded rise, speeded fall, double tick (dirty
needle), theta bop or any other action so long as it occurs
at the exact end of the major thought being expressed by
the auditor. If no reaction occurs at exactly that place
(the end of the major thought) the question is nul.

By "major thought" is meant the complete thought being
expressed in words by the auditor. Reads which occur prior
to the completion of the major thought are "prior reads".

Reads which occur later than its completion are "latent reads".

By minor thought is meant subsidiary thoughts expressed by
words within the major thought. They are caused by the
reactivity of individual words within the full words. They
are ignored.

Example: "Have you ever injured dirty pigs?"

To the pc the words "you", "injured" and "dirty" are all
reactive. Therefore, the minor thoughts expressed by these
words also read on the meter.

The major thought here is the whole sentence. Within this
thought are the minor thoughts "you", "injured" and "dirty".

Therefore the E-Meter needle may respond this way: "Have
you (fall) ever injured (speeded fall) dirty (fall) pigs?
(fall)?"

Only the major thought gives the instant read and only the
last fall (underscored in the sentence above) indicates
anything. If that last reaction was absent, the whole sentence
is nul despite the prior falls.

You can release the reactions (but ordinarily would not) on
each of these minor thoughts. Exploring these prior reads
is called "compartmenting the question".

Paying attention to minor thought reads gives us laughable
situations as in the case, written in 1960, of "getting
P.D.H.ed by the cat". By accepting these prior reads one
can prove anything. Why? Because Pain and Drug and Hypnosis
are minor thoughts within the major thought: "Have you ever
been P.D.H.ed by a cat?" The inexpert auditor would believe
such a silly thing had happened. But notice that if each
minor thought is cleaned out of the major thought it no
longer reacts as a whole fact. If the person on the meter
had been P.D.H.ed by a cat, then only the discovery of the
origin of the whole thought would clean up the whole thought.

Pcs also think about other things while being asked
questions and these random personal restimulations also
read before and after an instant read and are ignored. Very
rarely, a pc's thinks react exactly at the end of a major
thought and so confuse the issue, but this is rare.

We want the read that occurs instantly after the last
syllable of the major thought without lag. That is the only
read we regard in finding a rudiment in or out, to find if
a goal reacts, etc. That is what is called an "instant read".

There is a package rudiment question in the half truth,
etc. We are doing four rudiments in one and therefore have
four major thoughts in one sentence. This packaging is the
only apparent exception but is actually no exception. It's
just a fast way of doing four rudiments in one sentence.

A clumsy question which puts "in this session" at the end
of the major thought can serve the auditor badly. Such
modifiers should come before the sentence, "In this session
have you......?"

You are giving the major thought directly to the reactive
mind. Therefore any analytical thought will not react
instantly.

The reactive mind is composed of:

1. Timelessness.

2. Unknownness.

3. Survival.

The meter reacts on the reactive mind, never on the
analytical mind. The meter reacts instantly on any thought
restimulated in the reactive mind.

If the meter reacts on anything, that datum is partly or
wholly unknown to the preclear.

An auditor's questions restimulate the reactive mind. This
reacts on the meter.

Only reactive thoughts react instantly.

You can "groove in" a major thought by saying it twice. On
the second time (or third time if it is longer) you will
see only the instant read at the exact end. If you do this
the prior reads drop out leaving only the whole thought.

If you go stumbling around in rudiments or goals trying to
clean up the minor thoughts you will get lost. In sec
checking you can uncover material by "compartmenting the
question" but this is rarely done today. In rudiments, what
questions, et al, you want the instant read only. It occurs
exactly at the end of the whole thought. This is your whole
interest in cleaning a rudiment or a what question. You
ignore all prior and latent reactions of the needle.

The exceptions to this rule are

1. "Compartmenting the question", in which you use the
prior reads occurring at the exact end of the minor
thoughts (as above in the pigs sentence) to dig up
different data not related to the whole thought.

2. "Steering the pc" is the only use of latent or random
reads. You see a read the same as the instant read
occurring again when you are not speaking but after you
have found a whole thought reacting. You say "there" or
"that" and the pc, seeing what he or she is looking at as
you say it recovers the knowledge from the reactive bank
and gives the data and the whole thought clears or has to
be further worked and cleared.

You can easily figure-figure yourself half to death trying
to grapple with meter reads unless you get a good reality
on the instant read which occurs at the end of the whole
expressed thought and neglect all prior and latent reads
except for steering the pc while he gropes for the answer
to the question you asked.

That's the whole of reading an E-Meter needle.

(Two Saint Hill lectures of 24 May 1962 cover this in full.)


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:jw.bp.rd
Copyright (c) 1962
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
050. HCOB 8 JUN 61R r. 22 Feb 79 E-METER WATCHING, ... PLAY DIXIE


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 8 JUNE 1961R
REVISED 22 FEBRUARY 1979
(Revisions in this type style)

Remimeo
Tech
Qual


E-METER WATCHING

ARE YOU WAITING FOR THE METER TO PLAY DIXIE?


I have been a bit surprised by the length of time it is
taking people to do assessments on the Prehav, on Security
Checks and goals.

A query into this, which may reveal more, has discovered
that students wait patiently for the meter to react, which
Mary Sue has noticed.

It dawns on me that auditors believe they are doing an
analytical assessment on the Prehav, etc. This is wrong.

The Prehav Scale is not a picture of analytical thought. It
is in the order it is in because it is a picture of
reactive thought. It is how the reactive mind is stacked
up. (See Dianetics: The Modern Science of Mental Health for
the chapter on the reactive mind.) Now an E-Meter reacts
only on the reactive mind. A Clear doesn't react because he
is able to be conscious. An aberree reacts because he can't
think without thought exciting the reactivity of the
reactive mind. This, being composed of mass, energy, space,
time and thought, responds to tiny electrical impulses.

If your auditing was not aimed at reactivity it would not
register on a meter. Thus, you run what reacts because it
reacts and is therefore part of the reactive mind.

The reactive mind responds instantly on data a billion
years ago. How is this? Time in the reactive mind is out of
order. So is space. So is matter, so is energy. Pin a sign
on the reactive mind: "Out of Order." It connects wrong
connections. Hence, the E-Meter.

What is wrong with the pc is not known to the pc. Therefore
if a pc knows all about it, it isn't wrong with him.

That's why you never run what the pc says. You run only
what the meter says.

Example: pc is sure his current general Prehav Level that
should be run now is "Order or Command." "Order" rapidly
vanishes. "Command" follows suit. CONQUER stays in.

This is an actual example. I just assessed it a few minutes
ago on a pc who is in pretty good shape. He didn't like
CONQUER. He said Order and Command were long track.

Somebody running a Q and A on his assessment would have
said, perhaps, the pc knows best, so we'll run Order. Even
if it doesn't fall. But when I said it was CONQUER that we
were going to run as only it now fell, the pc sighed and
gave in. Finding the Conquer level questions produced a very 
responsive meter needle. It was wrong with the pc because 
he didn't know about it. It was part of his reactive mind. 
Order and Command were analytical responses prompted by an 
entirely different thing CONQUER. If Order or Command had 
been run the pc would have had a lot of auditing time wasted 
on him.

Now, why are assessments wrong sometimes? Because the
auditor is persuaded by the pc, not the meter. If the pc
and the meter agree, so what. You can still run it. But
only if the meter says so. for only then is it reactive.

Now, what about slow assessments? Well, the auditor thinks
the pc must consider things before he answers, waits for
the pc to answer and waits for the question to sink in so
the meter will react.

This is entirely wrong. Based on a misunderstanding of
assessment, the meter and the reactive mind.

1. The pc does not have to be given a chance to think
before the needle responds.

2. The pc does not have to answer or say one word to make
the needle respond.

3. All needle response is reactive.

4. There is no time in the reactive mind.

5. If the pc knew what was wrong with him it wouldn't be wrong.

6. Only the meter knows.

7. The auditor has more control over the pc's reactive mind
than the pc since the pc is influenced by the reactive mind
responses and the auditor is not so influenced.

The meter responds instantly. The reaction you will get on
the needle starts to occur on the needle instantly after
you utter it.

There is no need to sit there afterwards waiting for the
needle to respond again. for it won't until you push that
button again.

The only wait is caused by letting the needle come back at
the end of a fall. This may take one second.

Therefore: TO WAIT MORE THAN ONE SECOND BEFORE UTTERING THE
NEXT WORD ON THE LIST IS A COMPLETE WASTE OF AUDITING TIME.

All the response you want will begin to occur instantly
after you utter a goal, terminal, level or security
question. Thus the maximum time between questions on the
Prehav Level is at most a three-second interval of silence
while you digest the data.

Further, on an assessment for a Prehav run on the General
Scale (as in Routine 2, HCOB 5 June 1961), you do not now
say. "Do you . . ." or any other dunnage. You just
say the level itself, note response, put a pencil point
down on the level if it responds, say the next word, etc.,
etc. Takes about 5 minutes to run the Primary Scale up and
down to find its level. You start at the bottom. You just
say the word. If it responds you dot the sheet (using
different symbols to tell them apart like dots, X's,
lines). Then go back down the scale touching only those you
marked going up. Add another dot if they still fall or react.

Then play off those left one against the other, saying a
level only once each time. The remaining level is now the
only one that reacts. So you assemble your 5-way bracket
and carry on with auditing.

The pc doesn't have to say a word throughout the whole
assessment. You can even ask him politely not to, as breath
going in and out in speech can vibrate the needle.

When you assess over into the Secondary Scale of the level
you found. you do exactly the same as above. You read them
all off once, then only those that reacted, eliminate them
and you've got it. (And, by the way, if you go over the
Secondary Scale, you then don't only run levels on that
Secondary forever; in each new assessment you use the
Primary Scale again to find a new Secondary Level to assess.)

This is also true of a Joburg. If you're going to get a
reaction on the needle, it will come fast. No waiting. If
you get a reaction you clear that reaction, not the pc's
whole life.

The moment the needle is null, you go on to the next
question. Of course, in a Joburg. the pc talks. He better!

All auditing actions except the CCHs are now done in Model Session.

And all auditing actions and questions are done
effectively. neither frantically rushed nor slowly.

So it boils down to this. Weeks can be added to Joburgs and
assessments if you think you have to wait for a needle
response.

What are you waiting for? The whole action only requires a second.

Don't wait for the E-Meter to play Dixie. It was made in the Nawth.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: imj. rd.jk
Copyright (c) 1961. 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED



========================
051. HCOB 5 AUG 78 ASSESSMENT AND HOW TO GET THE ITEM


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 5 AUGUST 1978

Remimeo

Ref: HCOB 28 Feb 71 C/S Series 24 METERING READING ITEMS
HCOB 8 Apr 78 AN F/N IS A READ
E-Meter Essentials, page 17 (ROCK SLAM)
HCOB 18 Jun 78 New Era Dianetics Series 4


ASSESSMENT AND HOW TO GET THE ITEM

INSTANT READS

The correct definition of INSTANT READ is THAT REACTION OF THE
NEEDLE WHICH OCCURS AT THE PRECISE END OF ANY MAJOR THOUGHT
VOICED BY THE AUDITOR.

All definitions which state it is fractions of seconds
after the question is asked, are canceled.

Thus an instant read which occurs when the auditor assesses
an item or calls a question is valid and would be taken up
and latent reads, which occur fractions of seconds after
the major thought, are ignored.

Additionally, when looking for reads while clearing
commands or when the preclear is originating items, the
auditor must note only those reads which occur at the exact
moment the pc ends his statement of the item or command.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:dr
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
052. HCOB 29 APR 69 ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 29 APRIL 1969

Remimeo
Dn Checksheet


ASSESSMENT AND INTEREST


An assessment consists simply of calling off the items the
pc has given and marking down the reads that occur on the
meter. The pc is not required to comment during this action
and it is better if he does not.

This action is called "Assessment for Longest Read". It is
used mainly in Dianetics.

There are two Scientology assessments which are differently
done. These are "Assessment by Elimination" and "Listing
and Nulling". They are not used in Dianetics.

One does not mix the three types.

In Dianetic Assessment by Longest Read one uses these symbols:

X - didn't read

Tick - small jerk of needle 

sF - Small Fall (a quarter to half an inch)

F - Fall (about one to 2 inches)

LF - Long Fall (2 to 3 inches)

LFBD - Long Fall followed by a "blow down" or TA motion downward.

All falls are to the right. A "BD" is a Tone Arm motion to
the left made to keep the needle on the dial.

The favored action for an item is an LFBD and if one item
on the list does so, that is it without any further assessment.

The reason one assesses is that IF AN ITEM DOES NOT READ ON
THE METER WHEN ASSESSED IT IS BEYOND THE PC'S LEVEL OF AWARENESS.

It is very unwise and unsafe to try to run a somatic which
has not read on the list.

It will be beyond the pc's reality and beyond his awareness
and will result in overwhelm-ing him.

That an item reads guarantees that the pc will be able to
confront and erase the chain.

So that an item reads well is a guarantee that the pc can
handle it and will not get in too deep for him.

The exception to this is a PROTEST read. An item possibly
already run, is seen to read. The pc frowns. He is
protesting and the meter is registering protest, not the
item. One never runs a pc against his protest. To do so will
overwhelm him and give a bad result.

A protest almost never blows down the TA.

To be sure that the item is right, one usually asks the pc
if he is interested in the item chosen.

If the pc says no, he doesn't want to run it, this is a
protest read.

One then picks the second best reading item on the
assessment already done and checks that with the pc for
interest. The pc will usually be interested in it.

The pc can almost always be counted on to be interested in
any item that gives a LFBD.

One never simply asks the pc which on the list he is
interested in as "an assessment" as it will be found the pc
simply chooses at random and may choose a null item. The
result may be a very unsuccessful session.

An auditor may sometimes be astonished by what reads. The
pc, let us say, obviously has a broken leg but what reads
is an earache. One runs what reads, not what the auditor
knows should be run. A "know best" in an auditor can be a
fatal fault.

On a second or third assessment items which were at first
null or reading poorly will be found to "come alive" and
read well. The pc, by being audited has had an increase of
ability to confront and, if the auditing is standard, an
increase in confidence. The result is that items beyond his
reach previously (and did not read well) are now available
and can be run easily.

The E-Meter measures the awareness depth of the pc. On
things which do not read on assessment you would find his
reality poor. Things that read well on assessment will be
found to be things on which a pc has a high reality and a
high interest level.

Only if pushed to audit without a meter could an auditor
assess by interest only.

There is no real excuse for it if one has an E-Meter.

Auditing without a meter is a chancy activity.

Good assessment by longest read is the best entrance to a
successful session.

The same list will serve for the next item to be run and
should be used rather than just asking the pc.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:cs:ei:rd
Copyright (c) 1969
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
053. HCOB 22 JUL 78 ASSESSMENT TRs


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JULY 1978

Remimeo
All Auditors


ASSESSMENT TRs


The right way to do an assessment is to ask the pc the
question in a questioning tone of voice.

In assessing, some auditors have made assessment questions
into statements of fact, which of course is a cousin to
evaluation.

A downcurve at the end of an assessment question
contributes to making it a statement. Questions should go
up at the end.

A remedy for this is to record ordinary conversation. Ask
some normal questions and make some normal statements and
you will find that the voice tone rises on a question and
goes down on a statement.

Assessing with a statement's tone of voice instead of a
questioning tone of voice results in evaluation for the pc.
The pc feels accused or evaluated for rather than assessed
and an auditor can get a lot of false and protest reads.

It's all tone of voice. Auditors have to be drilled in
asking questions. Assessment questions have an upcurve at
the end.

Get it?

Then drill it.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:lfg
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
054. HCOB 14 JUL 70 SOLO CANS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 14 JULY 1970

Remimeo
SHs AOs
R6EW,
CC and
Ad Cse
Students
E-Meter Literature


SOLO CANS


I have worked out more ideal Solo electrodes for the
E-Meter - "cans".

The basic trouble with a single-hand electrode is that it
gives a falsely higher TA which can be very alarming.

The Tone Arm range on the Meter should be between 2.0 and
3.0 for a floating needle to be valid. This is when two
regulation electrodes (steel soup cans) are employed.

When you use only one electrode, holding it in the left
hand if you are right-handed, the TA can read as high as
4.0 when it is actually 3.0. Also a TA at 1.7 can read as
2.5 ! Single-hand electrodes are almost as old as the
modern meter. An aluminum tea ball with an insulator
between the screw threads served in the earliest models, an
electrode leading to each half.

Two stainless steel pipe sections about an inch in
diameter, separated in the middle by a rubber ring, with an
electrode to each end was a single-hand electrode version
which came down to modern times.

There were no further developments of any lasting value on
this problem of single-hand electrodes until a few months ago.

The problem in Solo Auditing is of course that if you held
electrodes in both hands you couldn't write or work the
meter at the same time. BUT a single-hand electrode gives
the wrong TA even if it does give the right needle reads
(which it does). To get the right TA then one must unplug
the single-hand electrode and plug in the two-hand electrode.

In this operation the TA can change and the wires get
tangled. This commotion is of course distracting.

What I worked out was a two-can electrode that became a
single-hand electrode at once.

You take 2 small juice or vegetable steel cans with their
tops neatly removed. They must be the paper label, not the
painted kind of course.

The size required is 2 1/8 inches diameter at the rim (that
is about 54 millimeters).

The length is 3 3/4 inches (which is about 95 millimeters).

You then take a piece of soft sponge or foam rubber about
3/8 inches thick (about 10 mm). You cut a circular piece of
sponge rubber about 2 3/8 inches (about 60 mm). It is just
slightly larger than the can diameter.

You glue this sponge or foam rubber circle to the closed
end of one can but not to the other.

Snap the electrode wires into the open ends of the cans.
You now have to all requirements a two-can electrode setup,
with the difference that one can's base has a rubber pad on
it. Holding these one in each hand gives you the 2-can more
correct TA read.

By putting the closed base of one can against the rubber
pad on the other can, taking them in one hand (two fingers
on each can as you hold them) you have a single-hand electrode.

In an instant you can take them in two hands and get the
correct TA (adjusting the Tone Arm with a knuckle or finger
tip). Taking them back in one hand and resetting the TA you
again have your single-hand read.

In using this system you should change your notation to an
indication of whether it is a one-hand or two-can read (to
save your Case Supervisor from heart failure).

The new notation is as follows: 3.75 (1) 2.9 (2). It
doesn't mean you always use both reads. You add the
brackets and a 2 or 1 to show whether it's a double or
single (2) or (1) read. At session start and at end you
always give both, i.e. 3.5 (1) 2.5 (2). And at the end you
give a trim check like 1.9 = 2.0 (done by unplugging the
electrodes from the meter for an instant and putting the
needle at set and reading what the TA is). It should be 2.0
but often has drifted to 1.9 or 2.1. That verifies all reads.


STANDARD ELECTRODES

A standard can is about 23/4 inches (69 mm) diameter by
about 41/2 or 5 inches (114 mm or 127 mm) long.

Steel soup or vegetable cans, unpainted, tops cleanly
removed, label and glue washed off, tin plated or not, have
been standard for many years. It is with these that
calibration has been done.

It is amusing that I had to work hard on electrodes to get
the first meters to work at all. Everything got tried.
Steel rods, aluminum (aluminum) tea balls, metal pads,
metal straps, you name it. The only one that works
consistently is the good old common kitchen variety soup
can. It's amusing to see efforts to "improve our
electrodes". Other versions have all been tried and failed
and every few years we have to have a soup can revival
campaign to get people back to standard reads.

The smaller juice can as described for the single-hand
electrode does not give the exact read as the standard cans
when used as a two-can electrode. So the smaller can
shouldn't be used by Examiners. You can check the
difference if you like between these two can sizes.

But the standard cans are too big as a one-hand to be held
comfortably in most people's left hand. The difference is
not great enough to worry anyone in normal auditing.


SMALL HANDS

People with small hands or children can't cope at all with
a standard can.

The size given for the single-hand (2 1/8" x 33/4") is more
suitable for them.

For very little children, two Kodak 35 mm unpainted
cassette cans from any photo shop will serve admirably.

These two 35 mm cassettes fixed with a rubber pad on the
bottom of one as described for the single-hand electrode
above will serve a child as a one-hand electrode.


SHORTING

The whole trick in preparing two separate cans to be held
as a single-hand is to make sure that when you put the
bottoms together they don't short. They can cause a "rock
slam" or a sudden fall if the metal of the cans touch. Thus
the glued-on rubber pad must be a bit bigger than the can
diameter and thick enough so it doesn't press through.

Old setups were bolted together and couldn't be separated
easily for two-can reads.

These two cans are loose from each other.

Important note: The smaller cans can give a falsely low TA
read being small. If you get such a read, have two large
standard cans handy to snap onto the leads and check. Will
save heart failure at seeing 1.7 for two-can read!


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: sb .rd
Copyright (c) 1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
055. HCOB 28 FEB 71 METERING READING ITEMS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 28 FEBRUARY 1971

Remimeo
HGC Auditor Checksheet
Academy Level 0 
Checksheet
Dn Cse checksheet 


C/S Series 24

IMPORTANT

METERING READING ITEMS


(NOTE: Observation I have recently done while
handling a C/S line has resulted in a necessary
clarification of the subject of "a reading item or
question" which improves older definitions and
saves some cases.)

It can occasionally happen that an auditor misses a read on
an item or question and does not run it as it "has not
read". This can hang up a pc badly if the item was in fact
a reading item or question. It does not get handled and
exists in records as "No read" when in fact it DID read.

THEREFORE ALL DlANETlC AUDITORS WHOSE ITEMS OCCASIONALLY
"DON'T READ" AND ALL SCIENTOLOGY AUDITORS WHO GET LIST QUESTIONS
THAT DON'T READ MUST BE CHECKED OUT ON THIS HCO B IN QUAL OR BY THE
C/S OR SUPERVISOR.

These errors come under the heading of Gross Auditing
Errors as they affect metering.

1. An Item or Question is said to "Read" when the needle
falls. Not when it stops or slows on a rise. A tick is
always noted and in some cases becomes a wide read.

2. The read is taken when the pc first says it or when the
question is cleared. THIS is the valid time of read. It is
duly marked (plus any blow down). THIS reading defines what
is a reading item or question. CALLING IT BACK TO SEE IF IT
READ IS NOT A VALID TEST as the surface charge may be gone
but the item or question will still run or list.

3. Regardless of any earlier statements or material on
READING ITEMS, an item does not have to read when the
auditor calls it to be a valid item for running engrams or
listing. The test is did it read when the pc first said it
on originating it or in Clearing it?

4. That an item or question is marked as having read is
sufficient reason to run it or use it or list it. Pc
Interest, in Dianetics, is also necessary to run it, but
that it did not read again is no reason to not use it.

5. When listing items the auditor must have an eye on the
meter NOT necessarily the pc and must note on the list he
is making the extent of read and any BD and how much.

THIS is enough to make it a "reading item" or "reading question".

6. In Clearing a listing Question the auditor watches the
meter, NOT necessarily the pc and notes any read while
clearing the question.

7. An additional calling of the item or question to see if
it read is unnecessary and not a valid action if the item
or question read on origination or Clearing.

8. That an item is marked as having read on an earlier
Dianetic list is enough (also checking interest) to run it
with no further read test.

9. To miss seeing a read on an origin or clearing is a
Gross Auditing Error.

10. Failing to mark on the list or worksheet the read and
any BD seen during pc origination or clearing the question
is a Gross Auditing Error.


EYESIGHT

Auditors who miss reads or have poor eyesight should be
tested and should wear the proper glasses while auditing.


GLASSES

The rims of some glasses could obstruct seeing the meter
while the auditor is looking at the worksheet or pc.

If this is the case the glasses should be changed to
another type with broader vision.


WIDE VISION

A good auditor is expected to see his meter, pc and
worksheet all at one time. No matter what he is doing he
should always notice any meter movement if the meter needle
moves.

If he cannot do this he should use an Azimuth meter and not
put paper over its glass but should do his worksheet
looking through the glass at his pen and the paper-the
original design purpose of the Azimuth Meter. Then even
while writing he sees the meter needle move as it is in his
line of vision.

Any and all as to what is a "reading item" or "reading
question" should be fully cleaned up on any auditor as such
omissions or can be responsible for case hang ups and
needless repairs.


NO READ

Any comment that an item or question "did not read" should
be at once suspected by a C/ S and checked with this HCO B
on the auditor.

Actually non-Reads, a non-reading item or question means
one that did not read when originated or cleared and also
did not read when called.

One can still call an item or question to get a read. That
it now reads is fine. But if it has never read at all, the
item will not run and such a list will produce no item on it.

It is not forbidden to call an item or question to test it
for read. But it is a useless action if the item or
question read on origination by the pc or clearing it with him.


IMPORTANT

The data in this HCO B if not known, can cost case
failures. Thus it must be checked out on auditors.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: nt.rd 
Copyright (c) 1971 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
056. HCOB 29 APR 80 PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 29 APRIL 1980

Remimeo


PREPARED LISTS, THEIR VALUE AND PURPOSE


No matter how complicated or confusing the environment is
getting, if you have a stable datum of exact action it can
see you through.

The Prepared List provides the auditor with a stable action
when a session or ease is confusing and can bring things
under control.

The idea of such lists and their development are original
to Dianetics and Scientology. They are made possible
because these subjects embrace the full extent of thought,
the spirit and actual and potential aberration. Thousands
of hours of research and development have gone into these
lists. Thousands of case histories have been reviewed and
condensed to make the lists possible.

They are, in themselves, a considerable tour de force.

They have often meant the difference between a stalled case
and a spectacular result. Just as they are important, a
knowledge of them and skill in their use is vital to
auditing success.


HISTORY

Probably the oldest "prepared list" is the White Form, (now
called THE ORIGINAL ASSESSMENT SHEET - HCOB 24 Jun 78R).
This provided a series of questions which would give one
the background of the preclear. It dates from 1950. By it
one can get the probable this life areas of the preclear's
heaviest charge.

SELF ANALYSIS was written in 1951. It contains processing
lists a preclear could run on himself.

Group Auditing materials of the middle 50s contained lists
of commands which were run on groups. Done on a meter, it
provides a case entrance.

The "Joburg" of 1961 is probably the next historical point.
It was a list of the possible withholds a preclear might
have. It was called the "Joburg" because it was developed
in Johannesburg, South Africa.

The "L1" was probably next. The original gave a list of
session rudiments which might have gone out and enabled the
auditor to get the session rudiments back in. It is still
in use as "L1C" or "List One C".

The "Green Form" was developed in the early 60s so that
Qual Review at Saint Hill would have a tool to analyze a case.

Correction lists for various auditing actions began to
appear. These corrected an action in progress that had gone
awry.

In 1973, the famous "C/S 53" (meaning "Case Supervisor
Series 53") was devised and continued to be improved and
reissued.

Today there are dozens of Prepared Lists. There is even a
prepared list to repair repaired lists in general.


THEORY OF PREPARED LISTS

A Prepared List is an assembly of the majority of things
which can be wrong in a case, an auditing action or a session.

Such lists are quite remarkable, actually. Only a thorough
knowledge of aberration makes such a list possible. when
you look over the extent of Prepared Lists, you will see
that they contain a grasp of the subject of aberration
never before available.

USE


While an auditor is expected to have studied and mastered
all this theory, it is a bit much to expect that in the
confusion of & case or session gone wrong he will be able
to spot instantly, without help, exactly WHAT has gone
wrong. Prepared Lists, where they exist, and his E-Meter
will sort this out for him. All the auditor has to have is
a general insight that something is going wrong, know in
general what is being handled in the case, knows what list
to use and then, with good TRs and metering, do an
assessment of the Prepared List. Usually the trouble will
come right, since the exact point will have been located.
It is sometimes enough to merely indicate the point found
to discharge it somewhat. One can F/N what is found or one
can go into very wide, extensive handling. The point is,
the use of the Prepared List has spotted the trouble. What
is demanded of the auditor or C/S is WHICH Prepared List to
use, but this is determined by what has been going on.


TYPES OF PREPARED LISTS

There are four general types of Prepared Lists. These are:

A. An ANALYSIS list. This is a type of Prepared List which
analyzes a case broadly or analyzes a session. The purpose
of it is to find out what to address in the case in order
to program it. The White Form, the Green Form and the C/S
53 can all be used for this purpose. There are other such
lists and there is even a Prepared List to debug production.

B. A direct AUDITING list. Prepared Lists exist which
deliver direct auditing commands or questions which, run on
the pc, produce an auditing result. The lists Or SELF
ANALYSIS and the various Confessional Lists form this type
of Prepared List.

C. A CORRECTION list. This type of list corrects an ongoing
action. Examples are the Word Clearing Correction List, the
Int Rundown Correction List, the Dianetic Correction List.

There is a bit of a gray area in this type of list as one
can also use some of them for analysis as in the case of a
Course Supervisor Correction List or a Student Correction
List. The C/S 53 can also serve as a correction list. The
real difference is what the list is being used for - to
analyze to find out what to program or start or to correct
something already in progress.

D. DRILL lists. These are used in training as dummy lists
to get an auditor used to handling the meter and Prepared
Lists. Such lists are contained in the Book of E-Meter Drills.


METHOD OF HANDLING

There are three methods of handling Prepared Lists,
depending on the type of list.

There is simply the method of asking the questions in
sequence and getting the answer from the preclear. This
would apply to a White Form or to auditing Prepared Lists
as in Self Analysis or in Group Auditing. Very few lists
are handled in this way.

The second way is called "Method 3" wherein the list is
assessed on a meter and when a read is noted, the
meter-reading question is taken up with the preclear and
F/Ned. Method 3 is covered in HCOB 3 Jul 71 AUDITING BY LISTS.

The third way is called "Method 5". This type of assessment
assesses the whole Prepared List rapidly without getting
the preclear to talk and the reads are then noted. The
largest read or reads are then taken up and F/Ned. Method 5
is covered in HCOB 3 Jul 71 AUDITING BY LISTS.


TRS AND METERING

Whether or not a Prepared List reads depends upon the
auditor's TRs and metering. At one time or another Case
Supervisors have had a great deal of trouble with this.
Accuracy as to what really read was greatly in question.
This came to view on Flag in the early 70s when Prepared
Lists that had been assessed by Class IV trainees were then
reassessed, same list, same pc shortly after the first list
assessment, by Class XIIs. Totally different results were
found - lists on which few or no reads were obtained by the
Class IV trainees were found to be very live by the Class XIIs.

The difference of quality of' TRs and metering were what
made the difference with the prepared list response. HCOB
22 April 1980 contains the drills which remedy this. It is
the TRs and metering of' the auditor that makes a prepared
list reliable, not the list itself'.

The champion list of all time is the C/S 53. On one page,
any general thing that can be aberrated in a thetan has
been assembled. There are two forms of it - Short Form for
preclears who know the terms and Long Form for preclears
who are unindoctrinated (they are the same lists but the
Short Form is in single word and the Long Form is a full
question).

A Director of Processing giving a D of' P Interview can use
one of these and obtain enough material to enormously help
a Case Supervisor. It is not the only D of' P Interview
action but it is very helpful when used.

An auditor can debug a program or a session with it.

It can analyze a case for programming and it can also be
used to correct a program or to correct a session.

Originally it was developed to handle high and low Tone Arm
cases and although it still says this, it also says it can
"correct case outnesses". And today, this is its greatest use.

PRIORITY of handling outnesses is a vital part of C/S 53.
The first three groups of' items - (Interiorization outnesses), 
B (List errors) and C (rudiments) - give the necessary order of
handling. If Int is reading, nothing else can be handled
until it is. List errors take the next priority.

Then rudiments. If one were to try to repair a case out of'
sequence, a mess could occur. So this Prepared List also
gives the sequence in which outnesses must be handled.

The main fault is using a C/S 53 is overuse - an auditor
reaching for it when he gets in trouble instead of
improving the auditor's own TRs, metering or knowledge of
programming in the first place.

But the C/S 53 is one of the most valuable tools an Auditor
or a Case Supervisor has.


GENERAL CASE HANDLING

The Prepared Lists of all types place in the hands of the
Case Supervisor and the auditor a procedure by which a case
can be analyzed and programmed.

Some auditing can be done direct from Prepared Lists.


WORD CLEARING PREPARED LISTS

It can happen that a Prepared List gets stalled on
misunderstood words.

For many Prepared Lists there are also full word clearing
lists which can be done on the pc.

At one time it was thought that before one did a list one
should ALWAYS word clear lt.

However, this has the liability that a pc who is in one
kind of trouble can't sit still until a full word clearing
action is done.

The amount of trouble which came from Prepared Lists came
more from assessing and metering errors than it did from
misunderstood words.

When one is using a prepared list on a pc who has never had
it word cleared, it is usually enough to check that the
read isn't coming from a Mis U.

Early in a pc's auditing, about the time he gets a CS-l,
the more critical prepared lists should be word cleared and
the fact noted in his folder. But when one is doing this
word clearing, tone arm action or significant reads should
also be noted. One is liable to think he is word clearing
whereas he is actually assessing.

True, there are a lot of tech words on a prepared list that
the pc isn't likely to know.

Unfortunately, the discoveries of Scientology exceed common
language and require terms of their own. But a pc catches
on to this quite rapidly. They are new ideas to him (even
though he was been living with them all the eons of his
existence). When the word is cleared, the idea is also
thrown into action. So it is important to note meter reads
and tone arm actions when clearing the words of prepared lists.

No hard and fast rules can be drawn on this point of word
clearing Prepared Lists. If you have already word cleared
the key words of a key Prepared List before you need it,
thank your stars. Otherwise carry on and hope.


SUMMARY

A Case Supervisor and an auditor owe it to themselves to
have a good command of this subject of Prepared Lists.
There are many issues on the subject. There are dozens of
Prepared Lists.

L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:DM:mh
Copyright (c) 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
057. HCOB 3 JUL 71R r. 22 Feb 79 AUDITING BY LISTS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 3 JULY 1971R
REVISED 22 FEBRUARY 1979
(Revisions in this type style)
Replaces HCOBs 22 May 65 and 23 April 64, and 
cancels HCOB 27 July 65 all on the same subject.

Remimeo
All Auditors 
Level III
Checksheets 
Tech 
Qual 
C/Ses


SCIENTOLOGY III

AUDITING BY LISTS


(Note: We now F/N everything. We do NOT tell the pc
what the meter is doing. This changes "Auditing By
Lists" in both respects. We do not say to the pc. "That's
clean" or "that reads.")

(Ref: HCOB 14 Mar 71 F/N EVERYTHING
HCOB 4 Dec 77 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP SESSIONS AND AN E-METER
HCOB 24 Jan 77 TECH CORRECTION ROUND-UP
HCOB 7 Feb 79 E-METER DRILL 5RA CAN SQUEEZE
HCOB 8 Dec 78 GREEN FORM AND EXPANDED GREEN FORM 40RD, USE OF)

Use any authorized, published LIST. (Green Form for general
review, L1C for A RC Brks, L4BRA for list errors.)


METHOD 3

Set the sensitivity for 1/3 of a dial drop on a correct can
squeeze per E-Meter Drill 5RA (Reference: HCOB 7 Feb 79R
E-METER DRILL 5RA CAN SQUEEZE).

Have your meter in a position (line of sight) so you can
see the list and the needle or you can see the needle and
the pc. The meter position is important.

Hold the mimeoed list close beside the meter. Have your
worksheet more to the right. Keep record on your worksheet.
Mark the pc's name and date on it. Mark what list it is on
the W/S with time. It remains in the folder stapled to the W/S.

Read the question on the list, note if it reads. Do NOT
read it while looking at the pc, do NOT read it to yourself
and then say it while looking at the pc. These are the L10
actions and are called Method 6, not Method 3. It is more
important to see the pc's cans than his face as can fiddle
can fake or upset reads.

TR I must be good so the pc clearly hears it.

You are looking for an INSTANT READ that occurs at the end
of the exact last syllable of the question.

If it does not read, mark the list X. If the list is being
done through an F/N and the F/N just continues, mark the
question F/N.

If the question reads, do not say "That reads." Mark the
read at once (tick, SF, F. LF, LFBD, R/S), transfer the
number of the Q to the W/S and look expectantly at the pc.
You can repeat the Q by just saying it again if pc doesn't
begin to talk. He has probably already begun to answer as
the Q was live in his bank as noted by the meter.

Take down the pc's remarks in shortened form on the W/S.
Note any TA changes on the W/S.

If the pc's answer results in an F/N (cog VGIs sometimes
follow, GIs always accompany a real F/N), mark it rapidly
on the W/S and say, "Thank you. I would like to indicate
your needle is floating."

Do NOT wait endlessly for the pc to say more. If you do he
will go into doubt and find more, also do NOT chop what he
is saying. Both are TR errors that are very bad.

If there is no F/N, at the first pause that looks like the
pc thinks he has said it, ask for an earlier similar
whatever the question concerned. Do NOT change the Q. Do
NOT fail to repeat what the question is. "Was there an
earlier similar restimulation of 'rejected affinity'?" This
is the "E/S" part of it. You do not leave such a question
merely "clean."

It does not matter now if you look at the pc when you say
it or not. But you can look at the pc when you say it.

The pc will answer. If he comes to a "looks like he thinks
he said it" and no F/N, you ask the same Q as above.

You ask this Q "Was there an earlier similar " until you
finally get an F/N and Gls.

You indicate the F/N.

That is the last of that particular question.

You mark "F/N" on the list and call the next question on
the list. You call this and other questions without looking
at the pc.

Those that do not read you X as out.

The next question that reads, you mark it on the list,
transfer the question number to the W/ S.

Take the pc's answer.

Follow the above E/S procedure as needed until you get an
F/N and Gls for the question.

Ack. Indicate and return to the mimeoed list.

You keep this up until you have done the whole list in this
fashion.

If you got no read on the list question but the pc
volunteers some answer to an unreading question, do NOT
take it up. Just ack and carry on with your mimeoed list.

BELIEVE YOUR METER. Do not take up things that don't read.
Don't get "hunches." Don't let the pc run his own case by
answering nonreading items and then the auditor taking them
up. Also don't let a pc "fiddle the cans" to get a false
read or to obscure a real one. (Very rare but these two
actions have happened.)


BIG WIN

If halfway down a prepared list (the last part not yet
done) the pc on some question gets a wide F/N, big cog,
VGIs, the auditor is justified in calling the list complete
and going to the next C/S action or ending the session,
except in the case where an F/Ning list is C/Sed for, e.g.
C/S 53RL. The auditor does not violate C/S Series 20
PERSISTENT F/N. If he is intending to F/N the list, and the
pc is on a big win, the auditor would end off, let the pc
have his win, and then in another later session, continue
with the list.

There are two reasons for this - one, the F/N will usually
just persist and can't be read through and further action
will tend to invalidate the win.

The auditor can also carry on to the end of the prepared
list if he thinks there may be something else on it, if it
does not violate C/S Series 20 PERSISTENT F/N.


GF AND METHOD 3

When a GF is taken up Method 3 (item by item, one at a
time) one ends it at the first F/N (Reference: HCOB 8 Dec
78 ll GREEN FORM AND EXPANDED GREEN FORM 40RD, USE OF). If
the auditor were to continue, it can occur that the TA will
go suddenly high. The pc feels he is being repaired, that
the clearing up of the first item on the GF handled it and
protests. It is the protest that sends the TA up.

Thus a GF is best done by Method 5 (once through for reads,
then the reads handled).

L1C, L3RF, L7 and other such lists are best done Method 3.

The above steps and actions are exactly how you do Auditing
by List today. Any earlier data contrary to this is
canceled. Only 2 points change - we F/N everything that reads
by E/S or a process to handle (L3RF requires processes, not
E/S to get an F/N) or else check for false read if the pc
shows manifestations of this, and we never tell the pc that
it read or didn't read, thus putting his attention on the
meter.

We still indicate F/Ns to the pc as a form of completion.

L1C and Method 3 are NOT used on high or very low TAs to
get them down or up.

The purpose of these lists is to clean up bypassed charge.

An auditor also indicates when he has finished with the list.

An auditor should dummy drill this action both on a doll
and bullbait.

The action is very successful when precisely done.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.rd. jk
Copyright (c) 1971. 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
058. HCOB 20 DEC 71R r. 27 SEP 77 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 20 DECEMBER 1971 R

REISSUED 27 SEPTEMBER 1977

Remimeo


C/S Series 72

CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF


A current survey shows that the weakest point in C/Sing
done in orgs is failure to use Prepared Lists for Case
Correction.

There are some other points. For some reason C/Ses are
being inventive instead of following the C/S Series and
doing standard repairs and grades.

Probably the failure to use Prepared Correction Lists
derails the use of standard actions.

There are very few actions which do not have their own
Correction Lists.

THERE IS NOTHING IN DIANETICS AND SCIENTOLOGY AS MIRACULOUSLY
WORKABLE AS CORRECTION LISTS.

The only things which prevent the list from working are

(a) AUDITOR'S METERING

(b) AUDITOR'S TRs.


METERING

When the auditor's meter is habitually placed where he
cannot see (l ) The meter needle, (2) The worksheet and (3)
The pc WITH ONE DIRECTED LOOK, then he misses reads.

All three have to be seen at once.

The faults are

i) Eyesight poor

ii) Glasses rims obscure one while looking at another

iii) Position of the meter.

It is a Standard Cramming action to look into these points
WHENEVER A CORRECTION LIST IS SAID TO BE BLANK.

For example a GF is done by Auditor A on Monday. It is done
again by Auditor B on Tuesday. Reads are found by B. This
means Auditor A is missing reads.

THIS IS FAR MORE COMMON THAN BELIEVED.


TRs

When an auditor can't be heard or is overwhelming the pc
the list won't be valid.

An auditor's TRs show up more quickly on a Correction List
than anything else.

A pc ARC Broken by TRs 0 to IV will not read properly on a
Correction List.


NUMBERS OF LISTS

The number of Correction Lists is large.

It is unthinkable to do Word Clearing without ever using a
WC Corr List. Yet we find folders with bogged Word Clearing
sessions where the list was never used.

There is the Green Form for general case upset, the Green
Green Form for Solo, L1C for ARC Brks over a period, L3B
for Dianetic bogs, L4B for listing and nulling goofs, Int
RD Corr List for Int-Ext corrections, a Power Corr List for
Power, GF 40R for resistive cases, C/S 53 and Hi Low TA for
TA misbehavior, L7 for Clearing Course, and others.

C/Ses trying to "solve cases" without using Correction
Lists is like trying to repair flat tires without puncture
patches - it just CAN'T BE DONE.

THE PRIMARY TOOL OF A C/S IS PREPARED CORRECTION LISTS.

It is not inventive ways of "solving cases".


METHOD OF USE

Where you have inexpert auditors you always order Method 5,
which is just a full rapid assessment. Then the C/S sorts
out the reads and C/Ses what to do as very well covered on
the lists themselves and the C/S Series.

Then the auditor does the C/S.

A Green Form is always done this way. It will bog on any
other method like 3.

There are different methods of handling lists. L1C is
always done Method 3, carrying each read as it is found
Earlier Similar to F/N.

A GF 40R is done Method 3 and then the engrams are run for
each read where engrams are indicated.

It's up to a C/S to use Correction Lists, to coach his
auditors into proper list use and to get corrected any misuse.

A C/S who can't or doesn't use Prepared Correction Lists
isn't a C/S at all but a "person puzzled about cases".

Correction Lists, standard programs and the Grade Chart and
Grade Commands and materials.

These are the tools of the C/S.

There are NO others.

A C/S is one who uses these things. He is Supervising that
they are used when they are supposed to be.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.pat 
Copyright (c) 1971,1977 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
059. HCOB 21 JUN 72 Word Clearing Series 38 METHOD 5


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 21 JUNE 1972
Issue I

Remimeo


Word Clearing Series 38

METHOD 5


Method 5 Word Clearing is a System wherein the word clearer
feeds words to the person and has him define each. It is
called Material Clearing. Those the person cannot define
must be looked up.

This method may be done without a meter. It can also be
done with a meter.

The reason the Method is needed is because the person often
does not know that he does not know. Therefore Method 4 has
its limitations as the meter does not always read.

The actions are very precise.

The word clearer asks "What is the definition of ?" The
person gives it. If there is any doubt whatever of it, or
if the person is the least bit hesitant, the word is looked
up in a proper dictionary.

This method is the method used to clear words or auditing
commands or auditing lists.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.rd
Copyright (c) 1972
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
060. HCOB 19 MAR 71 L1C


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 19 MARCH 1971

Remime


LIST - 1 - C

L1C


(Cancels earlier L 1 Lists
such as HCO B 8 Aug 70)

Used by Auditors in session when an upset occurs, or as
ordered by C/S.

Handles ARC Broken, Sad, hopeless or nattery pcs.

Questions can be prefaced with "Recently" "In this life"
"On the whole Track" or used without.


DO NOT USE ON HIGH TA TO BRING IT DOWN. USE HI-LO TA LIST.
TAKE ALL READING ITEMS OR VOLUNTEERED ANSWERS Earlier Similar
to F/N as they occur.


1. Has there been an error in listing? ________
(If this reads change to L4B at once.)

2. Has a withhold been missed? ________

3. Has some emotion been rejected? ________

4. Has some Affinity been rejected? ________

5. Has a Reality been refused? ________

6. Has a communication been cut short? ________

7. Has a communication been ignored? ________

8. Has an earlier rejection of emotion been restimulated? ________

9. Has an earlier rejection of Affinity been restimulated? ________

10. Has an earlier refusal of Reality been restimulated? ________

11. Has an earlier ignored communication been restimulated? ________

12. Has something been misunderstood? ________

13. Has someone been misunderstood? ________

14. Has an earlier misunderstanding been restimulated? ________

15. Has some data been confusing? ________

16. Has there been a command you haven't understood? ________

17. Has there been some word you haven't known the meaning of? ________

18. Has there been some situation you haven't grasped? ________

19. Has there been a problem? ________

20. Has a wrong reason for an upset been given? ________

21. Has a similar incident occurred before? ________

22. Has something been done other than what was said? ________

23. Has a goal been disappointed? ________

24. Has some help been rejected? ________

25. Has a decision been made? ________

26. Has an engram been restimulated? ________

27. Has an earlier incident been restimulated? ________

28. Has there been a sudden shift of attention? ________

29. Has something startled you? ________

30. Has a perception been prevented? ________

31. Has a willingness not been acknowledged? ________

32. Has there been no auditing? ________

33. Did you go Exterior? ________

34. Have actions been interrupted? ________

35. Have actions continued too long? ________

36. Has data been invalidated? ________

37. Has someone evaluated? ________

38. Has something been O/Run? ________

39. Has an action been unnecessary? ________


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:mes.rd
Copyright (c) 1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
_


FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 6 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

[full contents in part 1]

Part 6/7

061. HCOB 22 APR 80 ASSESSMENT DRILLS
062. BTB 20 AUG 70R r. 19 Aug 74 TWO COMPLETE DIFFERENCES
063. HCOB 1 AUG 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING
064. HCOB 22 AUG 66 FLOATING NEEDLES, LISTING PROCESSES
065. HCOB 14 SEP 71R r. 19 Jul 78 DIANETIC LIST ERRORS
066. HCOB 20 APR 72 PRODUCT PURPOSE AND WHY AND WC ERROR CORRECTION
067. HCOB 19 NOV 78 L & N LISTS - THE ITEM "ME"
068. HCOB 11 APR 77 LIST ERRORS, CORRECTION OF
069. HCOB 17 MAR 74 TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS
070. HCOB 28 MAY 70 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF
071. HCOB 23 SEP 68 VIOLATION OF THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING
072. BTB 7 NOV 72R r. 28 Jul 74 L&N LISTS
073. HCOB 29 SEP 68R r. 31 MAY 80 LIST CORRECTION - THE SHORT L4


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

061. HCOB 22 APR 80 ASSESSMENT DRILLS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 22 April 1980

Remimeo
Auditors
Surveyors
Examiners
Ethics Officers


ASSESSMENT DRILLS


Ref: HCOB 6 Dec 73 C/S Series 90 THE PRIMARY FAILURE
HCOB 28 Feb 71 C/S Series 24 METERING READING ITEMS
HCOB 15 Oct 73 C/S Series 87 NULLING AND F/NING PREPARED LISTS
HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs THE BOOK OF E-METER DRILLS

(Note: It is required that anyone doing the following
drills shall have done a TR course, an Upper Indoc course
and the drills of the E-Meter Drill Book.)

According to HCOB 6 Dec 73, the make or break point of an
auditor was his ability to get reads on a prepared list.
This depended upon (a) His TR 1 and (b) His metering.

In 1978 this was further studied and in HCOB 22 Jul 78
ASSESSMENT TRs, it was found that correct voice pitches had
everything to do with assessment.

I have just developed drills which improve this ability to
make lists read and to improve an auditor's auditing in
general.

These drills will also be found to have great value to
people who do surveys, to Examiners and to Ethics Officers.


E-METER

To begin, an auditor should review his E-Meter drills and
practice E-Meter Drill 27 on page 52 of the Book of E-Meter
Drills, E-Meter Drill CR0000-4 and, if found necessary,
E-Meter Drill CR0000-3. It is called to attention that
E-Meter Drill 5 of the Book of E-Meter Drills has been
replaced with E-Meter Drill 5RA and is not done, should be
done. This E-Meter Drill 5RA is the only change in the
original book. Further, it applies to the Mark VI just as
well as it applied to the Mark V for which the book was
written - the controls and actions of the Mark V and Mark
VI are practically identical, though the Mark VI moves up
to higher level cases.

Being able to see and read and operate an E-Meter has
everything to do with getting reads off a prepared list.
Where an auditor misses it is simply that he has not
adequately done the drills in the Book of E-Meter Drills
and has not practiced up to a point of full, easy
familiarity with the E-Meter. The point of being able to
make lists read is pointless unless the auditor can set up,
handle and read an E-Meter. But the skill is easily acquired.


ASSESSMENT TRAINING DRILLS

The following drills have the letter "Q" after them to mean
that they are used for QUESTIONS. The Q is followed by a
number to show that they are drilled in that sequence.

In these Q drills, the practice of twinning and any other
TR tech normal to TRs is followed.


TR 1-Q1

NUMBER: TR 1-Q1

NAME: Pitch of the Question.

POSITION: Coach sitting at the keyboard of a piano or organ
or any usable instrument, student standing beside instrument.

PURPOSE: To establish the pitch differences of statements
and questions.

DATA

TRAINING PROCEDURE: If the student is a girl, the coach
asks her to say "Apple" as a statement. The coach then
strikes the C above middle C (as given in the data above)
and then the G above middle C. If the student is a man, the
coach asks him to say "Apple" as a statement and then
strikes middle C and then the F below middle C. This is
repeated - saying "apple" and striking the two notes until
the pitch of a statement can be duplicated by the student.
In the event, the student has a voice pitch at variance
with these notes, other notes can be found and used by the
coach so long as the higher note is first and the second
note is four or five whole notes below the first note. It
must sound like a statement with the higher, then lower
note.) Once the student has grasped this and can duplicate
it, have the student use other two syllable words (or
single syllable words preceded by an article), using these
notes of the statement. Then, using these two notes, have
the student make up sentences as statements, the bulk of
the sentence said at the pitch of the higher note, but the
end of the sentence at the pitch of the lower note. Once
the student has this down and can easily do it and it
sounds natural and he is satisfied that it does, go on to
the question step.

The coach has the student say "apple" as a question. Then
the coach (for a male student) strikes the F below middle C
and then middle C. For a woman the coach strikes the A
above middle C and then the D an octave above middle C. (In
case this does not agree with the voice pitch of the
student, the coach must work it out providing only that the
upper note is three or four whole notes above the lower
note. It must sound natural and must sound like a
question.) The coach has the student say "apple" as a
question and then strikes the lower and higher note until
the student can duplicate it. Now take other two syllable
words (or single syllable words preceded by an article) and
have the student say these as a question, following each
one with the two instrument notes, lower to higher. When
the student can do this, is satisfied that it sounds
natural and doesn't have to think about dolling it, go on
to the next step. Here the student makes up banal questions.

The first part of the question is said at the lower note
and the last part is said at the higher note.

At each question, the coach strikes the lower note and then
the upper note. When this sounds natural and the student
does not have to think to do it and is satisfied with it,
the drill is ended.

END PHENOMENA: A person who can state statements and
questions that sound like statements or questions.

HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, April 1980, while
doing the script for the soon to be produced training film
"Tone 40 Assessment".


TR 1-Q2

NUMBER: TR 1-Q2

NAME: Walkabout Questions.

POSITION: There is no coach. Two students separate and walk
around their neighborhood and then meet and compare notes.
The object is to detect personal habits in questioning.

PURPOSE: To enlighten the student as to his own
communication habits and people's reactions to his questions.

COMMANDS: The most common everyday social questions such as
"How's it going?" "Do you like the weather?", etc.
appropriate to the activities and circumstances of the
person. Only one or two questions to a separate person. The
questions must be banal, social and ordinary but they must
be questions.

TRAINING STRESS: The two students agree on the areas they
will cover next time they will meet again. They then go
over individually, not together. The student pauses next to
people encoun-tered and asks a social question, and notes
the reaction of the person asked. In this drill the student
does not necessarily try to use TR 1-Q1 but is just
himself, speaking as he would normally speak.

The students then meet and compare notes and discuss what
they have discovered about themselves on the subject of
asking questions. If they have not learned or observed
anything, the drill must be repeated.

END PHENOMENA: A person who has detected any habits he has
in handling pitch of voice in asking questions so that he
can cure these in subsequent drills.

HISTORY: Recommended by L. Ron Hubbard in February 1978, in
the pilot for HCOB 22 Jul 78 ASSESSMENT TRs. Developed into
a TR in April 1980, by L. Ron Hubbard.


TR 1-Q3

NUMBER: TR 1-Q3

NAME: Single Word Question.

POSITION: Student and coach facing each other with a table
in between them. The E-Meter is not used. The Book of
E-Meter Drills used by student and another copy by coach.

PURPOSE: To be able to ask questions using a single word
read from a list.

COMMANDS: The coach uses the usual TR directions of start,
flunk, that's it. The student uses single words from the
prepared lists of the Book of E-Meter Drills, pages 66 to
72 of the Appendix.

TRAINING STRESS: To get the student to use the pitch of his
voice to deliver a question consisting of a single word. It
must sound like a question per TR 1-Q1 and use similar
pitch's to TR 1-Q1. The student is flunked for out TR-l,
for keeping his eyes glued to the list, for sounding
unnatural. The student is also flunked for slow or comm
laggy delivery or pauses. The coach designates the list to
be used, changes lists. When the student can do this
easily, a second part of the drill is entered and the coach
begins to use the PC Origination List on Page 58 so as to
interrupt the student and make him combine his questions with 
TR 4. In this case the student acknowledges appropriately, 
uses "I will repeat the Question." and does so.

END PHENOMENA: The ability to ask single word questions
that will be responded to as questions and to be able to
handle pc origins while doing so.

HISTORY: Developed in April 1980, by L. Ron Hubbard.


TR 1-Q4

NUMBER: TR 1-Q4

NAME: Whole Sentence Questions.

POSITION: Student and coach sit facing each other across a
table. The E-Meter is set up and used.

Copies of the Book of E-Meter Drills are used.

PURPOSE: To train the student to ask whole questions that
sound like questions, read an E-Meter and handle a session
at the same time.

COMMANDS: The usual coach commands of TR drills. The
Prepared Lists of the Appendix of the Book of E-Meter
Drills; the questions in these drills are reworded so that
the item occurs as the last word; Example: List 2, pg 65 or
the Book of E-Meter Drills states that the Assessment
Question is "which tree do you like best?". This is
converted, for each question, to "Do you like ?"; Prepared 
List 4 is converted to "Do you dislike ?"; etc. A whole 
sentence is used in every case.

TRAINING STRESS: The usual TR commands are used by the
coach. E-Meter Drill #5RA must be used to start. Any TR
errors or Metering errors may be flunked, but special
attention is paid to the student's ability to ask a
question that sounds like a question in accordance to TR
1-Q1 and that sounds natural. The drill has three parts. In
the first part, although the coach is on the meter, the
ability to ask the question is concentrated upon. The
second part concentrates upon the student's ability to look
at the written question and then ask the coach directly
without undue comm lag or hesitation. The third part is to
do the first two parts and read the meter (in accordance
with E-Meter Drills 27 and CR0000-4 which may have to be
reviewed if flubby) and to keep session admin, all smoothly
and accurately. If a question arises about meter accuracy,
a third person who can read a meter or a video tape is
employed to ensure that the student is actually not missing
or dubbing in reads.

END PHENOMENA: A person who can do all the necessary
actions of asking questions from a prepared list and run a
session smoothly without errors or confusion's and be
confident he can.

HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April 1980.


TR 8-Q

NUMBER: TR 8-Q

NAME: TONE 40 ASSESSMENT

POSITION: Same as TR 8 where the student is in one chair
racing another chair on which sits an ashtray, the coach
sitting beside the student in a third chair. A square
four-cornered ashtray is used.

PURPOSE: To deliver the THOUGHT of a question into an exact
position, wide or narrow at decision, that is a question,
with or without words.

COMMANDS: For the first part of the drill: Are you an
ashtray? Are you made of glass? Are you sitting there?
Second part of drill: same questions silently. Third part
of drill: Are you a corner? to each corner of the ashtray,
verbal and with intention at the same time. Fourth part of
drill: Any applicable question, verbal and with intention
at the same time put broad and narrow at choice into the
ashtray, exact parts of it and the surroundings.

TRAINING STRESS: The coach uses usual TR coaching commands.
There are four stages to the drill. The first stage is to
land a verbal command into the ashtray. The second stage is
to put the question with full intention silently into the
ashtray. The third stage is to put verbal command and
silent intention at the same time into exact parts of the
ashtrays The fourth stage is to put any applicable question
both verbally and with intention into any narrow or any
broad portion of the ashtray or its surrounds at choice and
at will. At the conclusion of the whole drill imagine the
ashtray saying "Yes,yes,yes,yes" in an avalanche of yeses
to balance the flow (in actual life, people, pcs and meters
do respond and return the flow).

END PHENOMENA: The ability to land a question with full
intention into an exact target area, broad or narrow, at
will and effectively, whether verbally or silently.

HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April 1980, as an
extension of all earlier work on intention and Tone 40, as
now applied to questions and assessments.


TR 4/8-Q1

NUMBER: TR 4/8-Q1 (TR 4 for Pc Origin, TR 8 Intention + Q
for Question, 1 for first part.) NAME: Tone 40 Assessment
Prepared List Session Drill.

POSITION: Student and coach sitting across from each other
at a table, E-Meter set up and in use, session admin, using
prepared lists.

PURPOSE: To train a student to do all the actions necessary
to a full, smooth, accurate session using prepared lists
and to do Tone 40 Assessment of them.

COMMANDS: Coach commands are the usual TR commands of
start, flunk, that's it. For the student, all commands
relating to starting a session, giving an R factor,
assessing a prepared list, keeping -the admin, indicating
any item round and ending a session. The Book of E-Meter
Drills for Prepared Lists as in TR 1-Q4. Origins for coach
as per pages 58, 59 and 60 of that book.

"Squeeze the cans", "Take a deep breath and let it out",
"This is the session", "We are going to assess a prepared
list" (assessment), "Your item is " (indicate any F/N) "End
of Assessment" "End of Session".

TRAINING STRESS: Permit the student to continue to his
first error, then have him drill and correct that error and
continue. Finally, to conclude, let the student go through
the entire sequence of the drill beginning to end three
times without error or flunk for a final pass. It is
expected that the student will not flub any TRs or metering
or session patter. metering may be finally verified by a
third student or video. All assessing must be in proper
tone 40 with full intention exactly placed. The student
must not wait to see if the meter read but catch the read
of the last question as he starts the next one. His vision
may shift from list to pc but at all times must embrace
list, meter and pc.

(This drill also would be the one used for tape or video
passes as it includes all elements of metering and TRs.)

END PHENOMENA: A person who can do a flawless and
productive assessment session, Tone 40.

HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard, April 1980.


TR 4/8-Q2

NUMBER: TR 4/8-Q2

NAME: Listing and Nulling Tone 40 Assessment.

POSITION: Same as TR 4/8-Q1.

PURPOSE: To teach a student to do the action of Listing and
Nulling with all metering and admin, using Tone 40 Assessment.

COMMANDS: The usual coach TR commands. Two copies of the
Book of E-Meter Drills. A prepared list is chosen by the
coach and both use the same prepared list. The student
reads the question and asks it and the coach reads the
replies from the same list but in his own copy. The student
must write down the answers in a proper session worksheet
and note and write down any reads. (An F/N terminates the
listing if it occurs.) The coach need not use the whole
list of replies but only half a dozen chosen at random. The
sequence of commands is the same as TR 4/8-Q1 except that
the R factor is "We are going to list a question." And, if
no item F/Ns and no significant read has occurred, the
additional action of nulling the list is undertaken with
the command, "I will now assess the list."

TRAINING STRESS: The laws of Listing and Nulling HCOB l Aug
68 apply in full as these are very important laws and
ignoring them can result in severe ARC breaks not so much
in this drill but in actual sessions. The coach may also
require suppress and invalidate buttons be put in on the
whole list. All errors, omissions, hesitations and lapses
from Tone 40 on the part of the student are flunked. Coach
similarly to TR 4/8-Q1. Pass when the student can do it
flawlessly three consecutive times. (This drill may be used
for internship tapes and videos for assessing and metering
passes.)

END PHENOMENA: A person able to do a flawless L & N list as
the session or as part of a session, with all TRs in, with
perfect metering and proper admin and using Tone 40 in his
listing and assessing.

HISTORY: Developed by L. Ron Hubbard in April, 1980.


SUMMARY

The purpose of these drills is to train the student to ask
questions that will get answers and to assess prepared
lists that will get accurate reads. If a student dolling
these drills has difficulty it will be traced to false
data, misunderstood words or not having passed earlier TRs
including Upper Indoc or his metering drills as contained
in the Book of E-Meter Drills. If a satisfactory result is
not obtained, the faults in the above items should be
located and remedied and these drills repeated. If any
earlier omissions are found and repaired and if these
drills are honestly done, heightened success as an auditor
(or a surveyor or examiner or ethics officer) is assured.

L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:dr 
Copyright (c) 1980 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
062. BTB 20 AUG 70R r. 19 Aug 74 TWO COMPLETE DIFFERENCES


BOARD TECHNICAL BULLETIN

20 AUGUST 1970R
REVISED & REISSUED 19 AUGUST 1974 AS BTB
(REVISION IN ITALICS)
CANCELS HCO BULLETIN OF 20 AUGUST 1970 SAME TITLE

All Cksheets
Class III 
and above


TWO COMPLETE DIFFERENCES

ASSESSMENT

LISTING AND NULLING


ASSESSMENT IS AN ENTIRELY DIFFERENT SUBJECT FROM LISTING AND
NULLING.

LISTING AND NULLING IS AN ENTIRELY DIFFERENT SUBJECT FROM
ASSESSMENT.

Please get these differences very clearly. They are
completely different actions. They are even years apart in
development. They have nothing to do with each other.


ASSESSMENT

Assessment is an action done from a prepared list. A PREPARED list.

The list is prepared by the Auditor or the C/S or it is an
HCOB of prepared lists. It is done by someone other than
the PC.

The prepared list for an Assessment is not made up by the preclear.

Assessment is done exactly per the Book of E-Meter Drills,
Number 24.

Assessment is NOT done by the Laws of Listing and Nulling.

Assessment has nothing to do with S & Ds, Remedy A or
Remedy B (which are Listing and Nulling actions).

Assessment is not auditing. It is simply trying to locate
something to audit.

You say the words on the prepared list right to the PC's
bank, bang, bang, marking the reads, and go through the
list of reading items until you are left with one reading
item. That is the item.

To get a clue as to what happened, the C/S prepares a list,
and the Auditor starts assessing with the list already
written out,

The Auditor calls out each item and notes its read as follows:

lions X

Big Game SF

Cats X

Felines SF

Tigers X

Bearers X

Trucks X

Elephants X

Killing

Camping X


Three items are now reading after the first assessment .
The Auditor continues to assess the reading items on the
list by elimination down to ONE item. On the second
assessment the list looks like this:

lions X

Big Game SF X

Cats X

Felines SF X

Tigers X

Bearers X

Trucks X

Elephants X

Killing F LFBD

Camping X

Now the item left in is "Killing". It is circled.

That is the item. The C/S now knows where the charge lies.

This item is prepchecked or done on an L1 as a subject or
otherwise handled as directed by the C/S.

Sometimes some items will read three or four times, but the
action is the same. The Auditor assesses the reading items
by elimination down to one item. And that is all there is
to it. If the item "killing" also had an F/N, the item
would not be handled further as the charge will have blown.


LISTING AND NULLING

Listing and Nulling is an action whereby the PC gives items
in answer to the Auditor's listing question-It

is the Preclear who lists. Listing and Nulling is listed by
the preclear. This is done precisely per the Laws of
Listing and Nulling. (HCOB 1 August 1968).

There is no Listing and Nulling drill in the Book of
E-Meter Drills.

The Auditor asks the listing question, if it reads he asks
the PC the question, the PC answers, item, item, item,
item. The Auditor writes the items down as the PC gives
them noting the read or no read as the PC gives the item.
The Auditor then nulls the list per the Laws of Listing and
Nulling.

In Listing and Nulling, there should be ONLY ONE reading
item on the list after nulling.

You don't go over and over the reading items by a process
of elimination. You may extend the list if more than one
item is reading on nulling.

In its finest form, Listing and Nulling is done to LFBD F/N.

The Auditor says the listing question to the PC, checks
whether it read and notes the reads per Number 6 of the
Laws of Listing and Nulling.

Ideally, the following would happens.

The Auditor checks the question "Who got shot?" It gets a
long fall, so it is reading well.

Auditor writes the read beside the question. Then the
Auditor gives the PC the question with good TR 8, and PC
gives items. The Auditor writes the PC's items down, noting
whether the item read and the read as the PC gives it. The
first reads therefore is always the read the item gave as
the PC said it.

"Who got shot?" LF

Me X

Joe X

Bearers

Elephants X

Tigers

The Buffalo X

IND. The White Hunter LFBD F/N

Bearers F X

Elephants F X

Tigers F X

The Buffalo X X

--- EXT

The Dog X X

IND The White Hunter LFBD LFBD F/N

"The White Hunter will BD F/N because it is the item. The
Auditor gives the item to the PC. The PC will have Cogs and
VGIs. It might happen that the PC tells the Auditor that
this is the item, at which point the Auditor would
pleasantly say "thank you. 'The White Hunter' is your
item." of he could just smile and say "Thank you", in
acknowledgment. But the point is that he would never chop
the PC's Cog or enforce his presence on the PC while this
is happening.

GOOD TRs ARE VITAL.

And this is the way you do Listing and Nulling.

You get an LFBD F/N while Listing or while Nulling, if
you're a flubless Auditor. It is the finest hand that gets
it while Listing and never has to get to the Nulling stage.
However, both are excellent. A list that has to be nulled
to cm LFBD item is acceptable, but not worthy of praise.

There is of course one other place where you could get an
LFBD F/N in Listing and Nulling - which is while checking 
the listing question for read before listing. You could get 
an F/N on checking the question, and the PC could start cogging 
and blow the whole subject. When that happens, the subject has
blown. Don't do anything more with it. Indicate the F/N and
let the PC have his Cog and VGIs.

Listing and Nulling is so simple. Have perfect TRs, know
the Laws of Listing and Nulling, and do it as shown above.

Any Auditor who consistently cannot get an LFBD F/N while
Listing and Nulling should retrain on Listing and Nulling.
It is more than likely he'll find he has bought some one
else's misunderstoods or considerations on the subject.

As a matter of fact, Listing and Nulling is a breeze and
don't let anyone try to tell you otherwise.

Prepared from LRH lectures,
C/Ses and HCOBs
by CS-4

Revised & Reissued as BTB
by Flag Mission 1234
I/C: CPO Andrea Lewis
2nd: Molly Harlow
Authorized by AVU
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the
CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY

BDCS:SW:AL:MH:JR:mh
Copyright (c) 1970, 1974
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

========================
063. HCOB 1 AUG 68 THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 1 AUGUST 1968

Remimeo

CLASS III, SOLO Vl & Vll, ACADEMY AND SHSBC
REQUIRED REVIEWED FOR SOLO AND Vll

(Compiled from earlier HCOBs and TAPES of
the early 60's to give the exact stable data)


THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING


(Star Rate. No attestations allowed, clay and demos required)

The following laws are the ONLY important rules of listing
and nulling. If an auditor doesn't know these he will mess
up pcs thoroughly and awfully. An auditor who doesn't know
and can't apply these is not a Level III auditor.

LAWS

1. The definition of a complete list is a list which has
only one reading item on list.

2. A TA rising means the list is being overlisted (too long).

3. A list can be underlisted in which case nothing can be
found on nulling.

4. If after a session the TA is still high or goes up, a
wrong item has been found.

5. If pc says it is a wrong item it is a wrong item.

6. The question must be checked and must read as a question
before it is listed. An item listed from a non-reading
question will give you a "Dead Horse" (no item).

7. If the item is on the list and nothing read on nulling,
the item is suppressed or invalidated.

8. On a suppressed list, it must be nulled with suppressed.
"On .......has anything been suppressed."

9. On an item that is suppressed or invalidated the read
will transfer exactly from the item to the button and when
the button is gotten in the item will again read.

10. An item from an overlisted list is often suppressed.

11. On occasion when you pass the item in nulling, all
subsequent items will read to a point where everything on
list will then read. In this case take the first which read
on first nulling.

12. An underlisted and overlisted list will ARC break the
pc and he may refuse to be audited until list is corrected,
and may become furious with auditor and will remain so till
it is corrected.

13. Listing and nulling or any auditing at all beyond an
ARC Br without handling the ARC Break first such as
correcting the list or otherwise locating it will put a pc
into a "sad effect".

14. A pc whose attention is on something else won't list
easily. (List and null only with the rudiments in on the pc.)

15. An auditor whose TRs are out has difficulty in listing
and nulling and in finding items.

16. Listing and nulling errors in presence of Auditor's
Code violations can unstabilize a pc.

17. The lack of a specific listing question or an incorrect
non-standard listing question which doesn't really call for
item will give you more than one item reading on a list.

18. You cease listing and nulling actions when a floating
needle appears.

19. Always give a pc his item and circle it plainly on the list.

20. Listing and nulling are highly precise auditing actions
and if not done exactly by the laws may bring about a down
tone and slow case gain, but if done correctly exactly by
the laws and with good auditing in general will produce the
highest gains attainable.

NOTE: There are no variations or exceptions to the above.
(Does not alter 5A Power procedure.)

A failure to know and apply this bulletin will result in
the assignment of very low conditions as these laws, if not
known or followed, can halt case gain.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:jp.s.cden
Copyright (c) 1968
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
064. HCOB 22 AUG 66 FLOATING NEEDLES, LISTING PROCESSES


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 22 AUGUST 1966

Remimeo
All Exec Hats
Qual Hats
Tech Hats
HCO Hats


FLOATING NEEDLES, LISTING PROCESSES


In sessions where the process being run on a pc involves a
listing question (including S & D), please note that after
the listing question has been thoroughly cleared with the
preclear and then given to the pc that the process is being
run.

Should it happen, then, that while the pc is actually
listing off the question (and has not gone momentarily out
of session), the needle floats, this is the flat point or
end phenomenon of the process and the whole subject and all
further steps of it are dropped at once.

Whatever charge was on the listing question has blown,
either with or without the preclear being analytically
aware of it.

To continue the process beyond this point is Out Tech by
the process being overrun and is also a violation of our
basic Fast Flow System.

Please note that whether there is a second leg to the
process or not, like fitting an item found off a list into
a bracket of commands, has no bearing on the fact that the
process is flat.

If the needle floats while the pc is in session listing off
a question, then there is no charge left on that question
and there will be no item to tit into the second leg of the
process.

The process has served its purpose.

With training as immaculately precise as it is and
auditors' comm cycles becoming effortlessly superlative,
the gradients of our technology are so fine that the
results of each process on each level will be achieved
faster and faster.

Sometimes the velocity of the processing is such that the
end phenomenon will occur on the process without the
preclear being aware of what has happened. Ending the
process at this point then gives the preclear the chance to
move into the velocity of the process.

Please then acknowledge the power of our technology and
keep winning.


L. RON HUBBARD

LRH:lb-r.cden
Copyright (c)1966
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
065. HCOB 14 SEP 71R r. 19 Jul 78 DIANETIC LIST ERRORS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 14 SEPTEMBER 1971R
REVISED 19 JULY 1978
(Revisions in this type style)

Remimeo
Also Dn Text 


C/S Series 59R

DIANETIC LIST ERRORS


It can happen that a Dianetic list of somatics, pains,
emotions and attitudes can act as a list under the meaning
of the Laws of Listing and Nulling as per HCOB 1 August 68.

The most violent session ARC Brks occur because of list
errors under the meaning of listing and nulling. Other
session ARC Brks even under withholds are not as violent as
those occurring because of listing errors.

Therefore when a violent or even a
"total-apathy-won't-answer" session upset has occurred in
Dianetics, one must suspect that the preclear is reacting
under the laws of listing and nulling and that he conceives
such an error to have been made.

The repair action is to assess the prepared list which
corrects listing errors. This is L4BRA - HCOB 15 Dec 68
amended to 18 March 71.

It is used "On Dianetics lists " as the start of each of
its questions when employed for this purpose.

When a pc has not done well on Dianetics and when no other
reason can be found the C/S should suspect some listing
error and order an L4BRA to be done "On Dianetic lists " at
the start of each question.

Each read obtained on the list is carried earlier similar
to F/N as per HCOB 14 Mar 71 "F/N Everything" or,
preferably the list is found in the folder and properly
handled in accordance with what read on L4BRA.

Dianetic lists can be carried to an item that blows down and F/Ns.

This does not mean the item found is now wholly clean. Even
though it F/Ned it will in most cases need to be run on
secondaries and/or engrams (R3RA Quad) for erasure and full
Dianetic end phenomena.

(Ref: New Era Dianetics Series 1 through 18.)

A C/S must be alert to the fact that:

(a) Extreme upsets and deep apathies are almost always list errors.

(b) That a Dianetic list can be conceived to be a formal
list and can behave that way.

(c) L4BRA is the correction list used in such cases.

(d) Laws of Listing and Nulling HCOB 1 August 1968 can
sometimes apply to Dianetic lists.

Very few Dianetic lists behave this way but when they do
they must be handled as above.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.rd.lfg 
Copyright (c) 1971, 1978 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
066. HCOB 20 APR 72 PRODUCT PURPOSE AND WHY AND WC ERROR CORRECTION


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 20 APRIL 1972
Issue II

Remimeo


C/S Series 78

PRODUCT PURPOSE AND WHY AND

WC ERROR CORRECTION


Where untrained Auditors are finding Whys for a Danger
Formula, or post purposes or post products as called for in
the Est O System you will get a certain amount of error and
case disturbance. Such upsets also come from word clearing
by incompetent persons.

The C/S should look for these especially when such
campaigns are in progress. He should suspect them as a
possibility when a case bogs.

A C/S must be sure all such papers and worksheets get into
pc's folders.

A common repair action is to

1. Do an assessment for type of charge.

2. Handle the charge found by the assessment done.

3. Fly all the reading items found on such assessments by
2wc or direct handling.

4. Suspect LISTING ERRORS on any Why or purpose or product
found even though no list exists and reconstruct the list 
and L4B and handle it.

5. Handle word clearing of any type in or out of session
with a Word Clear Correction List done in session by an
Auditor.

6. When word clearing is too heavy on the pc or doesn't
clean up suspect he has been thrown into implants which are
mostly words or the words in some engram. As Implants are 
actually just engrams, handle it with an L3B.


LISTING

Any item found out of session or by a non-auditor is
suspect of being a Listing and Nulling (L&N) error even
though no list was made.

TODAY A CORRECT L&N ITEM MUST BD AND F/N.

So treat such items as you would list errors and try to
reconstruct the list and either

confirm the item or locate the real item (may have been
invalidated and suppressed) or extend the list and get the
real item.

The real item will BD F/N.

One can establish what the situation is with a post
purpose, a Why or a product or any other such item by doing
an L4B.


SELF AUDITING

The commonest reason for self auditing is a wrong or
unfound L&N item.

People can go around and self list or self audit trying to
get at the right Why or product or purpose after an error
has been made.


REACTION

NOTHING PRODUCES AS MUCH CASE UPSET AS A WRONG LIST ITEM
OR A WRONG LIST.

Even, rarely, a DIANETIC LIST can produce wrong list
reactions. Ask the pc for his somatics and he blows up or
goes into apathy. Or blows. Or attacks the auditor.

ALL of the more violent or bad reactions on the part of the
pc come from out lists.

Nothing else produces such d sharp deterioration in a case
or even illness.


OUT LISTS

Therefore when one gets a sharp change in a case (like
lowered tone, violence, blows, "determination to go on in
spite of the supervisor", long notes from pcs, self C/
Sing, etc., etc., the C/S SUSPECTS AN OUT LIST.

This outness can occur in regular sessions even when the
item was said to BD F/N.

It can occur in "Coffee shop" (out of session auditing of
someone), or by Est Os or poorly trained or untrained staff
members or even in life.


PTS

When such actions as finding items by non-auditors are done
on PTS people the situation can be bad, so one also
suspects the person to be PTS to someone or something.

"PTS" does not communicate well in an assessment question
so one says, "Someone or something is hostile to you" and
"You are connected to someone or something that doesn't
agree with Dianetics or Scientology."

The main things to know when doing such repairs are (a)
that such situations as wrong lists or upset people can
occur in an org where untrained people are also using
meters and (b) THAT IT IS UP TO THE C/S TO SUSPECT DETECT
AND GET THEM


HANDLED IN REGULAR SESSION.

Do not ignore the possible bad influence.

As the good outweighs the bad in such cases, it is not a
correct answer to forbid such actions.

It is a correct answer to require all such actions and
worksheets become part of the folder.

One can also persuade the D of T or Qual to get in the
people doing such actions.

And do not ignore the effect such actions can have on cases
and do not neglect to include them in C/Ses before going on
with the regular program.

They can all be repaired.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:nt.rd
Copyright (c) 1972
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
067. HCOB 19 NOV 78 L & N LISTS - THE ITEM "ME"


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 19 NOVEMBER 1978

Auditors
Class IV
and above 
C/Ses
Class IV
and above


URGENT - IMPORTANT

L & N LISTS - THE ITEM "ME"


RULE: THE ITEM "ME" MUST BE ACCEPTED ON ANY S & D LIST.

RULE: THE ITEM "ME" MUST NEVER BE REPRESENTED.

The item "Me" on an L & N list must be accepted as the
item, as it is basically the only right item there could be
for an identity or valence list.

The item "Me" often appears on S & D lists, or similar L &
N lists which ask for an identity or valence. If it is not
accepted, or if it is represented, it will really mess up
the case. (This includes the pronouns, "myself," and "I")

The right thing to do when the pc gives this item, is to
accept it as the item for the list. and do not continue
that list or take any further action with that item.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:dm.clb
Copyright (c) 1978
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
068. HCOB 11 APR 77 LIST ERRORS, CORRECTION OF


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 11 APRIL 1977

Remimeo
Level III
Level IV
Snr Class IV
Snr SHSBC
All Cl IV Auditors


LIST ERRORS

CORRECTION OF


It has been found that the correction of lists, a very
vital piece of tech, has been a source of confusion in the
field as it apparently has never been written up in an
issue. It really is simple if you know your Laws of L & N.


VERIFYING A LIST

The correct procedure for verifying/correcting past L & Ns
is to check the items as to whether or not they are
correct. Then do an L4BRA on each list where the item is
found to be incorrect. You would have to orient the pc to
the listing question and the item. You do not direct the
question to see if it read. And don't just do an L4BRA and
then not find the right item for the pc as part of the
handling (unless the question proves to be uncharged or
some such).


NULLING A LIST

One nulls a list when he doesn't get a BD F/N item on
listing. The Laws of L & N strictly apply. An L4BRA would
be used if the action bogs with still no item found. One
would also null lists the pc made where no item had been
found such as a 2WC which turned into a listing action with
the pc giving off items or a list the pc somehow made while
not on a meter. In these cases there is no item to verify
with the pc as correct. Just cull the items into a list,
work out with the pc what the question was if it's not
already noted, and null the list.


RECONSTRUCTING A LIST

Sometimes you just don't have the list and can't get it or
it's an old Why Finding or PTS interview for which there
are no worksheets. In this case you get from the pc what
the question was and then get him to give you the items
that were already on the list as the item probably was
already on the list and you don't want the pc to get into
newly listing the question in PT and then getting into an
overlisting situation. Just get him to give you the items
he had already put on the list and more often than not you
will get a BD F/N item. If you don't get the item that way
then you can extend the list.


SELF-LISTING

Watch it on these as every random stray thought a person
has about "why this or that" does not mean it's a
self-list. But do look for it on a person who is
manifesting the horrendous BPC an out list can generate,
who is introspected or has been trying to figure out who is
doing him in after just having seen the Ethics Officer.
Just don't get into trying to make a list out of some
non-standard listing question that won't give you an item.
And actually the usual reason for self-listing is a prior
wrong L & N item or an item not found. People will
self-list to try to find the right item.

So find and correct the earlier out list.


LIST CORRECTION BLOW-UP

When you are going along correcting lists and suddenly you
get a big pc blow-up and it is not resolving on the list
you are correcting you had better quickly realize that you
probably are not correcting the list that is out and you'd
better find out which list it is. There is usually an
earlier out list to be found, if the list you are
correcting does not resolve the upset.


LISTS NOT READING

When you start getting key lists such as Grades III and IV
not reading and no items found it's time for that auditor
to get a thorough overhaul on his metering, eyesight and to
get off all his MUs on L & N. You also could be setting the
pc up for a self-listing situation as he has been given the
listing question but no item has been found. So be very
sure the question did not read even with Suppress and Inval
and TRs were in before getting off a key L & N process.


USE OF L4BRA

The prepared list L4BRA corrects L & N lists. It can be run
on old lists, current lists, general listing. When a pc is
ill after a listing and nulling session or up to 3 days
after, always suspect that a listing action done on the pc
had an error in it and get those lists corrected.

Sometimes it is obvious what the error was per the Laws of
Listing and Nulling. For example there could be two reading
items left on the list in which case you would know to
extend the list as it has been underlisted. If this didn't
go, then an L4BRA would be done on the list.


HANDLING AN L4BRA

You handle reading questions on the L4BRA by the directions
under the question that read.

You don't just 2WC these questions. For example say
question 4 read on the L4BRA, "Is a list incomplete? SF."
You then ask the pc, "What list is incomplete?" Locate it
and get it completed to a BD F/N item. You don't just 2WC
"incomplete lists" to an F/N and leave it at that.

By the way the L4BRA is missing a line which is "Was it the
first item on the list?" This is being added as it's quite
common that it is the first item and is most often missed.


DO IT RIGHT

An out list can create more concentrated hell with a pc
than any other single auditing error.

So it's imperative that listing errors get properly corrected.

The best thing to do is to have the Laws of Listing and
Nulling drilled line by line and down cold and just do it
right in the first place. Then you will also see at once
where old lists violated these laws and you will not be
yourself doing lists that have to be corrected later.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

Assisted by
CS-4/5

LRH:JE:dr
Copyright (c)1977
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
069. HCOB 17 MAR 74 TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 17 MARCH 1974

Remimeo


TWC CHECKSHEETS

TWC, USING WRONG QUESTIONS


Two Way Comm is not an art. It is a science which has exact rules.

Foremost in the rules is:

DON'T USE A LISTING QUESTION IN TWO WAY COMM.

By a "listing question" is meant any question which
directly or indirectly calls for items in the pc's answer.

Use of "who", "what", "which" instantly turns a TWC into a
listing question.

Listing questions are governed by the rules of Listing and Nulling.

If you use a listing question accidentally in TWC you can
get the same bad reactions from a pc that you would get on
a wrongly done list.

The reason for pc upsets in TWC is hidden as it is not
apparently a listing process, rarely gets the correction a
bad list would get.

Asking "who" or "what" or "which" during a TWC after the
main question can also turn it into a Listing and Nulling
process.

TWC questions MUST be limited to feelings, reactions,
significance's. They must NEVER ask for terminals or locations.

EXAMPLE: "Who upset you?" in TWC causes the pc to give
items. This is a LIST. "What are you upset about?" does the
same thing. "Which town were you happiest in?" is also a
LISTING question NOT a TWC question. Any of these results
in the pc giving items. They are not then nulled or
correctly indicated. The pc can get VERY upset just as he
would with a wrong list. Yet the session is not a "listing
session" so never gets corrected.

EXAMPLE: "How are you doing lately?" is an example of a
correct TWC question. It gets off charge and gets no list
items. "Are you better these days than you used to be?"
"How have you been since the last session?"

"What happened" is different than "What illness", "What
person", "What town" which are listing questions.


REPAIR

When other things fail to locate the upset of a pc look
into TWC processes in the folder and treat them as L&N
processes where the pc has answered with items. The relief
is magical.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: ntm.rd 
Copyright (c)1974 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
070. HCOB 28 MAY 70 CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 28 MAY 1970

Remimeo


CORRECTION LISTS, USE OF


The various lists designed to find by-passed charge and
repair a faulty auditing action or life situation should be
used heavily and thoroughly.

There are many such lists - Green Form, LIB, L4, etc.

They are available in HCO B form and are themselves
corrected and re-issued from time to time. They can be
found in HCO B 5 July AD 13 and others.

There are FOUR WAYS TO USE these prepared lists.

1. The auditor starts at the top and takes up each read
until he gets one to F/N.

In this case the auditor does not do "Itsa earlier Itsa".
He just cleans each read.

2. The auditor starts from the top and on each read cleans
it and does Itsa earlier Itsa to F/N or to a clean no-read
and goes on.

3. The auditor assesses the list down until he gets a heavy
read and cleans that, using Itsa Earlier Itsa. Then he can
go on to the next heavy read, cleans that. Etc. to F/N. In 
this case he can get several F/Ns on the same list.

4. The whole list is rapidly assessed over and over until
one item stays in and that is given to the pc.


UPSET PC

When a pc is very upset and misemotional the action in 4.
above is the only one to use as it is the safest. On a very
upset or antagonistic pc don't engage in any chatter, just
grab a list and assess it, and indicate the By-Passed
Charge. The results are usually magical.


REPAIR

Repairing a case fully, as done in Qual or in an HGC where
the person has led an out-rud life Method 3 above is the
one to use. Various and assorted lists can be employed.


SETTING UP

The best way to set up a case for auditing a major action
is to Repair it.

This can be necessary before the person is ever audited at
all on any major action such as Dianetics or grades.

Such an action can go on and on and should. The action is
to bleed the list of all possible use, using 3.

This is a new discovery I have made.


AUDITING REPAIR

Auditing repair usually uses methods I or (for pcs upset
from lists) 4.


ERROR IN USING LISTS

The major error in using prepared lists is not to really
get full use out of the list.

In using lists don't be in a great hurry or do a superficial job.

The list is for the pc, not a statistic.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:kjm.ka.rd
Copyright (c)1970
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
071. HCOB 23 SEP 68 VIOLATION OF THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 23 SEPTEMBER 1968

Class VIII


VIOLATION OF THE LAWS OF LISTING AND NULLING


Rudiments (ARC Bks, PTPs, M/W/Hs) are usually not necessary
in correcting a list as a wrong list usually is the ARC Bk
and PTP.

To correct a list ask the pc or pre-OT:

I) "Is it an incomplete list?" If it is, extend it and find
the item.

(2) "Was it the first item on the list?" If so, indicate
item to pc or pre-.

(3) "Was it an unnecessary action?" (dead horse). If so,
indicate it.

(4) "Had you not answered the listing question?" If so,
re-clear question and if it reads list it.

The 4 basic reasons for a wrong list are here:-(

1) It was the first item.

(2) It is not a complete list.

(3) The question didn't read (which causes a dead horse).

(4) The pc didn't answer the question.


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH :jp
Copyright (c) 1968
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
072. BTB 7 NOV 72R r. 28 Jul 74 L&N LISTS


BOARD TECHNICAL BULLETIN

7 NOVEMBER 1972R
Issue III
Revised & Reissued 28 July 1974 as BTB
(Revision in this type style)
CANCELS HCO BULLETIN OF 7 NOVEMBER 1972
Issue III SAME TITLE

Remimeo


Auditor Admin Series 18R

L&N LISTS


An L&N List (Listing and Nulling List) is a list of Items
given by a pc in response to a Listing Question and written
down by the Auditor in the exact sequence that they are
given to him by the preclear.

An L&N List is always done on a separate sheet.

It's best to do an L&N List on faint-lined paper.

The pc's name and date are put on the top of the sheet.

The listing question is written out, usually before the
start of session.

When the listing question is checked the read is marked by
the question (sF, F, LF, LFBD). If Suppress or Inval is
used that is also noted.

As each item is given by the pc the reads are marked - sF, F,
LF, LFBD. This is done AS YOU LIST. If the item does not
read you mark it with an X.

TA is noted periodically as the pc lists, and especially
when the TA rises.

The LFBD F/N item is circled. If indicated to the pc it is
marked IND.

When extending a list a line is drawn from where it has
been extended with the date.

Example: Item Joe X

Shoes sF

Socks X

________________Ext 24.2.72

Sky X

Wax X

Pigs etc. etc..

L&N Lists are never stapled to the W/S but are
paper-clipped under the session reports.


CORRECTING L&N LISTS

Old lists are NOT TO BE COPIED.

They are to be corrected in their original form but using a
different colored pen to show what has been done - always
date new uses of these lists also using the same color pen
as used for renulling or addition to them.

When a list is pulled forward to correct it, a sheet of
paper is left at that date giving the data of the Listing
Question and the date it is pulled forward to, so it can be
easily located.

The corrected lists are left with the session reports of
the session in which they were corrected. A note in red is
made in the F/S of this correction.


R3RING AN L&N ITEM

If an L&N Item is later R3Red it should be so noted on the
list by adding: "R3R TRIPLED (date)".


References: HCO B 30 Sept 68 "Lists"
HCO B 19 Sept 68 "Old Lists"
HCO B 7 May 69 "Summary of How to Write an Auditor's Report"
BTB 20 Aug 70R "Two Complete Differences Assessment - Listing and Nulling"

Compiled by:
Training & Services Bur

Revised & Reissued as BTB
by Flag Mission 1234
I/C: CPO Andrea Lewis
2nd: Molly Harlow
Authorized by AVU
for the
BOARDS OF DIRECTORS
of the CHURCHES OF SCIENTOLOGY

BDCS:SW:AL:MH:MM:mh.rd
Copyright (c) 1972, 1974
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
073. HCOB 29 SEP 68R r. 31 MAY 80 LIST CORRECTION - THE SHORT L4


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 29 SEPTEMBER 1968R
REVISED & REISSUED 31 MAY 1980
(Changes not in Script)

Class III and 
above


LIST CORRECTION - THE SHORT L4


(Only valid for a list recently done)

This list is the shorter version of the standard L4BRA. Its
use is for sorting out the error in a current listing and
nulling action or on a recently done L&N list. It contains
the most common errors that foul up L&N actions. Its virtue
is in its brevity which itself can increase results by
pinpointing the error quickly, thus enabling the auditor to
handle it quickly.

Assess the list M5.

If the situation does not resolve completely use an L4BRA.


1. WAS IT THE FIRST ITEM ON THE LIST?
(Indicate and give pc his item.)

2. WAS THE LIST INCOMPLETE?
(Complete the list and give the pc his item.)

3. WAS THE ITEM BYPASSED?
(Locate which one.)

4. WAS THE ITEM SUPPRESSED?
(If so, the list may have to be nulled with Suppress, the
nulling question being "On (item) has anything been
suppressed?". Rehab the item by getting the Suppress button
in on the item if necessary and clean it up and give it to
the pc again.)

5. WAS THE ITEM INVALIDATED?
(If so, the list may have to be nulled with Invalidate, the
nulling question being "On (item) has anything been
invalidated?". Rehab the item by getting the Invalidate
button in on the item if necessary and clean it up and give
it to the pc again.)

6. WAS THE QUESTION MEANINGLESS?
(If so, check for MUs on the question. If question still
meaningless indicate it to the pc.) 

7. WAS THE LIST OVERLISTED?
(If so, indicate the list was overlisted. Get the item by
nulling the list with Suppress, the nulling question being
"On has anything been suppressed?" for each item on the
overlong list. Give the pc his item.)

8. WERE ITEMS THOUGHT OF THAT WEREN'T PUT DOWN?
(Add them to the list. Renull the whole list and give the
pc his item.)

9. WAS IT LISTED OUT OF SESSION?
(Reconstruct the list from recall and add the items to the
list. Get the item and give it to the pc.) 

10. WAS THE ITEM DIFFERENT WHEN SAID BY THE AUDITOR?
(Find out what the item was and give it to the pc correctly.)

11. WAS THE ITEM NOT GIVEN TO YOU?
(Find what the item is, clean it up with Suppress and
Invalidate and give it to the pc.) 


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:jp:de:bk 
Copyright (c)1968, 1980 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
_


FREEZONE BIBLE ASSOCIATION TECH POST

A 1982 SOLO COURSE PACK - 7 of 7

**************************************************

SOLO AUDITOR'S COURSE PACK

CONTENTS

[full contents in part 1]

Part 7/7

074. HCOB 15 DEC 68RA r. 11 Apr 77 L4BRA
075. HCOB 26 APR 71 TRs AND COGNITION'S
076. HCOB 26 APR 71 SOLO COGNITION'S
077. HCOB 30 APR 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE
078. HCOB 5 DEC 79 ...THE COMM CYCLE ... IN SOLO AUDITING
079. HCOB 22 JUL 71R r. 8 Mar 82 SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN
080. HCOB 9 JUL 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION
081. HCOB 6 DEC 79R r. 22 SEP 80 SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS
082. NEW SOLO AUDITORS COURSE Part B
083. HCOB 30 SEP 81R r. 30 Jan 82 STD. C/S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SOLO...
084. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 0 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 0
085. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 1 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 1
086. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 2 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 2
087. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 3R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 3R
088. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 4 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 4
089. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 5 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 5
090. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 6 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 6
091. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 7 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 7
092. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 8 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 8
093. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 9 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 9
094. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 10 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 10
095. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 11 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 11
096. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 12R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 12R


[Note that some items appear again in a later section of the 
checksheet and are only included once in this pack]

**************************************************

STATEMENT OF PURPOSE 

Our purpose is to promote religious freedom and the Scientology
Religion by spreading the Scientology Tech across the internet.

The Cof$ abusively suppresses the practice and use of
Scientology Tech by FreeZone Scientologists. It misuses the
copyright laws as part of its suppression of religious freedom.

They think that all freezoner's are "squirrels" who should be
stamped out as heritics. By their standards, all Christians, 
Moslems, Mormons, and even non-Hassidic Jews would be considered
to be squirrels of the Jewish Religion.

The writings of LRH form our Old Testament just as the writings
of Judiasm form the Old Testament of Christianity.

We might not be good and obedient Scientologists according
to the definitions of the Cof$ whom we are in protest against.

But even though the Christians are not good and obedient Jews,
the rules of religious freedom allow them to have their old 
testament regardless of any Jewish opinion. 

We ask for the same rights, namely to practice our religion
as we see fit and to have access to our holy scriptures
without fear of the Cof$ copyright terrorists.

We ask for others to help in our fight. Even if you do
not believe in Scientology or the Scientology Tech, we hope
that you do believe in religious freedom and will choose
to aid us for that reason.

Thank You,

The FZ Bible Association

**************************************************

074. HCOB 15 DEC 68RA r. 11 Apr 77 L4BRA


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 15 DECEMBER 1968RA
(Amends HCO Bulletin of 9 January 1968 List L4A)
(ITEM 6 CORRECTED 12 FEBRUARY 1969)
(Amended 8 August l970) (Amended 18 March 1971)
(Revised 2 June 72) (Re-revised 11 April 1977)
(revisions in this type style)

Remimeo


L4BRA


FOR ASSESSMENT OF ALL LISTING ERRORS


ASSESS THE WHOLE LIST (METHOD 5) THEN TAKE biggest reads or BDs
and handle. Then clean up the list.


PC'S NAME:_____________________________________DATE:_______________

AUDITOR: ______________________________________


0. WAS IT THE FIRST ITEM ON THE LIST?

(Indicate and give pc his item.)

1. DID YOU FAIL TO ANSWER THE LISTING QUESTION?

(If it reads, find out what question, clear the question
noting whether it reads, if so, list it, find the item and
give it to the pc.)


2. WAS THE LIST UNNECESSARY?

(If it reads, indicate BPC and indicate that it was an
unnecessary action.) 


2A. DID THE QUESTION HAVE NO CHARGE ON IT?

(Indicate)


2B. WERE YOU ASHAMED TO CAUSE AN UPSET?

(L1C after list corrected.)


2C. WERE YOU AMAZED TO REACT THAT WAY?

(Same as 2B.)


2D. THE QUESTION HAD ALREADY BEEN LISTED BEFORE.

(Indicate, rehab.)


2E. YOU HAD NO INTEREST IN THE QUESTION?

(Indicate that the auditor missed that it didn't read.)


3. WAS THE ACTION DONE UNDER PROTEST?

(If it reads, handle by itsa earlier similar itsa.)


4. IS A LIST INCOMPLETE?

(If reads, find out what list and complete it, give the pc
his item.)


5. HAS A LIST BEEN LISTED TOO LONG?

(If so, find what list and get the item from it by nulling
with Suppress, the nulling question being: "On has anything
been suppressed?" for each item on the overlong list. Give
the pc his item.)


6. HAS THE WRONG ITEM BEEN TAKEN OFF A LIST?

(If this reads, put in Suppress and Invalidated on the list
and null as in 5 above and find the right item and give to
the pc.)


7. HAS A RIGHT ITEM BEEN DENIED YOU?

(If this reads, find out what it was and clean it up with
Suppress and Invalidate and give it to the pc.)


8. HAS AN ITEM BEEN PUSHED OFF ON YOU YOU DIDN'T WANT?

(If so, find it and get in Suppress and Invalidate on it
and tell pc it wasn't his item and continue the original
action to find the correct item.)


9. HAD AN ITEM NOT BEEN GIVEN YOU?

(If reads, handle as in 7.)


10. HAVE YOU INVALIDATED A CORRECT ITEM FOUND?

(If so, rehab the item and find out why the pc invalidated
it or if somebody else did it, clean it up and give it to
pc again.)


11. HAVE YOU THOUGHT OF ITEMS THAT YOU DID NOT PUT ON THE LIST?

(If so, add them to the correct list. Renull the whole list
and give the pc the item ) 


12. HAVE YOU BEEN LISTING TO YOURSELF OUT OF SESSION?

(If so, find out what question and try to write a list from
recall and get an item and give it to the pc.)


13. HAVE YOU BEEN GIVEN SOMEBODY ELSE'S ITEM?

(If so, indicate to the pc this was not his item. Don't try
to find whose it was.) 


14. HAS YOUR ITEM BEEN GIVEN TO SOMEONE ELSE?

(If so, find if possible what item it was and give it to
the pc. Don't try to identify the "somebody else.")


14A. WERE EARLIER LISTING ERRORS RESTIMULATED?

(Indicate and correct earlier lists then check the current.)


14B. HAD THIS LIST ALREADY BEEN HANDLED?

(Indicate. )


15. HAS A RELEASE POINT BEEN BYPASSED ON LISTING?

(If so, indicate the overrun to the pc, rehab back.)


16. HAS A RELEASE POINT BEEN BYPASSED ON THE QUESTION ONLY?

(If so, indicate the overrun to the pc and rehab back.)


17. HAVE YOU GONE EXTERIOR WHILE LISTING?

(If so, rehab. If Ext Rundown not given, note for C/S.)


18. HAS IT BEEN AN OVERT TO PUT AN ITEM ON A LIST?

(If so, find out what item and why.)


19. HAVE YOU WITHHELD AN ITEM FROM A LIST?

(If so, get it and add it to the list if that list
available. If not put item in the report ) 


20. HAS A WITHHOLD BEEN MISSED?

(If so, get it, if discreditable ask "Who nearly found out?")


21. HAS AN ITEM BEEN BYPASSED?

(Locate which one.)


22. WAS A LISTING QUESTION MEANINGLESS?

(If so, find out which one and indicate to the pc.)


23. HAS AN ITEM BEEN ABANDONED?

(If so, locate it and get it back for the pc and give it to him.)


24. HAS AN ITEM BEEN PROTESTED?

(If so, locate it and get the Protest button in on it.)


25. HAS AN ITEM BEEN ASSERTED?

(If so, locate it and get in the Assert button on it.)


26. HAS AN ITEM BEEN SUGGESTED TO YOU BY ANOTHER?

(If so, get it named and the Protest and Refusal off.)


27. HAS AN ITEM BEEN VOLUNTEERED BY YOU AND NOT ACCEPTED?

(If so, get off the charge and give it to the pc, or if he
then changes his mind on it, go on with the listing operation.)


28. HAS THE ITEM ALREADY BEEN GIVEN?

(If so, get it back and give it again.)


29. HAS AN ITEM BEEN FOUND PREVIOUSLY?

(If so, find what it was again and give it to the pc once more.)


30. HAS AN ITEM NOT BEEN UNDERSTOOD?

(If so, work it over with buttons until pc understands it
or accepts rejects it and go on with listing.)


30A. WAS THE LISTING QUESTION NOT UNDERSTOOD?

(Get defined and check for read. It may be unreading. If
so, indicate that an uncharged question was listed because
it read on a misunderstood.)


30B. WAS A WORD IN THE QUESTION NOT UNDERSTOOD?

(Same as 30A.)


31. WAS AN ITEM DIFFERENT WHEN SAID BY THE AUDITOR?

(If so, find out what the item was and give it to the pc
correctly.)


31A DID THE AUDITOR SUGGEST ITEMS TO YOU THAT WERE NOT YOURS?

(Indicate as illegal to do so. Correct the list removing these.)


32. WAS NULLING CARRIED ON PAST THE FOUND ITEM?

(If so, go back to it and get in Suppress and Protest.)


33. HAS AN ITEM BEEN FORCED ON YOU?

(If so, get off the Reject and Suppress and get the listing
action completed to the right item if possible.)


34. HAS AN ITEM BEEN EVALUATED?

(If so, get off the Disagreement and Protest.)


35. HAD EARLIER LISTING BEEN RESTIMULATED?

(If so, locate when and indicate the bypassed charge. Find
and correct the earlier out list. )


36. HAS AN EARLIER WRONG ITEM BEEN RESTIMULATED?

(If so, find when and indicate the bypassed charge. Find
and correct the earlier out list.)


37. HAS AN EARLIER ARC BREAK BEEN RESTIMULATED?

(If so, locate and indicate the fact by itsa earlier similar itsa.)


38. DO YOU HAVE AN ARC BREAK BECAUSE OF BEING MADE TO DO THIS?

(If so, indicate it to the pc. Handle the ARC break.
Correct the list if it's a list ARC break.)


39. HAS THE LIST CORRECTION BEEN OVERRUN?

(If so, rehab.)


39A WAS THE LIST DONE WHILE YOU ALREADY HAD AN ARC BRK, PTP OR
W/H?


39B. COULDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND WHAT WAS BEING DONE?


39C. COULDN'T YOU UNDERSTAND THE AUDITOR?


39D. DIDN'T THE AUDITOR ACKNOWLEDGE YOU?


40. IS THERE SOME OTHER KIND OF BYPASSED CHARGE?

(If so, find what and indicate it to pc.)


41. WAS THERE NOTHING WRONG IN THE FIRST PLACE?

(If so, indicate it to pc.)


42. HAS THE UPSET BEEN HANDLED?

(If so, indicate it to the pc.)


43. HAS A LIST PROCESS BEEN OVERRUN?

(If so, find which one and rehab.)


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

Assisted by CS-4/5

LRH:JE:ldm.rw.dz.rr.nt.dr 
Copyright (c) 1968. 1972. 1976. 1977 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED 


========================
075. HCOB 26 APR 71 TRs AND COGNITION'S


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 26 APRIL 1971
Issue I

Remimeo
Dn Checksheet
Scn Grades Checksheet
Qual Cramming
HGC Auditors


TRs AND COGNITION'S


In the presence of rough TRs cognition's do not occur.

Cognition's are the milestones of case gain.

Rough TRs, rough metering, Out Code and a distractive
auditor then make no case gain.

When an auditor has smooth, usual TRs, does his metering
expertly and without attracting the pc's attention, when he
follows the Auditor's Code (particularly regarding
Evaluation and Invalidation) and when he is interested, not
interesting as an auditor, the pc cognites and makes case
gains.

Further, according to the axioms, a bank straightens out by
AS-ISING its content.

If the pc's attention is distracted to the auditor and
meter his attention is not on his bank so AS-ISING cannot
occur.

The definition of In Session is INTERESTED IN OWN CASE AND
WILLING TO TALK TO THE AUDITOR. When this definition describes 
the session in progress, then of course the pc will be able to
AS-IS and will cognite.

By "The Original Thesis", the auditor plus the pc is
greater than the pc's bank. When the auditor plus the bank
are both overwhelming the pc then the bank seems greater
than the pc. It is this situation which gives a pc a low
Tone Arm.

An auditor who can't be heard, doesn't ack, doesn't give
the pc the next command, fails to handle origins simply has
OUT-TRs.

The auditor who is trying to be interesting to the pc, who
over-acks, who laughs loudly, is putting the pc's attention
onto himself. So the pc's attention, not being on his bank,
doesn't as-is or cognite.

The auditor whose metering by-passes F/Ns or calls F/Ns at
wrong points, or who tells the pc "That reads" "That blew
down" etc., or who any other way uses the meter
distractingly (the pc knows when he is being under or over
run and knows when he is being mismetered), is of course
violating the definition of IN-SESSION. The pc's attention
goes to the meter, not his bank, so he doesn't AS-IS or
cognite.

Auditor Invalidation and Evaluation is just plain villainy.
It interferes with pc cognition's. Other Code breaks are
similarly distractive.


A PERFECT SESSION

If you understand the exact definition of IN-SESSION, if
you understand the pc's necessity to have his attention on
his bank so as to AS-IS it and work out what is really
going on in a session that brings about a cognition
(as-ising aberration with a realization about life), you
will then be able to spot all the things in TRs, metering
and the Code that would prevent case gain.

Once you see that out-TRs, mis-metering and Code breaks
would PREVENT the IN-SESSION definition you will see what
would impede a pc from AS-ISing and Cogniting

When you have this figured out you will then be able to see
clearly what are IN-TRs, CORRECT METERING and CORRECT CODE
APPLICATION.

There can be an infinity of wrongnesses. There are only a
few rightnesses.

Recognition of Right TRs, right Metering and right Code use
depend only on (a) Understanding the principles in this
HCOB, and

(b) Their practice so as to establish habit.

This mastered, one's pcs will get cognition's and case gain
and swear by "their auditor" !


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH: mes.rd
Copyright (c) 1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
076. HCOB 26 APR 71 SOLO COGNITION'S


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 26 APRIL 1971
ISSUE II

ALL AD COURSES
Include this and
HCO B 26 Apr 7t1
Issue I in Solo
Course Packs and
on Checksheets.


SOLO COGNITION'S


In HCO B 26 April 1971 Issue I, the definitions and
conditions in an audited session are described.

The definition of In-Session also applies to Solo Auditing.

If the solo auditor is so all-thumbs with his papers,
meters, platens that they distract him from his own bank he
is not likely to as-is or cognite.

Recently, on Flag, we have taken failed IIIs and put them
back through a full heavy re-train on R6EW and then pushed
them back up the line with good success.

When a solo auditor is also a rabbit (runs from everything
including his bank) he has no chance to overcome it if he
is all thumbs with his tools.

Requiring arduous, perfect drills on Solo metering and
auditing actions at R6EW level should occur before the pc
sees any materials. He must first and foremost be a Solo
Auditor, familiar with his meters and papers to such a
degree that they do not in any way distract him.

Only then can you add a bank to the scene.

A poor solo auditor does not cognite as his attention is on
the tools not his bank.

Where the Solo auditor fails, he has not learned his tools.
The remedy is to make him learn them.

The bridge between II and III is sometimes a hard one. It
may be that an HDC course is vital before the pre- can make
this bridge.

The Solo Auditor who "attests" rather than confront his
bank probably never learned to use his auditing tools in
the first place. Then, adding the bank as something to
confront results in confusion.

Cognition's in Solo Auditing depend upon the ability to use
the tools of auditing so well, they serve no distraction in
Solo Session.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:mes
Copyright (c) 1971
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
077. HCOB 30 APR 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 30 APRIL 1971

Remimeo
HDC Checksht
Cse Sup Checksht
Class 0 Checksht 
Cramming


AUDITING COMM CYCLE


(Reference HCO B 26 Apr 71 TRs AND COGNITION'S)

The following AUDITING comm cycle is taken from SHSBC tapes.

An auditor runs the session. He gives the pc the session
action without pulling the pc's attention heavily on the
auditor. He does not leave the pc inactive or floundering
without anything to do. He does not leave the pc to make a
session out of it. The auditor makes the session. He
doesn't wait for the pc to run down like a clock or just
sit there while the TA soars after an F/N.

The auditor runs the session. He knows what to do for
everything that can happen.

And this is the Auditing Comm cycle that is always in use.

1. Is the pc ready to receive the command? (appearance, presence)

2. Auditor gives command/question to pc (cause, distance, effect).

3. Pc looks to bank for answer (Itsa maker line).

4. Pc receives answer from bank.

5. Pc gives answer to auditor (cause, distance, effect).

6. Auditor acknowledges pc.

7. Auditor sees that pc received ack (attention).

8. New cycle beginning with (1).


L. RON HUBBARD
Founder

LRH:mes.rd 
Copyright (c) 1971 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
078. HCOB 5 DEC 79 ...THE COMM CYCLE ... IN SOLO AUDITING


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 5 DECEMBER 1979
(Cancels and replaces BTB 1.2.1971 IV Rev. & Reiss. 2.7.74 
as BTB THE COMM CYCLE IN SOLO AUDITING.)

Remimeo
AOs ONLY
Solo Auditor 
Course 


THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE COMM CYCLE IN REGULAR

AUDITING AND CYCLES OF ACTION IN SOLO AUDITING


References:
HCOB 26 Apr 71 I TRs AND COGNITION'S
HCOB 26 Apr 71 II SOLO COGNITION'S
HCOB 30 Apr 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE


There is a difference between regular auditing (where the
auditor and pc are two separate persons), and Solo
auditing. One does not have to be skilled in Auditor's TRs
0-IV in order to be a good Solo auditor . A Solo auditor's
skills are covered in HCOB 26 Apr 71 II, SOLO COGNITION'S.
TRs 0-IV and the Auditing Comm Cycle apply to regular
auditing where the auditor and pc are two separate people.
The idea that a Solo auditor would have to mock himself up
as "the auditor" and mock himself up as "the pc" is
erroneous. Nor does the Solo auditor have to try to be two
different. people, nor does Solo auditing consists of
"talking to oneself".

In order to understand Solo auditing better, read and
demonstrate each of the following definitions until you
understand each of them:

Auditing Comm Cycle: "This is the auditing comm cycle that
is always in use: 1) is the pc ready to receive the
command? (appearance, presence); 2) auditor gives
command/question to pc (cause, distance, effect), 3) pc
looks to bank for answer (itsa maker line, 4) pc receives
answer from bank, 5) pc gives answer to auditor (cause,
distance, effect), 6) auditor acknowledges pc, 7) auditor
sees that pc received ack (attention), 8) new cycle
beginning with (1)" (HCOB 30 Apr 71 AUDITING COMM CYCLE)

Auditing Cycle: The basic of auditing is an auditing cycle
which operates as an attention director.

Call it restimulator if you want, but it's an attention
director, eliciting a response from the pc to as-is that
area and who knows he has done so when he receives from the
practitioner an acknowledgment that it has occurred. That
i~ the auditing cycle. " (SH Spec 189, 6209C18) 2.

"There are basically two communication cycles between the
auditor and the pc that make up the auditing cycle. They
are cause, distance, effect with the auditor at cause and
the pc at effect, and cause, distance, effect, with the pc
at cause and the auditor at effect . These are completely
distinct one from the other. " (HCOB 23 May 71R IV, Rev . 4
.12 . 74 Basic Auditing Series 4R COMMUNICATION CYCLES
WITHIN THE AUDITING CYCLE )

Communication Cycle: 1. "A cycle of communication and
two-way communication are actually two different things. A
cycle of communication is not a two-way communication in
its entirety.

In a cycle of communication we have Joe as the originator
of a communication addressed to Bill.

We find Bill receiving it and then Bill originating an
answer or acknowledgment back to Joe and thus ends the
cycle." (DIANETICS 55! page 82) . "A communication cycle
consists of just cause, distance, effect with intention, 
attention, duplication and understanding. " (HCOB 23 May 71R IV, 
Rev. 4 .12.74 Basic Auditing Series 4R COMMUNICATION CYCLES 
WITHIN THE AUDITING CYCLE) 

Cycle of Action: l. "The sequence that an action goes
through, where in the action is started, is continued for
as long as is required and then is completed as planned."
(Scientology Abridged Dictionary )

(The definitions above are taken from the Technical Dictionary.)

In Solo auditing the Auditing Question or Auditing Command
is provided in the materials.

The Solo auditor has to ensure that he understands the
Auditing Question or Auditing Command, gets the answer to
the question or carries out the command, and recognizes
that he has done so and completes that cycle. Solo auditing
mainly consists of carrying out cycles of action. This is
easy to do as these are given in the materials, and it
consists of doing what the materials say to do.

VERBALIZATION

The Solo auditor does not verbalize questions or commands
in solo auditing. It is done on a thought or intention
level. There is a solo auditing action in which the Solo
auditor calls items verbally, but otherwise solo auditing
is not verbalized.

METER ERROR

In Solo auditing the meter, worksheets and materials must
be arranged so that the solo auditor can read the meter at
the same time as he reads the question or item in the
materials. This is because the question or item will read
on the meter when the solo auditor reads the question or
item in the materials. One should not ignore the meter read
when first reading the question or item in the materials.
This is especially true when checking reads on Ruds, or
doing a BPC Assessment, as the read might not repeat. The
initial read when the question or item is first read and
understood by the Solo auditor is taken. This is because
the read occurs when the Solo auditor thinks the question
or concept of the item.

Another meter error could occur if the Solo auditor didn't
understand the question or item.

You could get a reaction because the question or item was
misunderstood. And if the question or item is
misunderstood, then you wouldn't be able to audit it.
Therefore it is very important that the Solo auditor knows
to clear the meanings of words in auditing commands and items.

SOLO DRILLS

The Solo Drills are designed to familiarize the Solo
auditor with the tools of Solo auditing, and to become
skilled so that when the time comes to start Solo auditing,
he can put his full attention on the auditing and thus be
fully in session.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:DM:dr
Copyright (c) 1979
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
079. HCOB 22 JUL 71R r. 8 Mar 82 SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 22 JULY 1971R
ISSUE II
REVISED 22 FEBRUARY 1981
CORRECTED & REISSUED 8 MARCH 1982
(Cancels & replaces HCOB 12 Apr 70, SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN, 
deleting references to Fast Flow.)
(This bulletin has been revised to update and align it with HCOB
9 July 80, Solo Series #1, CHECK LIST FOR SETTING UP A
SOLO SESSION.)
(Revisions Not in Script)
(Reissued 8 March 82 to delete "Confidential" on the issue as
there is nothing confidential in this issue.)

All Solo 
Auditors 
Solo Auditor 
Course Checksheet 
R6EW Course 
Checksheet
CC and 
Courses


SOLO AUDITOR ADMIN


Ref: HCOB 9 Jul 1980, Solo Series #1, CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP 
A SOLO SESSION

The simple invariable procedure for Solo Auditor admin is
now thoroughly covered in HCOB 9 Jul 1980, Solo Series #1,
CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION.

The following advices supplement that issue and are for use
by Solo Auditors on any level of Advanced Courses.

1. Always provide yourself with a safe auditing environment.

2. All the steps of Solo Series #1 are to be done in each
Solo session.

3. Meter trim checks are done per HCOB 11 May 69R, Rev.
8.7.78, METER TRIM CHECK.

4. Start each session with "Start of Session" and end it
with "End of Session".

5. Keep a proper record of what is done during the session
on your worksheets.

6. Lock Solo folder away in a safe place when not auditing.
Think about something else and get on with living.

7, Keep Standard Tech in, report daily, follow the correct
routing lines, KEEP EXCELLENT SECURITY.

8. When complete on a Level, report to the examiner with
all your materials and folder. Turn these in to the
examiner. You will be further routed from there.

Good luck!

L RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:RTCU:dz:kjm:bk 
Copyright (c) 1971, 1981, 1982 
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
080. HCOB 9 JUL 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 9 JULY 1980

Solo Auditor
Checksheet
Solo Course
Supervisor


Solo Series #1

CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION

(Ref: HCOB 26 Apr 71 II, SOLO COGNITION'S)


The following checklist is based on refinements in Solo
procedure developed to enable a Solo Auditor to be able to
set up for a session, and be able to audit without
distractions during the session. Drill this checklist until
you can do it easily and rapidly. (NOTE: As use of a Mark
VI E-Meter is recommended for Solo auditing, checklist
items #12, 13 and 34 are included to cover Mark VI operation.)

l. Choose a room to audit where you won't be interrupted.

2. Hang an "In-session" sign on the door.

3. Set up the card table (auditing table) and chair.

4. Set up the Mark VI on the table.

5. Place a paper stack of legal length paper on the right
back corner of the table (parallel with the meter and back
edge Or the table).

6. Place a couple of sheets of paper alongside the meter in
an easy writing position (to use as worksheets).

7. Put two ball-points on the table within easy reach (one
of these is a spare).

8. Place a pocket stapler on the paper stack.

9. Place correction lists and materials on the table behind
the meter, parallel with the far edge of the table.

10. Sit down.

11. Check the meter charge by turning the knob to "Test".

12. If it is not charged, plug in the charging lead to the
meter and mains. Note that the charging light comes on
showing that current is flowing.

13. Press the date button (below the clock dial) to get the date.

14. Write the date and year across the top center of the worksheet.

15. Make a small vertical bar down from the center of the
date to divide the worksheet into two columns (the bar
should be about 2 inches long).

16. Turn the meter on (if not already on).

17. Make sure the can jack is disconnected.

18. Put the TA at 2.0 exactly.

19. Put the needle on "Set" with the Trim knob.

20. Write the Trim check on the worksheet (2.0 = 2.0) at
the top of column l of the worksheet.

21. Note the time on the worksheet, under "2.0 = 2.0" and
to the left (time includes A for AM., P for PM.).

22. Push in the can jack.

23. Take up the cans. (Separated, insulator in left can top.)

24. With your knuckle and without letting go of the cans,
move the TA up until the needle is at "Set".

25. Write the two can TA read in the right edge of the
column (opposite the time) with a (2) after it (e.g. 2.5(2)).

26. Put the right hand can together with the left hand can
to make it a one hand electrode.

27. Grasp the one hand electrode so your hand area is equal
on both cans.

28. Put an insulator (such as a sheet of plastic) on your
left knee.

29. Put your left hand holding the cans on your left knee
(knuckles down, cans up).

30. With the TA put the needle at "Set".

31. Write the one hand electrode TA read on the worksheet
(in the right edge of column), with a (l) after it (e.g. 3.4(1)).

32. Squeeze the cans for Sensitivity setting, and adjust it
until the needle goes from "Set" to approximately the left
hand line of "Test" on can squeeze.

33. Write down the Sensitivity setting on the worksheet
just below the time (e.g. Sens-3.8).

34. Press the button to set the TA counter at zero, and
write down 0 TA just under the TA read for one hand electrode.

35. Metabolism test: Take a deep breath and let it out
through your mouth. Write down the Metabolism test in the
left side of the column (about opposite 0 TA), in inches,
e.g. "Metab l", which would mean that the Metabolism test
gave a one inch fall (and the Metabolism test should be at
least a one inch fall in order to audit).

The Solo Auditor is now set up to audit and would begin
with "Start of Session", written S of S on the worksheet
under the Metabolism test and "0 TA" notations.

___________


The rest of this checklist gives the procedure for ending
off a Solo session.

36. Write the time at the left side of the column (time
includes A for AM., P for PM.).

37. Write the TA counter reading at the right edge of
column, e.g. 1.3 TA (which means 1.3 divisions of TA action).

38. Write the TA read for one hand electrode in the right
edge of the column (e.g. 2.9(1)).

39. Take the cans apart and get a two can read, by
adjusting the TA so the needle comes to "Set" using your
knuckle (as in #24).

40. Write the two can TA read in the right edge of the
column under the one hand electrode read (e.g.

41. Unplug your can Jack.

42. Bring the needle to set using the TA. (Note that the TA
counter reading is taken before going back to two cans, or
you would get a false TA action count.)

43. Note the Trim check in the worksheet. (It should be 2.0
- 2.0, as before. But whatever the TA read is note it, as
it would show that the Trim had gone o~ during the session,
giving false TA reads.) The Trim check 18 written in the
center of the worksheet column.

44. Turn the meter off and write "M off" under the Trim
check (otherwise you could leave the meter on and come back
to a flat meter).

45. End of with "End of Session" and write E of S at the
bottom of the worksheet column.

46. If you used more than one sheet of worksheet paper,
staple them together.

47. Put the worksheets in your Solo folder. (The latest
session always goes on top.) 48. Put the folder in an
envelope flash marked for Advanced Courses.

49. Take down the "In-session" sign.

50. Get an after session exam and put it in your folder.

51. Send the folder to the Case Supervisor (or store it
securely if the C/S has okayed you to run several sessions
between submissions).

_______________

Drill this checklist to accurate rapidity.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

LRH:dr
Copyright (c)1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
081. HCOB 6 DEC 79R r. 22 SEP 80 SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 6 DECEMBER 1979R
REVISED 22 SEPTEMBER 1980
(Cancels and replaces BTB 12 Dec 71R, Rev. 12.3.72,
Reiss 25.7.74 as BTB "Solo TRs 1-4 Revised",
and BTB 12 Dec 71R, Amended & Reiss as BTB 28.6.75, III,
"Solo Meter Drills".)

Remimeo
AOs
Solo Auditors 
Course 
ONLY 
Auditors 


SOLO AUDITOR DRILLS


(Reference: The Book of E-Meter Drills
HCOB 9 Jul 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION. )

These Solo Auditor Drills replace what was formerly called
"Solo Auditors TRs", which tended to train a Solo auditor
into the idea of "talking to himself" or verbalizing
everything in Solo auditing and that is incorrect.

These drills are to train a Solo auditor to be able to do
the Solo auditing actions he will encounter on Solo levels.
These do not teach one to be able to audit pcs, nor do they
try to teach Auditor's TRs, (If you want to learn to be an
auditor, take the Auditor's Hard TRs Course and Academy and
SHSBC training.) If done thoroughly and until you can do
each drill easily, you will be able to Solo audit very
successfully.

These Solo Drills are done with a meter, worksheets,
auditing table and Solo can set-up as these would be in a
Solo session.


SOLO AUDITOR DRILL 1

NAME: SOLO CAN DRILL

PURPOSE: To train a Solo auditor to take Tone Arm readings
with two cans and with Solo can, and do a proper can
squeeze on a one-hand electrode.

POSITION: Solo auditor seated at an auditing table with
meter, cans and a copy of HCOB 9 Jul 80 CHECKLIST FOR
SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION and HCOB 14 Jul 70

SOLO CANS. The coach sits beside the student.

TRAINING STRESS: HCOB 9 Jul 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO

SESSION and HCOB 14 Jul 70 SOLO CANS are used as
references. The coach has the student set up the meter,
measure his TA reading with two cans and note it on the
worksheets per HCOB 14 Jul 70 SOLO CANS. The coach then has
the student change over to a Solo can set up and adjust TA
and note it on the worksheet. (TA notations are
to be done as shown in HCOB 14 Jul 70 to differentiate
between 2 can and Solo can readings.) The coach has the
student do this part of the drill until the student can do
it easily and rapidly.

The coach then has the student squeeze the can for
sensitivity setting, and adjust the sensitivity knob until
the needle goes from "set" to the left hand line of "Test"
on can squeeze. Do this drill until the student can do it
easily and without flub.


SOLO AUDITOR DRILL 2

NAME: SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION

PURPOSE: To train a Solo auditor to be able to set up for,
and end off a Solo session.

POSITION: Coach and student beside a card table (auditing
table) with a chair, legal length paper, Mark VI E-Meter,
cans, two ball-points, pocket stapler, correction lists and
materials and an insulator (such as a sheet of plastic) handy.

TRAINING STRESS: HCOB 9 Jul 80 CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO
SESSION is used as a reference. The coach has the student
set up a solo session exactly per HCOB 9 Jul 80. Steps 1-51
of the checklist are drilled until the student can easily
and rapidly set up a solo session, and end off a solo
session. (NOTE: The student Solo auditor is to set up the
materials for the session and use these in the remaining
drills.) 


SOLO AUDITOR DRILL 3

NAME: SOLO METERING

PURPOSE: To train a Solo auditor to read written material
and note whether the meter read.

POSITION: The student Solo auditor seated at a table set up
for a Solo session, with a copy of Book of E-Meter Drills.
The coach is seated beside the student where the coach can
also see the meter and worksheet.

TRAINING STRESS: The student Solo auditor sets up the meter
and Solo can and keeps a worksheet as in Solo Drill 1. Then
turns to one of the Prepared Assessment Lists in the back
of the Book of E-Meter Drills. He then places the list
where he can see the list and the needle. He places a blank
piece of paper over the list covering everything but the
first item on the list. The Solo auditor then reads the
first item on the list and notices if the meter reads on
the item. He continues down the list moving the blank piece
of paper as he goes.

When a read occurs, the Solo auditor informs the coach of
the item that read and what the read was. He then writes
the item and it's read on the worksheet. He also notes the
time and TA position. The coach verifies that the student
has done all of this correctly. Then the coach has the
student continue doing the drill. Various assessment lists
are used in this manner until the student can perform the
actions of reading written material and noting if it reads
and recording this on a worksheet. The coach's job is to
encourage the student and keep him at it until he can do it
easily.


SOLO AUDITOR DRILL 4

NAME: CLEARING WORDS

PURPOSE: To train the Solo auditor to clear the meanings of
words in auditing questions or commands.

POSITION: The student Solo auditor seated at a Solo
auditing session set-up (per Solo Drill 2), and the coach
seated beside the student so that the coach can also see
the meter and worksheets. A copy of HCOB 13 Oct 79
CONCEPTUAL UNDERSTANDING is placed on the table where the 
student Solo auditor can read it, and see the meter needle.

TRAINING STRESS: The student Solo auditor is to read the
HCOB and note when the meter reads, find and clear the
misunderstood word to F/N and keep worksheets. The Solo can
and Solo session set-up is used. The coach ensures that the
student Solo auditor does all of these actions. After this
HCOB is word cleared, another bulletin is used (it doesn't
matter which bulletin). This drill is done until the Solo
auditor can do it easily, and keep worksheets and operate
the meter. (Although the student may be fumbly at first,
the coach helps the student and encourages him until the
student has mastered it.) SOLO AUDITOR DRILL 5

NAME: SOLO CYCLE OF ACTION

PURPOSE: To train a Solo auditor in carrying out cycles of
action in Solo auditing to completion of that cycle, and to
end cycle on it.

POSITION: The Solo auditor seated at a table set up for a
Solo session with the coach seated beside him. The student
has a copy of the Book of E-Meter Drills opened to E~-20.

TRAINING STRESS: The student Solo auditor uses the list of
questions given in EM-20.

(The word "your" in the questions is changed to "my", and
the word "you" is changed to "I".) The student Solo auditor
writes the question down on the worksheet, changing the
wording as above, and notes whether the question read on
the meter. Then he silently answers the question and writes
down the answer. Then he acknowledges that that cycle is
complete. The coach then verifies that the student did each
step and whether the student is satisfied that he has done
so. This drill is passed when the student can carry out
this cycle without being distracted or Q & Aing, does
complete the cycle started and ends the cycle.

(The questions, answers and acknowledgments are done
silently and conceptually, not verbalized.)

_____________

The student Solo auditor now does the following Solo
E-Meter drills. The Solo session set-up, Solo cans are all
used as in preceding drills, and the student writes on a
worksheet. This is to keep familiarizing the Solo auditor
with the tools he will be using in Solo auditing. The
student must have completed the regular drills per the Book
of E-Meter Drills before attempting these drills. If the
student Solo auditor has difficulty with a drill done Solo,
he should return to the appropriate Solo Auditor drill, or
to the regular meter drill until he can do it easily. The
numbers within the drills are the numbers from the Book of
E-Meter Drills. The Solo E-Meter Drills are done silently.

Drills 1 to 7 are exactly as given in the Book of E-Meter
Drills and are not repeated here as a Solo action.

Also use HCOB 14 Jul 70 SOLO CANS for proper use of Solo cans.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 8: As for EM-8 except that student has
the bulletin on the table beside the meter. He holds the
electrodes (Solo cans) himself and observes the meter while
reading the bulletin.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 9: As for EM-9 except that student
auditor holds Solo cans and reads bulletin. Considerable
emphasis is on correct positioning of the meter,
worksheets, and reading material early in this drill. The
student should experiment with these positions for optimum
placement so as to see the meter at the same time as
reading and to avoid session distractions.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 10: As for EM-10. Additional notes as
for previous drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 11: As for EM-11 with student holding
Solo cans and reading silently from origination sheet.

E-METER DRILL 12: Omitted as a Solo drill.

E-METER DRILL 13: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 14: As for EM-14 but with student
holding Solo cans and reading bulletin.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 15: As for EM-15 but the student holding
the Solo cans and reading origination's to himself and
thinking the meaning of the origination conceptually.

Coach asks: "What did the needle do while reading the
line?" etc., as in the basic drill.

In this drill the student learns that the meter read will
occur when he reads the line and gets the concept, and
trains the student to be able to read a line and note the
meter reaction or lack of it, at the same time. Not read
the line and then look at the meter later.

It also trains the student that if he has his attention
locked on the meter and doesn't actually think the meaning
of the line, the meter won't read.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 16: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 17: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 18: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 19: As for EM-19, but with the student
Solo auditor holding the solo cans and the coach seated
beside him, observing. The drill is done silently. The
coach is to keep the student at it and asks commands as per
EM-19 until the student can do it easily and with certainty.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 20: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 21: As for EM-21 but student auditor
holding Solo cans.

In this drill done Solo the student auditor will of course
already know what he was thinking when the meter read.
However, the drill is done as given to show the Solo
student auditor that his thought will again produce the
same read when he again thinks the same thought.

It also illustrates the necessity for the Solo auditor to
keep his attention on the reading item or subject in order
to keep that item reading and further, when the thought is
repeated it shows how the read on that thought will
diminish and vanish as the charge is reduced by re-spotting
the original thought.

Therefore in the Solo drill there is a second step where
the student is required to repeatedly think the same
thought until the read no longer occurs and to note the
reads on a worksheet as they occur.

As this is an auditing technique used in certain Solo
levels when discharging items the drill must be well done
and continued to a high level of competence.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 22: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 23: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 24: As for EM-24 but the student holding
Solo cans and does the assessments on himself. (Only use
the assessments given in the Book of E-Meter Drills.)

SOLO E-METER DRILL 25: Omitted as a Solo drill.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 26: As for EM-26 but student holding Solo cans.

SOLO E-METER DRILL 27: Omitted as a Solo drill.


L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

As assisted by
Snr C/S Int

LRH:DM:dr:kjm
Copyright (c) 1979, 1980
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
082. NEW SOLO AUDITORS COURSE Part B

This course does not have a true checksheet. There are no
additional course materials. Instead it consists of solo 
auditing the Solo Assists as instructed by the C/S using
the materials in part A above as reference for how to solo 
audit.

The following HCOB, which is used by the C/S, includes all
the solo assist C/Ses.


========================
083. HCOB 30 SEP 81R r. 30 Jan 82 STD. C/S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SOLO...


HUBBARD COMMUNICATIONS OFFICE
Saint Hill Manor, East Grinstead, Sussex

HCO BULLETIN OF 30 SEPTEMBER 1981R
REVISED 30 JANUARY 1982
(Cancels BTB 12 Dec 71R VI Rev. & Reiss. 11.9.74
STANDARD C/S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SOLO STUDENT AUDITOR
and its Attachments.)

(Standard C/Ses for the Solo Student Auditor have been updated 
as Attachments to this HCOB and include the use of the CHECKLIST 
FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION, HCOB 9 July 1980, Solo Series #1. 
Method 5 Assessment and Lock Scanning have been deleted from the 
Solo Student C/Ses as these procedures, as such, are not used by 
the Solo Auditor.)

(Re-revised to add Solo Student C/Ses that, will give CASE WINS as 
well as practice solo sessions.)
(Revisions Not in Script)


Limited Distribution
SHes, AOs & FSO 
Solo C/Ses & 
Solo Supervisors 


STANDARD C/S INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE SOLO STUDENT AUDITOR


REF. HCOB 30 JAN 82 C/SING SOLO STUDENT AUDITORS

This bulletin, with its Attachments, is for use in
conjunction with the auditing section of The New Hubbard
Solo Auditor Course (HCO PL 28 January 82 Issue II).

The standard C/Ses on the Attachments, while primarily
training actions, are also designed to start the Solo
Student Auditor on his solo auditing at the correct
gradient. The Solo C/S is not limited to these Solo Student
C/Ses.

Solo Student Auditors will make good gains from these
actions. The main emphasis, however, must be on their use
as training actions for the student as a Solo auditor, to
ensure he is using the exact and correct session procedure,
keeping proper session admin and doing a competent job of
basic auditing.

They provide him with a foolproof gradient for "getting his
feet wet" when he begins to solo audit, while giving him 
experience in running a standard Solo session by the book.

The C/Ses are issued to the student auditor one C/S at a
time, and each C/S is checked out on the student before he
does the action.

Should the student auditor flub any action, he is crammed
on the materials and drills covering that action before he
audits further.

Each action is repeated until the student can do it
successfully with no flubs.

It is the responsibility of the Solo Student Auditor, the
Solo Supervisor and the Solo C/S to ensure the actions are
not skimped. The success of the Solo Auditor on advanced
levels will depend upon the certainty and competence he
achieves on these student auditor actions.

The Solo Student C/Ses from No. 8 on, are designed to give
the Solo Student Auditor both increased confidence and CASE
WINS!

A supply of these Standard C/Ses should be mimeoed in
quantity and made available to the Solo Case Supervisor.
The mimeoed C/S that applies is then selected and given to
the Solo Student Auditor as his actual C/S for each session.

L. RON HUBBARD
FOUNDER

Assisted by
Senior C/S International

LRH:DM:bk
Copyright (c) 1981, 1982
by L. Ron Hubbard
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED


========================
084. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 0 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 0

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 0


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 0

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________



DOING A WORKSHEET


(No auditing, just a proper worksheet.)

Ref. HCOB 9 Jul 80, Solo series No. 1, CHECKLIST FOR
SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION .

1. Do a proper worksheet. No auditing. Just get on the
meter and do it all correctly ( HCOB 9.7.80 Steps 1 - 51 ).

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
085. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 1 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 1

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 1


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 1

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


ARC BREAK RUD


0. Do steps 1-35 of HCOB 9 Jul 80, Solo series No.1,
CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION.

1. Fly the ARC Break Rud.

Use ARCU CDEINR E/S to F/N VGIs.

Use False and Suppress if necessary.

2. If no current ARC Break, spot a time you did have an ARC Break.

Use ARCU CDEINR on that time and take it E/S to F/N.

3. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No.1.

4. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam, and put
exam in your folder.

5. Hand your folder in to the Supervisor.

___________________________
(Case Supervisor)


========================
086. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 2 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 2

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 2


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 2

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


PTP RUD


0. Set up for the session , per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series
No . 1, CHECKLIST FOR SETTING UP A SOLO SESSION.

1. Fly the PTP Rud.

Use itsa E/S itsa to F/N VGIs.

Use False and Suppress if necessary.

2. If no current PTP, look for a time you did have a PTP.

Take that to F/N VGIs using itsa E/S itsa.

3. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

4 . Report to PC Examiner for after session exam, and put
the exam in your folder.

5. Hand your folder in to the Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
087. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 3R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 3R

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 3R


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 3R

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


WITHHOLD RUD


0. Set up for session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. Fly the withhold Rud ( per HCOB 11 Aug 78 Issue 1 )

" HAS A WITHHOLD BEEN MISSED ? "

2. If you get a read, find out :

(a) What was it ?

(b) When was it ?

(c) Is that ALL of the withhold ?

(d) Who missed it ?

(e) What did he/she do that made you wonder whether or not
he/she knew ? (f) Who else missed it ? Repeat (e) above.

Get another and another who missed it, using the Suppress
button as needed, and repeating (e) as above.

3. Clean it to F/N, or if no F/N, take it earlier similar
with the question: " IS THERE AN EARLIER SIMILAR MISSED
WITHHOLD ? "

4. Handle each earlier missed withhold you get per step 2
above until you get an F/N.

5. If no current missed withhold ( in step 1 above ), find
a time when you did have a missed withhold and handle per
steps 2,3 and 4 above.

6. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

7. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam and put
exam in your folder .

8. Hand your folder in to your Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
088. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 4 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 4

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 4


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 4

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


OVERTS


0. Set up for session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. Fly Overts as a rudiment using the question:

" HAVE I COMMITTED AN OVERT ? "

Use itsa E/S itsa to F/N VGIs.

2. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

3. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam, and put
exam in your folder.

4. Hand your folder in to your Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
089. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 5 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 5

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 5


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 5

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


ALL RUDS


0. Set up the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series 1.

1. Fly all Ruds ( ARC Break, PTP, W/H )

Use False and Suppress if necessary.

Get an F/N on each, even if nothing on it.

2. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series 1.

3. Report to Examiner for after session exam, put the exam
in your folder.

4. Hand your folder in to the Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )



========================
090. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 6 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 6

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 6


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 6

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


L1C METHOD 3


0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1

1. Do an L1C Method 3.

Use the prefix " Recently ? "

Use False and Suppress if necessary.

Take each item that reads to F/N GIs or VGIs using itsa E/S itsa.

NOTE: If you can't F/N a reading item, end off at that
point and return your folder to the C/S for further
instructions.

2. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

3. Report to the PC Examiner for after session exam and put
the exam in your folder.

4. Hand your folder in to the Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
091. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 7 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 7

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 7


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 7

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


L1C METHOD 5


0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1

1. Do an L1C Method 5.

Use the prefix "Recently ... ?"

Use False and Suppress if necessary.

Take each item that reads to F/N GIs or VGIs using itsa E/S itsa.

NOTE: If you can't F/N a reading item, end off at that
point and return your folder to the C/S for further
instructions.

2. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

3. Report to the PC Examiner for after session exam and put
the exam in your folder.

4. Hand your folder in to the Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
092. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 8 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 8

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 8


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 8

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


WORD CLEARING


( You will need a Technical Dictionary as well as a good
English one. )

0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. Fly a rud if no F/N.

2. On each of the following words, do these steps:

(a) Look up the definition of the word.

(b) Use the word in sentences until you understand it
conceptually and get an F/ N. If there is a word in the
definition that you don't understand, clear that word by
looking up it's definition and using that word in sentences
to conceptual understanding and F/N. Then return to the
previous definition that you were clearing.

(c) Take each word to F/N. If no F/N, there could be an
earlier misunderstood word. If so, clear the earlier word
to F/N per (a) and (b) above, then return to F/N the word
you were on.

(d) On any word that has more than one meaning, clear the
first definition and use the word in sentences to F/N .
Then clear the next definition and use the word in
sentences to F/N. Do this for each definition or meaning of
the word.

3. "IS THERE ANY WORD ON THE LIST THAT I DO NOT FULLY 
UNDERSTAND?"

If so, clear it per steps 2 (a) and (b) above.

4. "IS THERE ANY OTHER WORD I HAVE ENCOUNTERED IN STUDYING
DIANETICS OR SCIENTOLOGY THAT I DID NOT FULLY UNDERSTAND?"

If so, clear it per step 2 (a) and (b) above.

5. Complete session admin per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

6. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam and put
exam in your folder .

7. Hand in your folder to the Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


ATTACHMENT 8B:


CONCEPTUAL _____________ AUDITING _____________

UNDERSTANDING _____________ RUDIMENTS _____________

DEFINITION _____________ ARC BREAK _____________

THETAN _____________ PTP _____________

MIND _____________ MISSED WITHHOLD_____________

ANALYTICAL MIND ___________ OVERT _____________

REACTIVE MIND _____________ MOTIVATOR _____________

BANK _____________ RELEASE _____________

BODY _____________ CLEAR _____________

DIANETICS _____________ SCIENTOLOGY _____________

OPERATING THETAN___________ GAINS _____________

FLOATING NEEDLE ___________ KEY - IN _____________

DIMENSION POINT ___________ KEY - OUT _____________

BE _____________ DO _____________

ERASURE _____________ HAVE _____________

LOCK _____________ GOAL _____________

SECONDARY _____________ BARRIER _____________

ENGRAM _____________ FREEDOM _____________

FACSIMILE _____________ OPPONENT _____________

MOCK UP _____________ ALLY _____________

RIDGE _____________ MATTER _____________

FLOW _____________ ENERGY _____________

OUTFLOW _____________ SPACE _____________

INFLOW _____________ TIME _____________

CIRCUIT _____________ FORM _____________

MACHINE _____________ LOCATION _____________

P.T.S _____________ THETA _____________

S.P. _____________ ENTHETA _____________

SOMATIC _____________ GAME _____________

PSYCHOSOMATIC _____________ POSTULATE _____________

PAIN _____________ CONSIDERATION _____________

SENSATION _____________ PERCEPTION _____________

VALENCE _____________ KNOWINGNESS _____________

IDENTITY _____________ STATIC _____________

VIEWPOINT _____________ PRE - OT _____________



========================
093. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 9 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 9

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 9


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 9

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


RUDS OF LONG DURATION


The handling of these rudiments, is the same as given in
HCOB 11.8.78 RUDIMENTS, DEFINITIONS AND PATTER. The
questions given below, are to find the out rud of long
duration. )

0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. "IS THERE AN ARC BREAK THAT I HAVE HAD FOR A LONG TIME?"

(If reading, handle to F/N per the above bulletin. Use
False and Suppress if necessary.)

2. "IS THERE A PROBLEM THAT I HAVE HAD FOR A LONG TIME?"

(If reading, handle to F/N per the above bulletin. Use
False and Suppress if necessary.)

3. "IS THERE A WITHHOLD THAT I HAVE HAD FOR A LONG TIME?"

(If reading, handle to F/N per the above bulletin. Use
False and Suppress if necessary.)

4. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

5. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam and put the
exam in your folder.

6. Hand your folder in to your Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
094. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 10 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 10

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 10


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 10

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


REPAIR SESSION


0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. Do an L1C using the prefix "IN AUDITING" Method 3 assessment 
and handling. Take each reading line to F/N or E/S to F/N.

2. When you have done the L1C once through, assess it again
from the beginning, handling each reading line. Do this as
many times as needed until you have a big win or the list
F/Ns on a new assessment.

3. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

4. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam and put the
exam in your folder.

5. Hand your folder in to your Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )


========================
095. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 11 SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 11

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 11


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 11

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


REHAB SESSION


(Ref: HCOB 30.6.65, RELEASE REHABILITATION OF FORMER
RELEASES AND THETAN EXTERIORS )

0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. Locate an earlier win or release point.

2. Loosely locate the session or time it occurred.

3. Get in Suppress button on the session or time by asking:

"ON THAT SESSION WAS ANYTHING SUPPRESSED?"

or

"AT THAT TIME WAS ANYTHING SUPPRESSED?"

4. Get in Invalidation button by asking:

"ON THAT SESSION WAS ANYTHING INVALIDATED?"

or

"AT THAT TIME WAS ANYTHING INVALIDATED?"

5. Get "WHAT WAS UNACKNOWLEDGED?"

6. Indicate anything found in 3, 4 or 5 as By - Passed charge.

7. Find the KEY - IN that was KEYED - OUT at the moment of release.

(The person went release because something keyed out at
that time or during the session.) 8. When THIS ( 7 above )
is found and recognized by the PC, the PC will get a
resurgence of their release state.

9. If this does not happen, find what keyed in that ended
the release state and repeat steps ( 2 ) to ( 8 ) on it . 
End off when the earlier release has been rehabilitated 
accompanied by an F/N.

10. Unless you had a big win or persistent F/N on the
above, repeat steps (1) to (9) until you are on a win or
persistent F/N.

11. Complete session admin per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

12. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam and put exam in

13. Hand your folder in to your Supervisor.

___________________________
( Case supervisor )


========================
096. HCOB 30 SEP 81R ATTACHMENT 12R SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 12R

HCOB 30.9.81 R
Rev. 30.1.82
ATTACHMENT 12R


SOLO STUDENT C/S NO. 12R

NAME:________________________ DATE: _______________

_______________________
( Session Grade )

C/S COMMENTS:_____________________________________________________


SELF ANALYSIS


0. Set up for the session, per steps 1 - 35 of Solo series No. 1.

1. Fly a rud if no F/N.

2. Take a copy of SELF ANALYSIS, turn to page 118, list 5.
Begin to assess the list and the lists after it until you
get a reading question.

3. Recall the answer to the question. If no F/N, do E/S to
an earlier similar incident. Continue until you get an F/N.

4. Continue with list assessing. (You will probably find
the the needle will stop F/Ning.) 5. Take the next
reading question you find.

6. Recall the answer to the question. If no F/N, handle as
in (3) above.

7. Continue to assess the questions, and handle as in (6).
When you have an F/N that does not stop, you will have
achieved a PERSISTENT F/N. Note that you also had a win.

8. Complete session admin, per steps 36 - 49 of Solo series No. 1.

9. Report to PC Examiner for after session exam and put
exam in your folder.

10. Hand your folder in to your Supervisor.

NOTE TO C/S: A sensitivity set too high or an inability to
concentrate on a NEW question, will give the Pre an F/N
that won't die at once when he starts this C/S. This is
really a drill on how one kills a persistent F/N by putting
attention on new subjects. It is the one you can't kill
that way which the persistent F/N. While no real trouble is
expected, this puts the Pre more in control of his meter, a
necessary thing on some upper levels.

WARNING: It may take a few repeats or sessions of this C/S
to get a persistent F/N going on some PCs.

___________________________
( Case Supervisor )

========================
(end of Solo Pack)

_



